MicroStrategy Mobile Design and Administration Guide A platform for Mobile Intelligence

Document technical information

Format pdf
Size 5.6 MB
First found Jun 9, 2017

Document content analysis

Language
English
Type
not defined
Concepts
no text concepts found

Persons

Linus Torvalds
Linus Torvalds

wikipedia, lookup

Organizations

Places

Transcript

MicroStrategy Mobile
Design and
Administration Guide
A platform for Mobile Intelligence
Version 9.4.1 Update 5
Document Number: 09540941-5
Sixteenth Edition, 9.4.1 Update 5
To ensure that you are using the documentation that corresponds to the software you are licensed to use, compare this version number with the software
version shown in “About MicroStrategy...” in the Help menu of your software.
Document number: 09540941-5
Copyright © 2014 by MicroStrategy Incorporated. All rights reserved.
If you have not executed a written or electronic agreement with MicroStrategy or any authorized MicroStrategy distributor, the following terms apply:
This software and documentation are the proprietary and confidential information of MicroStrategy Incorporated and may not be provided to any other
person. Copyright © 2001-2014 by MicroStrategy Incorporated. All rights reserved.
THIS SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” AND WITHOUT EXPRESS OR LIMITED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND BY EITHER
MICROSTRATEGY INCORPORATED OR ANYONE WHO HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN THE CREATION, PRODUCTION, OR DISTRIBUTION OF THE
SOFTWARE OR DOCUMENTATION, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, GOOD TITLE AND NONINFRINGMENT, QUALITY OR ACCURACY. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE SOFTWARE OR DOCUMENTATION PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU (AND NOT MICROSTRATEGY, INC. OR ANYONE ELSE WHO HAS BEEN INVOLVED WITH THE CREATION, PRODUCTION, OR
DISTRIBUTION OF THE SOFTWARE OR DOCUMENTATION) ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR, OR
CORRECTION. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO
YOU.
In no event will MicroStrategy, Inc. or any other person involved with the creation, production, or distribution of the Software be liable to you on account
of any claim for damage, including any lost profits, lost savings, or other special, incidental, consequential, or exemplary damages, including but not limited
to any damages assessed against or paid by you to any third party, arising from the use, inability to use, quality, or performance of such Software and
Documentation, even if MicroStrategy, Inc. or any such other person or entity has been advised of the possibility of such damages, or for the claim by any
other party. In addition, MicroStrategy, Inc. or any other person involved in the creation, production, or distribution of the Software shall not be liable for
any claim by you or any other party for damages arising from the use, inability to use, quality, or performance of such Software and Documentation, based
upon principles of contract warranty, negligence, strict liability for the negligence of indemnity or contribution, the failure of any remedy to achieve its
essential purpose, or otherwise. The entire liability of MicroStrategy, Inc. and your exclusive remedy shall not exceed, at the option of MicroStrategy, Inc.,
either a full refund of the price paid, or replacement of the Software. No oral or written information given out expands the liability of MicroStrategy, Inc.
beyond that specified in the above limitation of liability. Some states do not allow the limitation or exclusion of liability for incidental or consequential
damages, so the above limitation may not apply to you.
The information contained in this manual (the Documentation) and the Software are copyrighted and all rights are reserved by MicroStrategy, Inc.
MicroStrategy, Inc. reserves the right to make periodic modifications to the Software or the Documentation without obligation to notify any person or entity
of such revision. Copying, duplicating, selling, or otherwise distributing any part of the Software or Documentation without prior written consent of an
authorized representative of MicroStrategy, Inc. are prohibited. U.S. Government Restricted Rights. It is acknowledged that the Software and
Documentation were developed at private expense, that no part is public domain, and that the Software and Documentation are Commercial Computer
Software provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS under Federal Acquisition Regulations and agency supplements to them. Use, duplication, or disclosure
by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at
DFAR 252.227-7013 et. seq. or subparagraphs (c)(1) and (2) of the Commercial Computer Software—Restricted Rights at FAR 52.227-19, as applicable.
Contractor is MicroStrategy, Inc., 1850 Towers Crescent Plaza, Tysons Corner, VA 22182. Rights are reserved under copyright laws of the United States
with respect to unpublished portions of the Software.
The following are either trademarks or registered trademarks of MicroStrategy Incorporated in the United States and certain other countries:
MicroStrategy, MicroStrategy 6, MicroStrategy 7, MicroStrategy 7i, MicroStrategy 7i Evaluation Edition, MicroStrategy 7i Olap Services, MicroStrategy 8,
MicroStrategy 9, MicroStrategy Distribution Services, MicroStrategy MultiSource Option, MicroStrategy Command Manager, MicroStrategy Enterprise
Manager, MicroStrategy Object Manager, MicroStrategy Reporting Suite, MicroStrategy Power User, MicroStrategy Analyst, MicroStrategy Consumer,
MicroStrategy Email Delivery, MicroStrategy BI Author, MicroStrategy BI Modeler, MicroStrategy Evaluation Edition, MicroStrategy Administrator,
MicroStrategy Agent, MicroStrategy Architect, MicroStrategy BI Developer Kit, MicroStrategy Broadcast Server, MicroStrategy Broadcaster,
MicroStrategy Broadcaster Server, MicroStrategy Business Intelligence Platform, MicroStrategy Consulting, MicroStrategy CRM Applications,
MicroStrategy Customer Analyzer, MicroStrategy Desktop, MicroStrategy Desktop Analyst, MicroStrategy Desktop Designer, MicroStrategy eCRM 7,
MicroStrategy Education, MicroStrategy eTrainer, MicroStrategy Executive, MicroStrategy Infocenter, MicroStrategy Intelligence Server, MicroStrategy
Intelligence Server Universal Edition, MicroStrategy MDX Adapter, MicroStrategy Narrowcast Server, MicroStrategy Objects, MicroStrategy OLAP
Provider, MicroStrategy SDK, MicroStrategy Support, MicroStrategy Telecaster, MicroStrategy Transactor, MicroStrategy Web, MicroStrategy Web
Business Analyzer, MicroStrategy World, Application Development and Sophisticated Analysis, Best In Business Intelligence, Centralized Application
Management, Information Like Water, Intelligence Through Every Phone, Intelligence To Every Decision Maker, Intelligent E-Business, Personalized
Intelligence Portal, Query Tone, Rapid Application Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The
Integrated Business Intelligence Platform Built For The Enterprise, The Platform For Intelligent E-Business, The Scalable Business Intelligence Platform
Built For The Internet, Office Intelligence, MicroStrategy Office, MicroStrategy Report Services, MicroStrategy Web MMT, MicroStrategy Web Services,
Pixel Perfect, Pixel-Perfect, MicroStrategy Mobile, MicroStrategy Integrity Manager and MicroStrategy Data Mining Services are all registered trademarks
or trademarks of MicroStrategy Incorporated.
All other company and product names may be trademarks of the respective companies with which they are associated. Specifications subject to change
without notice. MicroStrategy is not responsible for errors or omissions. MicroStrategy makes no warranties or commitments concerning the availability
of future products or versions that may be planned or under development.
Patent Information
This product is patented. One or more of the following patents may apply to the product sold herein: U.S. Patent Nos. 6,154,766, 6,173,310, 6,260,050,
6,263,051, 6,269,393, 6,279,033, 6,400,265, 6,567,796, 6,587,547, 6,606,596, 6,658,093, 6,658,432, 6,661,340, 6,662,195, 6,671,715, 6,691,100,
6,694,316, 6,697,808, 6,704,723, 6,741,980, 6,765,997, 6,768,788, 6,772,137, 6,788,768, 6,798,867, 6,801,910, 6,820,073, 6,829,334, 6,836,537,
6,850,603, 6,859,798, 6,873,693, 6,885,734, 6,940,953, 6,964,012, 6,977,992, 6,996,568, 6,996,569, 7,003,512, 7,010,518, 7,016,480, 7,020,251,
7,039,165, 7,082,422, 7,113,993, 7,127,403, 7,174,349, 7,181,417, 7,194,457, 7,197,461, 7,228,303, 7,260,577, 7,266,181, 7,272,212, 7,302,639,
7,324,942, 7,330,847, 7,340,040, 7,356,758, 7,356,840, 7,415,438, 7,428,302, 7,430,562, 7,440,898, 7,486,780, 7,509,671, 7,516,181, 7,559,048,
7,574,376, 7,617,201, 7,725,811, 7,801,967, 7,836,178, 7,861,161, 7,861,253, 7,881,443, 7,925,616, 7,945,584, 7,970,782, 8,005,870, 8,051,168,
8,051,369, 8,094,788, 8,130,918, 8,296,287, 8,321,411, 8,452,755, 8,521,733, and 8,522,192. Other patent applications are pending.
Various MicroStrategy products contain the copyrighted technology of third parties. This product may contain one or more of the following copyrighted
technologies:
Graph Generation Engine Copyright © 1998-2014. Three D Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved.
Actuate® Formula One. Copyright © 1993-2014 Actuate Corporation. All rights reserved.
XML parser Copyright © 2003-2014 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved.
Xalan XSLT processor. Copyright © 1999-2014. The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved.
Xerces XML parser. Copyright © 1999-2014. The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved.
FOP XSL formatting objects. Copyright © 2004-2014. The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved.
Portions of Intelligence Server memory management Copyright © 1991-2014 Compuware Corporation. All rights reserved.
ASIHTTPRequest library. Copyright © 2007-2014, All-Seeing Interactive. All rights reserved.
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)
International Components for Unicode
Copyright © 1999-2014 Compaq Computer Corporation
Copyright © 1999-2014 Hewlett-Packard Company
Copyright © 1999-2014 IBM Corporation
Copyright © 1999-2014 Hummingbird Communications Ltd.
Copyright © 1999-2014 Silicon Graphics, Inc.
Copyright © 1999-2014 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
Copyright © 1999-2014 The Open Group
All rights reserved.
Real Player and RealJukebox are included under license from Real Networks, Inc. Copyright © 1999-2014. All rights reserved.
CONTENTS
Book Overview and
Other Resources
Description of this guide............................................................ xi
About this book ............................................................................. xii
How to find business scenarios and examples ....................... xii
What’s new in this guide ........................................................ xiii
Prerequisites ...........................................................................xv
Who should use this guide......................................................xv
Resources.................................................................................... xvi
Documentation....................................................................... xvi
Education .............................................................................. xxv
Consulting ............................................................................ xxvi
Technical Support ................................................................ xxvi
Feedback ................................................................................... xxvi
1. Using MicroStrategy
Mobile
Introduction.................................................................................. 1
Common business scenarios for MicroStrategy Mobile................. 2
Overview: Creating documents for mobile..................................... 4
Overview: Creating apps with MicroStrategy Mobile ..................... 8
Viewing demo apps and dashboards: Restoring default
settings ........................................................................................ 11
2. Designing Reports
and Documents for
Mobile Devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Introduction................................................................................ 13
Best practices for designing reports and documents for
mobile devices ............................................................................. 14
Best practices for enhancing performance on a mobile
device .................................................................................... 15
Best practices while planning reports and documents........... 15
v
Contents
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Best practices while creating reports and documents............ 18
Best practices while creating reports and documents
for the iPhone 5 ..................................................................... 20
Best practices while creating reports and documents for
Blackberry .............................................................................. 21
Creating documents for mobile devices....................................... 22
Creating documents for mobile devices using a template ..... 23
Formatting documents for mobile devices ............................. 25
Allowing users to access information easily: mobile-friendly
panel stacks ........................................................................... 37
Allowing users easy access to document content: docked
headers and footers ............................................................... 53
Allowing users to copy text from documents on iOS
devices................................................................................... 54
Notifying users: Displaying a badge next to the
MicroStrategy Mobile application icon ................................... 56
Creating documents that use Transaction Services to
update your data warehouse ................................................. 60
Selecting a data view for reports and documents on
BlackBerry devices ................................................................ 61
Allowing users to filter data: prompts........................................... 63
Best practices for creating prompts for mobile devices ......... 65
Allowing users to filter data based on a single value: Value
prompts .................................................................................. 66
Allowing users to choose from a list of attribute elements:
Attribute element prompts...................................................... 70
Allowing users to choose elements from multiple attributes:
Hierarchy prompts.................................................................. 73
Allowing users to choose from a list of objects: Object
prompts .................................................................................. 73
Prompting users for their location: Geo Location prompts..... 74
Creating Barcode Reader prompts ........................................ 75
Allowing users to filter data using filter panels............................. 78
Organizing transactions with tables on iOS devices.................... 78
The parts of a table ................................................................ 80
Creating a table ..................................................................... 81
3. Displaying data as
interactive
visualizations:
Widgets
vi
Introduction................................................................................ 91
Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile
devices......................................................................................... 92
Displaying widgets as grids or graphs ................................... 94
Displaying a Data Cloud widget ............................................. 94
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Contents
Displaying an interactive event calendar: Date Selection
widget .................................................................................... 95
Displaying data in an interactive graph: Graph Matrix
widget .................................................................................... 99
Displaying data in a Heat Map widget.................................... 99
Displaying data as an overlay on an image: Image Layout
widget .................................................................................. 101
Displaying images: Image Viewer widget ............................ 102
Displaying data in rows and columns: Interactive Grid
widget .................................................................................. 105
Displaying geographical data: Map widget .......................... 109
Visualizing trends: Microcharts widget................................. 127
Downloading and viewing multimedia files: Multimedia
widget .................................................................................. 131
Visualizing relationships: Network widget ............................ 133
Uploading images: Photo Uploader widget.......................... 133
Displaying RSS feeds: RSS Reader widget......................... 138
Gathering data from users: Survey widget........................... 140
Displaying a Timeline widget ............................................... 142
Displaying data trends: Time Series widget......................... 147
Downloading and playing videos: Video Player widget........ 152
Displaying widgets using the entire screen on mobile
devices....................................................................................... 154
Displaying widgets on iOS devices with a dark or light theme... 155
4. Using links in
documents
Introduction.............................................................................. 157
Opening a device’s installed applications from documents ....... 158
Linking to reports and documents from a mobile document ...... 163
Creating a link for a mobile document ................................. 165
Specifying how prompts are answered in the target ............ 169
Passing selector values from the source to the target ......... 171
Creating a link URL to specify page-by, report view,
layout, or grouping for the target.......................................... 172
Using links to access features within the MicroStrategy Mobile
application.................................................................................. 178
Linking from documents with buttons and tab bars ................... 180
Creating a tab bar to hold buttons ....................................... 184
Creating a button to link from a Mobile document ............... 186
Storing links on NFC tags on Android devices .......................... 190
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
vii
Contents
5. Administering
MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Introduction.............................................................................. 193
Overview: MicroStrategy Mobile architecture ............................ 194
Installing and configuring Mobile Server.................................... 195
Authentication settings for the Mobile Server application .... 195
Privileges and permissions .................................................. 196
SSL encryption .................................................................... 197
Client authentication with a certificate server....................... 197
Destination folder for the Photo Uploader widget and
Signature Capture input control ........................................... 202
Working with projects and managing Intelligence Server .......... 203
Creating a new connection to Intelligence Server................ 204
Connecting to an available Intelligence Server.................... 206
Disconnecting from an Intelligence Server .......................... 207
Specifying default connection, load balance, and timeout
settings ................................................................................ 208
Encrypting session information ............................................ 210
Maintaining TCP/IP connections through a firewall ............. 211
Enabling Single Sign-on authentication for Mobile .............. 212
Configuring and viewing logs and statistics ............................... 214
Determining what and where information is logged ............. 215
Creating logs to debug API issues....................................... 217
Viewing server logs.............................................................. 219
Enabling and viewing statistics ............................................ 221
Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile
application.................................................................................. 222
Deploying MicroStrategy Mobile for iPhone or iPad ............ 223
Configuring MicroStrategy Mobile for iPhone or iPad .......... 226
Deploying MicroStrategy Mobile for Android........................ 236
Configuring MicroStrategy Mobile for Android ..................... 237
Installing MicroStrategy Mobile for BlackBerry .................... 243
Configuring MicroStrategy Mobile for BlackBerry ................ 246
Configuring connectivity settings for iPhone, iPad,
Android, and BlackBerry devices ......................................... 260
Configuring the home screen for iPhone, iPad, and
Android devices ................................................................... 265
Pre-caching online content on the mobile device for
offline use ............................................................................ 276
Configuring MicroStrategy Mobile for iPhone or iPad
to receive push notifications ................................................ 278
Applying configurations to mobile devices ........................... 279
Managing multiple configurations for MicroStrategy
Mobile .................................................................................. 282
viii
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Contents
The Mobile subscription workflow.............................................. 283
Scheduling the report or document...................................... 284
Executing the report on Intelligence Server ......................... 284
Retrieving the report in MicroStrategy Mobile...................... 285
Data security in Mobile......................................................... 285
Managing Mobile report subscriptions ....................................... 286
Managing subscriptions ....................................................... 287
Managing multiple subscriptions at once with Developer .... 288
Managing subscriptions using Command Manager............. 293
Managing your subscriptions through MicroStrategy
Web ..................................................................................... 294
Managing subscriptions in MicroStrategy Developer........... 296
Managing subscriptions with Newsstand for the iPhone
and iPad............................................................................... 298
Enabling real time updates for BlackBerry................................. 298
Enabling real time updates in the project............................. 299
Enabling real time updates for the user ............................... 300
Troubleshooting MicroStrategy Mobile ...................................... 302
Troubleshooting connection issues...................................... 302
Troubleshooting reports and documents ............................. 302
Troubleshooting prompt answers......................................... 303
Glossary................................................................................................................................... 305
Index......................................................................................................................................... 313
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
ix
Contents
x
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
BOOK OVERVIEW AND OTHER
RESOURCES
Description of this guide
MicroStrategy Mobile gives users access to MicroStrategy reports and
documents on their mobile devices, and allows users to analyze and interact
with business data. There are different applications for use on the
BlackBerry® smartphone, the Apple© iPhone®, the Apple iPad®, and
Android® devices.
This guide discusses how an administrator can install and configure
MicroStrategy Mobile on mobile devices and how a designer working in
MicroStrategy Developer or MicroStrategy Web can create reports and
documents for use with MicroStrategy Mobile.
Specifically, this guide includes the following:
•
Chapter 1, Using MicroStrategy Mobile describes common business
scenarios and use cases for the MicroStrategy Mobile application.
•
Chapter 2, Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
provides best practices to design reports and dashboard-style documents
in MicroStrategy Web, for display and use on mobile devices such as
iPhones, iPads, BlackBerry devices, and Android-based phones and
tablets.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
xi
Book Overview and Other Resources
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
•
Chapter 3, Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
provides best practices for displaying data as widgets.
•
Chapter 4, Using links in documents describes the steps to create links in
documents for mobile devices, which allow users to open a device’s
applications or navigate between reports and documents.
•
Chapter 5, Administering MicroStrategy Mobile describes how to install
and configure MicroStrategy Mobile on an Intelligence Server, and how
to install and configure the MicroStrategy Mobile client on mobile
devices. It also explains how to subscribe to reports and discusses the
ways in which administrators can manage multiple subscriptions
simultaneously.
About this book
This book is divided into chapters that begin with a brief overview of the
chapter’s content.
The following sections provide the location of additional examples, list
prerequisites for using this book, and describe the user roles the information
in this book was designed for.
sample documents and images in this guide, as well as some
 The
example steps, were created with dates that may no longer be
available in the MicroStrategy Tutorial project. If you are re-creating
an example, replace the year(s) shown in this guide with the most
recent year(s) available in the software.
How to find business scenarios and examples
Within this guide, many of the concepts discussed are accompanied by
business scenarios or other descriptive examples. Many of the examples use
the MicroStrategy Tutorial, which is MicroStrategy’s sample warehouse and
project. Information about the MicroStrategy Tutorial, which is included as
part of the MicroStrategy Analytics Modules, can be found in the Basic
Reporting Guide.
Other examples in this book use the Analytics Modules projects, which
include a set of pre-created sample reports, each from a different business
xii About this book
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Book Overview and Other Resources
area. Sample reports present data for analysis in such business areas as
financial reporting, human resources, and customer analysis.
Detailed examples of advanced reporting functionality can be found in the
Advanced Reporting Guide.
What’s new in this guide
MicroStrategy 9.4.1 iOS Update 5
•
For devices with very high-resolution screens, such as the iPhone 6 Plus,
you can take advantage of the additional screen space by providing
images of a higher resolution.
For guidelines for adding images to your documents, and additional best
practices to design documents, see Best practices for designing reports
and documents for mobile devices, page 14.
MicroStrategy 9.4.1 iOS Update 4
•
You can create a link that opens and prints a target document. For steps,
see Using links to access features within the MicroStrategy Mobile
application, page 178.
MicroStrategy 9.4.1 iOS Update 3
•
You can enable MicroStrategy Mobile for iOS to download data when the
app is running in the background so that new data is already downloaded
and available when users resume the app. For steps, see Configuring
MicroStrategy Mobile for iPhone or iPad, page 226.
•
You can customize the accent color used for some text and buttons in
MicroStrategy Mobile for iOS. For steps, see Configuring MicroStrategy
Mobile for iPhone or iPad, page 226.
•
You can specify a dark or light color theme for MicroStrategy Mobile for
iOS. For steps, see Configuring MicroStrategy Mobile for iPhone or
iPad, page 226.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
About this book
xiii
Book Overview and Other Resources
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
MicroStrategy 9.4.1 Update 1
•
A user can interact with data and send those interactions back to the data
source, using transactions to make decisions and write back to the data
source. If you have multiple input object controls on a document
displayed on an iOS device, you can create a transaction table to group
and organize the controls. For steps and an example, see Organizing
transactions with tables on iOS devices, page 78.
Analytics Enterprise
•
The name of MicroStrategy Desktop has been changed to MicroStrategy
Developer.
MicroStrategy 9.4
•
You can create a Survey widget for an iPad, which allows an analyst to
interact with a survey on an iPad and submit answers, which are then
stored in your data source.
For steps and an example, see Gathering data from users: Survey
widget, page 140.
•
You can create a Microcharts widget for use on an iPhone. A Microcharts
widget allows users to analyze trends at a glance using compact charts
and line graphs.
For steps and an example, see Visualizing trends: Microcharts widget,
page 127.
•
You can take advantage of Smooth Scroll mode for a Microcharts widget
displayed on an Android device, to ensure that the metric columns in the
widget have enough space to be displayed on a mobile device. For steps,
see Enabling Smooth Scroll mode, page 130.
•
You can select formatting options for a Time Series widget displayed on
an Android device, such as background and label display options. For
steps, see Uploading images: Photo Uploader widget, page 133.
•
You can create a Video Player widget for the iPhone and iPad. This widget
plays video directly in a document. Videos can be cached for offline
viewing.
For steps and an example, see Downloading and playing videos: Video
Player widget, page 152.
xiv About this book
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
•
Book Overview and Other Resources
In a Map widget:



You can display map markers as points on a path displayed on the
map. The line used to represent the path is displayed as thicker for
larger metric values and thinner for smaller metric values.
Additional display themes, such as Desert Theme and Ice Theme, are
available.
You can choose to display or hide items in the map, such as the map
toolbar, or a slider that allows the user to zoom in and out of the map.
For steps to create a Map widget, see Displaying geographical data:
Map widget, page 109.
Prerequisites
Before working with this manual you should be familiar with:
•
The nature and structure of your company’s data that you will analyze in
your business intelligence reports and documents
•
The information provided in the Basic Reporting Guide about analyzing
report data—and the information about designing reports, if you plan to
create reports in MicroStrategy Developer or MicroStrategy Web for use
with MicroStrategy Mobile
Who should use this guide
This document is designed for the following users:
•
Administrators who intend to install and configure MicroStrategy Mobile
on mobile devices.
•
Report and document designers who intend to create reports and
documents in MicroStrategy Developer and MicroStrategy Web for use
with MicroStrategy Mobile.
•
Analysts who intend to run and analyze MicroStrategy reports and
documents using MicroStrategy Mobile on a mobile device.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
About this book
xv
Book Overview and Other Resources
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Resources
This section provides details on how to access books, online help,
MicroStrategy Education and Consulting resources, and how to contact
MicroStrategy Technical Support.
Documentation
MicroStrategy provides both manuals and online help; these two information
sources provide different types of information, as described below:
•
Manuals: In general, MicroStrategy manuals provide:

Introductory information and concepts

Examples and images

Checklists and high-level procedures to get started
The steps to access the manuals are described in Accessing manuals and
other documentation sources, page xxiii.
Most of these manuals are also available printed in a bound, soft cover
format. To purchase printed manuals, contact your MicroStrategy
Account Executive with a purchase order number.
•
Help: In general, MicroStrategy help provides:

Detailed steps to perform procedures

Descriptions of each option on every software screen
Additional formats
MicroStrategy manuals are available as electronic publications,
downloadable on the Apple iBookstore or Google Play, and can be read on
your iOS or Android device respectively. To download a book, search for the
book’s title in the iBookstore or Google Play respectively. To view a list of
manuals that are currently available, scan the following QR codes using your
device’s camera:
xvi Resources
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Book Overview and Other Resources
•
For iOS devices, scan the following QR code:
•
For Android devices, scan the following QR code:
new MicroStrategy releases, it may take several days for the latest
 For
manuals to be available on the iBookstore or Google Play.
Translations
For the most up-to-date translations of MicroStrategy documentation, refer
to the MicroStrategy Knowledge Base. Due to translation time, manuals in
languages other than English may contain information that is one or more
releases behind. You can see the version number on the title page of each
manual.
Finding information
You can search all MicroStrategy books and Help for a word or phrase, with a
simple Google™ search at http://www.google.com. For example, type
“MicroStrategy derived metric” or “MicroStrategy logical table” into a Google
search. As described above, books typically describe general concepts and
examples; Help typically provides detailed steps and screen options. To limit
your search to MicroStrategy books, on Google’s main page you can click
More, then select Books.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Resources
xvii
Book Overview and Other Resources
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Manuals for MicroStrategy overview and evaluation
•
Introduction to MicroStrategy: Evaluation Guide
Instructions for installing, configuring, and using the MicroStrategy
Evaluation Edition of the software. This guide also includes a detailed,
step-by-step evaluation process of MicroStrategy features, where you
perform reporting with the MicroStrategy Tutorial project and its sample
business data.
•
MicroStrategy Evaluation Edition Quick Start Guide
Overview of the installation and evaluation process, and additional
resources.
•
MicroStrategy Suite: Quick Start Guide
Evaluate MicroStrategy as a departmental solution. Provides detailed
information to download, install, configure, and use the MicroStrategy
Suite.
Manuals for query, reporting, and analysis
•
MicroStrategy Installation and Configuration Guide
Information to install and configure MicroStrategy products on
Windows, UNIX, Linux, and HP platforms, as well as basic maintenance
guidelines.
•
MicroStrategy Upgrade Guide
Instructions to upgrade existing MicroStrategy products.
•
MicroStrategy Project Design Guide
Information to create and modify MicroStrategy projects, and
understand facts, attributes, hierarchies, transformations, advanced
schemas, and project optimization.
•
MicroStrategy Basic Reporting Guide
Instructions to get started with MicroStrategy Developer and
MicroStrategy Web, and how to analyze data in a report. Includes the
basics for creating reports, metrics, filters, and prompts.
xviii Resources
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
•
Book Overview and Other Resources
MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide: Enhancing Your Business
Intelligence Application
Instructions for advanced topics in the MicroStrategy system, building on
information in the Basic Reporting Guide. Topics include reports,
Freeform SQL reports, Query Builder reports, filters, metrics, Data
Mining Services, custom groups, consolidations, and prompts.
•
Document and Dashboard Analysis Guide
Instructions for a business analyst to execute and analyze a document in
MicroStrategy Developer and MicroStrategy Web, building on basic
concepts about projects and reports presented in the MicroStrategy
Basic Reporting Guide.
•
MicroStrategy Report Services Document Creation Guide: Creating
Boardroom Quality Documents
Instructions to design and create Report Services documents, building on
information in the Document and Dashboard Analysis Guide. It is
organized to help guide you through creating a new document, from
creating the document itself, to adding objects to the new document, and
formatting the document and its objects.
•
MicroStrategy Dashboards and Widgets Creation Guide: Creating
Interactive Dashboards for Your Data
Instructions for designing and creating MicroStrategy Report Services
dashboards, a type of document that is optimized for viewing online and
for user interactivity. It builds on the basic concepts about documents
presented in the MicroStrategy Report Services Document Creation
Guide.
•
MicroStrategy OLAP Services Guide
Information on MicroStrategy OLAP Services, which is an extension of
MicroStrategy Intelligence Server. OLAP Services features include
Intelligent Cubes, derived metrics, derived elements, dynamic
aggregation, view filters, and dynamic sourcing.
•
MicroStrategy Office User Guide
Instructions for using MicroStrategy Office to work with MicroStrategy
reports and documents in Microsoft® Excel, PowerPoint, and Word, to
analyze, format, and distribute business data.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Resources
xix
Book Overview and Other Resources
•
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
MicroStrategy Mobile Analysis Guide: Analyzing Data with
MicroStrategy Mobile
Information and instructions for using MicroStrategy Mobile to view and
analyze data, and perform other business tasks with MicroStrategy
reports and documents on a mobile device.
•
MicroStrategy Mobile Design and Administration Guide: A Platform for
Mobile Intelligence
Information and instructions to install and configure MicroStrategy
Mobile, as well as instructions for a designer working in MicroStrategy
Developer or MicroStrategy Web to create effective reports and
documents for use with MicroStrategy Mobile.
•
MicroStrategy System Administration Guide: Tuning, Monitoring, and
Troubleshooting Your MicroStrategy Business Intelligence System
Concepts and high-level steps to implement, deploy, maintain, tune, and
troubleshoot a MicroStrategy business intelligence system.
•
MicroStrategy Supplemental Reference for System Administration:
VLDB Properties, Internationalization, User Privileges, and other
Supplemental Information for Administrators
Information and instructions for MicroStrategy administrative tasks such
as configuring VLDB properties and defining data and metadata
internationalization, and reference material for other administrative
tasks.
•
MicroStrategy Functions Reference
Function syntax and formula components; instructions to use functions
in metrics, filters, attribute forms; examples of functions in business
scenarios.
•
MicroStrategy MDX Cube Reporting Guide
Information to integrate MicroStrategy with MDX cube sources. You can
integrate data from MDX cube sources into your MicroStrategy projects
and applications.
Manuals for Analytics Modules
xx Resources
•
Analytics Modules Installation and Porting Guide
•
Customer Analysis Module Reference
•
Sales Force Analysis Module Reference
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Book Overview and Other Resources
•
Financial Reporting Analysis Module Reference
•
Sales and Distribution Analysis Module Reference
•
Human Resources Analysis Module Reference
Manuals for Narrowcast Services products
•
MicroStrategy Narrowcast Server Getting Started Guide
Instructions to work with the tutorial to learn Narrowcast Server
interfaces and features.
•
MicroStrategy Narrowcast Server Installation and Configuration Guide
Information to install and configure Narrowcast Server.
•
MicroStrategy Narrowcast Server Application Designer Guide
Fundamentals of designing Narrowcast Server applications.
•
MicroStrategy Narrowcast Server System Administrator Guide
Concepts and high-level steps to implement, maintain, tune, and
troubleshoot Narrowcast Server.
•
MicroStrategy Narrowcast Server Upgrade Guide
Instructions to upgrade an existing Narrowcast Server.
Software Development Kits
•
MicroStrategy Developer Library (MSDL)
Information to understand the MicroStrategy SDK, including details
about architecture, object models, customization scenarios, code
samples, and so on.
•
MicroStrategy Web SDK
Web SDK is available in the MicroStrategy Developer Library,
 The
which is part of the MicroStrategy SDK.
•
Narrowcast Server SDK Guide
Instructions to customize Narrowcast Server functionality, integrate
Narrowcast Server with other systems, and embed Narrowcast Server
functionality within other applications. Documents the Narrowcast
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Resources
xxi
Book Overview and Other Resources
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Server Delivery Engine and Subscription Portal APIs, and the Narrowcast
Server SPI.
Documentation for MicroStrategy Portlets
•
Enterprise Portal Integration Help
Information to help you implement and deploy MicroStrategy BI within
your enterprise portal, including instructions for installing and
configuring out-of-the-box MicroStrategy Portlets for several major
enterprise portal servers.
This resource is available from http://www.microstrategy.com/
producthelp.
Documentation for MicroStrategy GIS Connectors
•
GIS Integration Help
Information to help you integrate MicroStrategy with Geospatial
Information Systems (GIS), including specific examples for integrating
with various third-party mapping services.
This resource is available from http://www.microstrategy.com/
producthelp.
Help
Each MicroStrategy product includes an integrated help system to
complement the various interfaces of the product as well as the tasks that can
be accomplished using the product.
Some of the MicroStrategy help systems require a web browser to be viewed.
For supported web browsers, see the MicroStrategy Readme.
MicroStrategy provides several ways to access help:
•
Help button: Use the Help button or ? (question mark) icon on most
software windows to see help for that window.
•
Help menu: From the Help menu or link at the top of any screen, select
MicroStrategy Help to see the table of contents, the Search field, and the
index for the help system.
xxii Resources
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
•
Book Overview and Other Resources
F1 key: Press F1 to see context-sensitive help that describes each option in
the software window you are currently viewing.
MicroStrategy Web, MicroStrategy Web Administrator, and
 For
MicroStrategy Mobile Server, pressing the F1 key opens the
context-sensitive help for the web browser you are using to access
these MicroStrategy interfaces. Use the Help menu or ? (question
mark) icon to access help for these MicroStrategy interfaces.
Accessing manuals and other documentation sources
The manuals are available from http://www.microstrategy.com/
producthelp, as well as from your MicroStrategy disk or the machine where
MicroStrategy was installed.
Reader is required to view these manuals. If you do not have
 Adobe
Adobe Reader installed on your computer, you can download it from
http://get.adobe.com/reader/.
The best place for all users to begin is with the MicroStrategy Basic
Reporting Guide.
To access the installed manuals and other documentation sources, see the
following procedures:
•
To access documentation resources from any location, page xxiii
•
To access documentation resources on Windows, page xxiii
•
To access documentation resources on UNIX and Linux, page xxiv
To access documentation resources from any location
1 Visit http://www.microstrategy.com/producthelp.
To access documentation resources on Windows
1 From the Windows Start menu, choose Programs (or All Programs),
MicroStrategy Documentation, then Product Manuals. A page opens in
your browser showing a list of available manuals in PDF format and other
documentation sources.
2 Click the link for the desired manual or other documentation source.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Resources
xxiii
Book Overview and Other Resources
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
3 If you click the link for the Narrowcast Services SDK Guide, a File
Download dialog box opens. This documentation resource must be
downloaded. Select Open this file from its current location, and click
OK.
are not visible on the left side of a product manual, from
 Ifthebookmarks
View menu click Bookmarks and Page. This step varies slightly
depending on your version of Adobe Reader.
To access documentation resources on UNIX and Linux
1 Within your UNIX or Linux machine, navigate to the directory where you
installed MicroStrategy. The default location is /opt/MicroStrategy,
or $HOME/MicroStrategy/install if you do not have write access to
/opt/MicroStrategy.
2 From the MicroStrategy installation directory, open the Help folder.
3 Open the Product_Manuals.htm file in a web browser. A page opens in
your browser showing a list of available manuals in PDF format and other
documentation sources.
4 Click the link for the desired manual or other documentation source.
5 If you click the link for the Narrowcast Services SDK Guide, a File
Download dialog box opens. This documentation resource must be
downloaded. Select Open this file from its current location, and click
OK.
are not visible on the left side of a product manual, from
 Ifthebookmarks
View menu click Bookmarks and Page. This step varies slightly
depending on your version of Adobe Reader.
xxiv Resources
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Book Overview and Other Resources
Documentation standards
MicroStrategy online help and PDF manuals (available both online and in
printed format) use standards to help you identify certain types of content.
The following table lists these standards.
standards may differ depending on the language of this manual;
 These
some languages have rules that supersede the table below.
Type
Indicates
bold
• Button names, check boxes, options, lists, and menus that are the focus of actions or
part of a list of such GUI elements and their definitions
Example: Click Select Warehouse.
italic
• Names of other product manuals and documentation resources
• When part of a command syntax, indicates variable information to be replaced by the
user
Example: The aggregation level is the level of calculation for the metric.
Example: Type copy c:\filename d:\foldername\filename
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Courier
font
Calculations
Code samples
Registry keys
Path and file names
URLs
Messages displayed in the screen
Text to be entered by the user
Example: Sum(revenue)/number of months.
Example: Type cmdmgr -f scriptfile.scp and press Enter.
+
A keyboard command that calls for the use of more than one key (for example,
SHIFT+F1).


A note icon indicates helpful information for specific situations.
A warning icon alerts you to important information such as potential security risks; these
should be read before continuing.
Education
MicroStrategy Education Services provides a comprehensive curriculum and
highly skilled education consultants. Many customers and partners from
over 800 different organizations have benefited from MicroStrategy
instruction. For a detailed description of education offerings and course
curriculums, visit http://www.microstrategy.com/Education.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Resources
xxv
Book Overview and Other Resources
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Consulting
MicroStrategy Consulting Services provides proven methods for delivering
leading-edge technology solutions. Offerings include complex security
architecture designs, performance and tuning, project and testing strategies
and recommendations, strategic planning, and more. For a detailed
description of consulting offerings, visit http://www.microstrategy.com/
services-support/consulting.
Technical Support
If you have questions about a specific MicroStrategy product, you should:
1 Consult the product guides, Help, and readme files. Locations to access
each are described above.
2 Consult the MicroStrategy Knowledge Base online at https://
resource.microstrategy.com/support.
administrator in your organization may be able to help
 Ayoutechnical
resolve your issues immediately.
3 MicroStrategy Technical Support can be contacted by your company's
Support Liaison. Contact information and the Technical Support policy
information is available at http://www.microstrategy.com/
services-support/support/contact.
Feedback
Please send any comments or suggestions about user documentation for
MicroStrategy products to:
[email protected]
Send suggestions for product enhancements to:
[email protected]
When you provide feedback to us, please include the name and version of the
products you are currently using. Your feedback is important to us as we
prepare for future releases.
xxvi Feedback
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Book Overview and Other Resources
Feedback
xxvii
Book Overview and Other Resources
xxviii Feedback
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
1
1.
USING MICROSTRATEGY
MOBILE
Introduction
Use MicroStrategy Mobile to distribute the power of analytics within your
enterprise. You can create a powerful custom mobile app that allows users to
view, analyze, and write-back information to your database or you can use
MicroStrategy Mobile simply as an extension of your MicroStrategy project
to view your project’s documents, dashboards, and reports on your mobile
device at any time.
For an overview of what you can create with Mobile and how, see the
following:
•
Common business scenarios for MicroStrategy Mobile, page 2:
MicroStrategy Mobile can be used to support your business in many
ways. This section provides examples of the kinds of documents and apps
you can create.
•
Overview: Creating documents for mobile, page 4: A document is a
single page that displays data on a mobile device. You can design a
document for viewing on any mobile device or in a web browser. This
section provides a workflow for creating documents for mobile devices
and outlines the considerations to take into account while creating
documents for mobile devices.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
1
1
Using MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
•
Overview: Creating apps with MicroStrategy Mobile, page 8: You can
create custom mobile apps that support your business. This section
provides a workflow for creating mobile apps and outlines the
considerations to take into account while designing apps for mobile
devices.
•
Viewing demo apps and dashboards: Restoring default settings,
page 11: You can restore your Mobile app’s default settings to view the
latest demo apps and examples of new features, which you can then use in
your own custom apps. This section provides steps to restore your app to
MicroStrategy’s default settings.
Common business scenarios for MicroStrategy
Mobile
MicroStrategy Mobile can be used in many ways to support business
activities. Some examples of how Mobile can be used in your business
include the following:
•
Instantly view data from any existing report or document to answer any
queries you have. If you are in a business meeting, Mobile ensures that
the data you view is up-to-date. Some examples of documents and
dashboards you can create with Mobile are:


•
A Visual Insight dashboard used to explore data in a strategic business
meeting. Dashboards allow users to change the graph used to display
data and create their own filters, thresholds, and metrics.
A dashboard-style document that displays data on a business’
bestselling products and stores. Users can view inventory on
bestselling products as well as data on other products that are similar.
The information in the document is updated weekly.
Instantly write information to your database. Transaction Services allow
you to create forms that automatically send information to your database.
Some examples of how you can use Transaction Services are:

A Corporate Request Center (CRC) app with selectors that allow users
to approve or deny time off, expenses, and purchase order requests.
The approvals and denials are automatically written to the database
after processing.
2 Common business scenarios for MicroStrategy Mobile
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide

•
1
A customer satisfaction survey document that asks customers to rate
your business on a scale and leave comments. You can ask customers
to fill out the survey after a transaction.
Distribute mobile apps within your organization, or in the Apple App
Store or Google Play. Mobile apps can support any recurring business
needs you have. Some examples of apps you can create are:


•
Using MicroStrategy Mobile
An app for your CFO with a high-level overview of your company’s
performance that refreshes with up-to-date information biweekly.
An app that displays product, sales, and inventory information for
your business and maps all items to store locations. Users can drill
down into graphs and widgets for deeper analysis and also scan
product barcodes to view item information. The data in the app is
automatically refreshed on a weekly schedule.
Link together multiple mobile devices with MicroStrategy Mobile
installed on them to create a Command Center. You can use any of the
linked devices to control the data that displays on all other linked devices.
Changes made on one device, such as filtering or drilling, update the
display of the other linked devices. For steps, see the MicroStrategy
Developer Library.

If you have Apple TV, you can display the output of each device on an
HDTV.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Common business scenarios for MicroStrategy Mobile
3
1
Using MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Overview: Creating documents for mobile
Dashboard-style documents form the basis of the apps and dashboards you
can create with MicroStrategy Mobile.
The following workflow describes the process of creating a document for
viewing on a mobile device. It assumes that you are familiar with designing
MicroStrategy reports and documents and have the necessary privileges to
do so.
For information on designing MicroStrategy reports, see the Basic Reporting
Guide. For information on designing dashboard-style documents, see the
Report Services Document Creation Guide.
users want to be able to create their own filters, thresholds, or
 Ifchange
the graph style used to display data, consider creating a
dashboard instead of a document. For steps to create a dashboard, see
the MicroStrategy Web Help.
To view sample RS documents created for each mobile device, in the
MicroStrategy Tutorial project, navigate to the Shared Reports folder. Click
MicroStrategy Platform Capabilities, then click MicroStrategy Mobile.
Select the folder to open based on the device you are using. The folder
displays with a list of reports and documents designed for that device.
4 Overview: Creating documents for mobile
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Using MicroStrategy Mobile
1
To create a document for a mobile device
1 Based on how users will interact with the document, decide what objects
to add to the document.
•
If users want to be able to see different subsets of data depending on
the situation, consider using a prompt or including a table of
selectors. Examples of how prompts and selectors can be used are:


Viewing data on a specific product. Create a prompt that asks the
user to type or scan the product’s barcode. The data in the
document is filtered based on the product scanned.
Searching for hospitals within a certain distance from the user.
Create a prompt that asks for permission to obtain the user’s
location from their mobile device and a selector the user can use to
define the maximum distance of a hospital. The data in the
document is filtered to display only the hospitals that are within
the distance defined by the selector to the user.
For guidelines on creating prompts for mobile devices, see Allowing
users to filter data: prompts, page 63. For steps to create a selector,
see the Dashboards and Widgets Creation Guide.
•
If users want to be able to edit, add, or delete data from your database
with a mobile device, create documents that use Transaction Services.
You must have the Transaction Services product to use this feature.
For an introduction to Transaction Services, and instructions to create
Transaction Services reports, see the Advanced Reporting Guide. For
instructions to create Transaction Services-enabled documents, see
the Report Services Document Creation Guide.


© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
If you are designing for iPhones or iPads, consider using a
Transactions table to organize the Transactions data. For example,
you are creating a calendar of events and want users to be able to
add or edit events on the calendar. You can use a Transactions
table to easily create a form that asks the user for event details and
saves them to the database. For steps, see Organizing
transactions with tables on iOS devices, page 78.
If you want to create a survey, where users are presented with a set
of questions they answer by selecting options from a list or by
typing in their answers, consider using a Survey widget. For steps,
see Gathering data from users: Survey widget, page 140.
Overview: Creating documents for mobile
5
1
Using MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
•
To create a document that runs other applications on the mobile
device to perform a specific task, such as opening your mail app to
send an email, accesses specific features within MicroStrategy Mobile,
such as repeating a prompt on a document, or opens other documents
or reports, add a link. For more information on what you can do with
links and steps to create them, see Chapter 4, Linking to reports and
documents from a mobile document.
•
To include videos and images in a document, use the Video Player and
Image Viewer widgets. For steps, see Downloading and playing
videos: Video Player widget, page 152 and Displaying images:
Image Viewer widget, page 102.
2 Based on the information users want to access and how they want to use
that data, decide how you will display data in your document.
•
You can display important information in a docked header or footer.
Docked headers and footers are always visible at the top and bottom,
respectively, of the screen as the user scrolls up or down in the
document. For steps, see Allowing users easy access to document
content: docked headers and footers, page 53.
•
You can inform users of important information, such as new content
or updates, by displaying and update a badge displayed next to the
MicroStrategy Mobile application icon on a user’s iPhone or iPad. For
steps, see Notifying users: Displaying a badge next to the
MicroStrategy Mobile application icon, page 56.
•
You can create a simple graph to display your data. Many graph types
are available, such as overlapping bar graphs and pie graphs. For
steps, see the Document Creation Guide.
For interactive graphs, such as a data cloud, graph matrix, or map,
consider using a widget. For a description of each widget you can use
and steps to create them, see Adding widgets and visualizations to
documents for mobile devices, page 92.
3 Design your document based on how you want the user to interact with
your document and the mobile device they are using. For best results,
follow the guidelines listed in Best practices while planning reports and
documents, page 15.
For iPads and Android tablets, it is recommended that the document be
the same size as the screen of the device. If you cannot fit all the objects
you need in one document, consider splitting the document into multiple
documents and linking them together, or use one of the following
techniques:
6 Overview: Creating documents for mobile
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Using MicroStrategy Mobile
1
•
Group small sets of related data together into panel stacks. For
information on creating panel stacks for mobile devices, see Allowing
users to access information easily: mobile-friendly panel stacks,
page 37.
•
Place detailed data in an Information Window that displays when the
user taps on another object. For example, you are creating a document
with a scatter graph. You can create an Information Window that
displays when the user taps on a bubble in the scatter graph, with
detailed information on the bubble. For steps, see Providing
additional information to users: Information Windows, page 40.
4 Create the datasets that support your document. You can import data
from your database or use an already existing report or Intelligent Cube.
For steps, see the MicroStrategy Web Help.
5 Create the document based on your design. For best results, follow the
guidelines listed in Best practices while creating reports and documents,
page 18. For device-specific guidelines, see also Best practices while
creating reports and documents for the iPhone 5, page 20 or Best
practices while creating reports and documents for Blackberry, page 21.
6 If the document is going to be viewed on devices with different screen
sizes, format the document so it displays properly on all devices. For
steps, see Formatting documents for mobile devices, page 25.
7 Distribute the document. If the document is part of an app, deploy the
app within your organization or on the App Store. For steps, see
Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application,
page 222. Otherwise, place the document in the Shared Reports folder of
your MicroStrategy project. All users with permission to view the folder
are able to view the document from their mobile device.
8 If you have MicroStrategy Enterprise Manager, you can fine-tune the
design of your app based on user statistics. Enterprise Manager is a set of
pre-built documents that display data on how people are using your app,
such as what device they’re using, which documents they view the most,
and app performance. You can also create your own documents with the
statistics that Enterprise Manager collects. For a description of the
pre-built reports in Enterprise Manager and steps to install and
configure, see the MicroStrategy System Administration Guide.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Overview: Creating documents for mobile
7
1
Using MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Overview: Creating apps with MicroStrategy
Mobile
You can use MicroStrategy Mobile as a platform to create mobile business
intelligence (BI) apps for your organization. By linking dashboard-style
documents and Visual Insight dashboards together, you create the
experience of a mobile app. Using visualizations and widgets, users can
analyze data and make decisions based off that data as they receive it.
The app you create uses a dashboard-style document that serves as a home
screen and links to other documents of interest. The home screen displays
when users open your Mobile application instead of MicroStrategy’s default
interface. For example, the CFO Dashboard demo app has a home screen
that links to documents for financial performance, what-if analysis, and so
on, as shown in the image below:
To create a mobile app
1 Evaluate what your users need and the workflow that they require. It is
useful to know the following:
8 Overview: Creating apps with MicroStrategy Mobile
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Using MicroStrategy Mobile
•
Your users’ current problems, their goals, and their expectations
•
The mobile device(s) your users are using for the app.
1
2 Define the purpose of the app and the key issues the app solves. Based on
this, determine the data required for the app and whether your database
contains that data.
3 Create a diagram of the documents you are designing and how users will
navigate between them. Design the documents to accomplish your users’
tasks and the navigation system to support your users’ workflow. Best
practices while designing documents are described in Best practices
while planning reports and documents, page 15.
You can have users navigate your app with:
•
A menu bar with buttons that link to the main documents in your app.
The menu bar displays at the bottom of all documents that it is linked
to.
•
Swiping left or right to view each new screen. This is useful for apps
that have a linear workflow or for apps whose main purpose is to
showcase information. Do this by creating a panel stack that fills the
screen of the device and adding a docked panel selector to the stack.
Each panel in the stack is a separate screen.
•
A link embedded in a document. You can create links to documents
from a text field, image, button, or attribute element. Depending on
the device you are designing for, you can create links that filter the
data of the document they link to based on the object the user selects.
4 Create the documents that make up your app and link them together
based on your diagram.
To create the feel of a standalone app, designate one of the documents
you create as the home screen for your app, which you configure to
display when the application opens. Consider adding a button to your
home screen with a link to MicroStrategy’s device-specific help, which
provides instructions for your users on how to interact with widgets and
reports, and so on. To create a link to the help, see Using links to access
features within the MicroStrategy Mobile application, page 178.
For high-level steps to create a document, see Overview: Creating
documents for mobile, page 4.
5 If you are creating a custom home screen for your app, create a mobile
configuration that configures users' devices to load your custom home
screen when the application loads. For steps to create a mobile
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Overview: Creating apps with MicroStrategy Mobile
9
1
Using MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
configuration, including steps to define a custom home screen, see
Chapter 5, Administering MicroStrategy Mobile.
6 By default, users log in to your mobile app using their MicroStrategy user
name and password. You can customize the way users log in to your app,
by requiring a custom token when they log in or allowing them to use
their Facebook credentials to log in. You can also have users log in
separately for each project they want to access, or re-direct users to a
different page when they cannot log in. For detailed information on how
you can customize the way users log in to Mobile, see the MicroStrategy
Developer Library.
7 Distribute your app to a preliminary set of users to gather feedback on
whether your app addresses your users' needs. You can also test how
easily users navigate and use your app. Redesign components of your app
as necessary based on user feedback.
8 Distribute the app to users within your organization, on Google Play, or
on the Apple App Store. For steps to deploy and configure your app for all
mobile devices, see Chapter 5, Administering MicroStrategy Mobile.
You can create customized versions of the MicroStrategy applications
that use your organization's branding. For the requirements and steps to
build customized applications, refer to the MicroStrategy Developer
Zone (MSDZ), at the following URL: https://
resource.microstrategy.com/MSDZ/
access the MSDZ, you must create an account in the
 ToMicroStrategy
Knowledge base, at the following URL: https://
resource.microstrategy.com.
9 Update and maintain the app as necessary. Most apps require periodic
refreshing so the data they contain is relevant and up-to-date. To
automatically refresh the data, you can create subscriptions for users to
send them updated data on a schedule.
If your users are using iPhone or iPad devices, you can use the Newsstand
feature to schedule deliveries to users' devices at off-peak hours, even if
the MicroStrategy Mobile application is not currently running. For steps,
see Managing Mobile report subscriptions, page 286.
10 Overview: Creating apps with MicroStrategy Mobile
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
1
Using MicroStrategy Mobile
Viewing demo apps and dashboards: Restoring
default settings
On the iPhone or iPad, you can restore your custom Mobile app to
MicroStrategy’s default project settings at any time to view the latest demo
apps that MicroStrategy provides and see examples of the latest features.
Steps to restore MicroStrategy’s default app settings are provided below.
To restore your Mobile app to MicroStrategy’s default app settings
1 From the iPhone or iPad’s home screen, tap Settings.
2 From the list of apps on the left, tap one of the following:
•
If you want to reset your Mobile app, tap MicroStrategy.
•
If you want to reset your Good Dynamics app, tap MicroStrategyGD.
3 Tap Reset Application.
You can return to your custom Mobile app by re-installing it, either by
downloading it from your company’s internal website or clicking a
configuration URL in an email from your administrator.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Viewing demo apps and dashboards: Restoring default settings
11
1
Using MicroStrategy Mobile
12 Viewing demo apps and dashboards: Restoring default settings
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
2
2.
DESIGNING REPORTS AND
DOCUMENTS FOR MOBILE
DEVICES
Introduction
This chapter contains steps to design reports and dashboard-style
documents in MicroStrategy Web, for display and use on mobile devices such
as iPhones, iPads, BlackBerry devices, and Android-based phones and
tablets. These can be standalone documents or documents that are part of a
mobile app. This chapter also contains best practices for designing reports
and documents that perform well and are easy to use. The following topics
are covered:
•
Best practices for designing reports and documents for mobile devices,
page 14. Designing a MicroStrategy report or dashboard-style document
that is viewed on iOS, Android, and BlackBerry devices requires the use
of device-specific document features. This section discusses best practices
for using these features.
•
Creating documents for mobile devices, page 22. This section describes
the ways in which you can design dashboard-style documents for iOSand Android-based devices, and to use features specifically designed for
these devices.
•
Allowing users to filter data: prompts, page 63. A prompt is a question
that the system presents to a user when a report is executed. The user’s
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
13
2
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
answer determines the data that is returned by the report. Specific
prompts can be added to a report for use on a mobile device that has the
MicroStrategy Mobile application.
•
Allowing users to filter data using filter panels, page 78. You can create
a panel of selectors in a dashboard-style document that acts as a filter
panel, where users decide what data in the document is displayed by
making selections in the panel.
•
Organizing transactions with tables on iOS devices, page 78. A user can
interact with data and send those interactions back to the data source.
For example, a user can add a new customer contact name and details
while on-site with the customer, and send the new data back to be
recorded in the data source immediately. Transactions allow users to
make decisions and write back to the data source. If you have multiple
input object controls on a document displayed on an iOS device, you can
create a transaction table to group and organize the controls.
Prerequisites
•
This chapter assumes that you know the nature and structure of your
company’s data, which users will analyze in business intelligence reports
and documents.
•
This chapter assumes that you are familiar with designing MicroStrategy
reports and documents and have the necessary privileges to do so.
For information on designing MicroStrategy reports, see the Basic
Reporting Guide. For information on designing dashboard-style
documents, see the Report Services Document Creation Guide.
Best practices for designing reports and
documents for mobile devices
Designing a report or dashboard-style document that is viewed on iOS,
Android, and BlackBerry devices requires the use of device-specific
document features. This section discusses best practices for using these
features.
14 Best practices for designing reports and documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
2
Best practices for enhancing performance on a mobile device
•
Keep the report or document as focused as possible, by providing only the
objects necessary for an effective analysis.
•
In reports for BlackBerry devices, limit the total number of attributes and
metrics displayed on the report’s rows and columns to six. This allows
users to view as much data as possible at one time.
•
Consider using Intelligent Cubes to provide historical or trend data in
your documents. For background information on Intelligent Cubes, and
instructions to create reports based on Intelligent Cubes, see the OLAP
Services Guide.
•
To let users display subsets of data, group data in a document using
features such as page-by. Accessing a cached report or document that has
multiple pages is faster than re-prompting the report or document, which
resubmits the job to the Intelligence Server.
•
Report size guidelines for BlackBerry reports and documents


The report or document must be 125,000 bytes (125KB) or smaller to
be downloaded to a BlackBerry device. If your report or document is
larger, redesign it using MicroStrategy Developer or Web.
A report or document on a BlackBerry may typically compressed to
about 1/5 to 1/2 of the size of the same report or document in
MicroStrategy Developer or MicroStrategy Web, depending on the
size and complexity of the report or document. Some smaller reports
and documents may be compressed to about 1/10 of the size of the
same report or document in Web or Developer.
Best practices while planning reports and documents
•
Sketch the documents you will use in your app and outline how users will
navigate between them. If you are creating an app for both tablets and
mobile phones, you may want to create multiple diagrams for your app,
one for each screen size. Diagramming the documents and links that need
to be created allows you to identify:


If you are creating an app that uses an existing dashboard-style
document, whether the content in that document needs to be
reorganized to suit a smaller screen.
If you are creating an app with documents that contain a large amount
of data, consider splitting each document into multiple, smaller
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Best practices for designing reports and documents for mobile devices
15
2
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
documents to reduce loading time. You can then use links to allow
users to switch between the documents.






•
The navigation tools you must include. For example, you can include a
tab bar on the bottom of every document that links users to other
documents or you can allow users to navigate through documents by
swiping right or left. For descriptions of the navigation tools you can
use, see Chapter 4, Using links in documents.
If users must tap on or swipe across an object, the size of those
objects. In general, objects that users are meant to tap on should be at
least 30 pixels wide and 30 pixels tall. For best results, make the
objects larger, around 45 pixels wide and 45 pixels tall.
If you are creating an app or a document that links to other
documents, the order in which these documents must be built. Links
must be created after the document they target has already been
created. For instructions on creating links in mobile documents, see
Chapter 4, Using links in documents.
Where duplicate functionality exists. If two documents display
different data with the same formatting, you may be able to create one
document, duplicate it, and change the datasets to save development
time.
The datasets that are needed. One dataset can frequently supply data
to multiple documents, which can speed up development and reduce
cache sizes on the Intelligence Server.
Any user interactivity you may want to include, such as widgets for
data visualization or changing the appearance of the app when the
mobile device is oriented in landscape mode instead of portrait.
Consider the mobile device you are designing for:



Create your documents using fonts that are available on the device.
Ensure that the document displays correctly on the mobile device by
defining the display properties, available in the Properties dialog box.
These properties include optimizing the layout for display on a device,
and whether or not the page-by bar and re-prompt icon are displayed.
For descriptions of these properties, see Creating documents for
mobile devices, page 22.
Consider the size of the device’s screen when building your reports.
Although users can scroll through data, reports with fewer metrics
improve performance and are usually easier to read. In addition, take
advantage of the larger screen size available on tablet devices.
16 Best practices for designing reports and documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide


Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
2
Design documents for tablets such that users can view all the data in a
single screen without panning. If more data must be displayed than
will fit on one screen, consider using panel stacks to arrange the data
such that the user can navigate by swiping or using selectors.
To take advantage of the high-resolution screens on newer iOS
devices, consider using large images in your documents.
are for both older devices and newer devices,
 Ifaddthethedocuments
suffix @2x to the image’s file name. This ensures that
the image is appropriately resized for the older device. For
example, http:[email protected] For
devices with very high-resolution screens, such as the iPhone 6
Plus, use the suffix @3x.


In documents for tablets, use Information Windows to show users
additional information about an attribute element they select. For
information on creating Information Windows, see Providing
additional information to users: Information Windows, page 40.
In documents for tablets, use the Interactive Grid widget adjacent to a
panel stack, and use the Interactive Grid as a selector that targets the
panel stack. This allows users to view additional information without
linking to a new document.
•
In general, use at least 13-point size font. Font sizes that are greater than
or equal to 13-point font are easier for readers to view.
•
Images are easier to manage if they are hosted on a web server, and
referenced using HTTP or HTTPS URLs. That way, if you need to migrate
images across environments, you do not need to change the URLs for the
images.
An example of an HTTP URL to an image is http://example.com/
folder/image.png.
•
If the data in your document is frequently updated, you can have the
document periodically refresh itself as it is being displayed on a mobile
device. For steps, see Enabling automatic refresh for documents,
page 35.
•
In a Transaction Services document, you can submit a unique ID for a
specific mobile device, using the Mobile ID prompt. This allows you to
keep track of which mobile devices are creating which records. You can
filter the transaction date by Mobile ID.
The Mobile ID prompt is a system prompt, which is a special type of
prompt that does not require an answer from the user. Instead, it is
answered automatically by Intelligence Server. System prompts are
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Best practices for designing reports and documents for mobile devices
17
2
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
located in the Public Objects/Prompts/System Prompts folder in
Developer. For background information on system prompts in general,
see the System Administration Guide.
•
Use the docked panel selector to display visualizations grouped on panel
stacks. For information on creating docked panel selectors, see Allowing
users to easily switch between panels: docked panel selectors, page 38.
•
For reports with data grouped by an attribute in the page-by pane, you
can choose to display the report on an iPad as a book with a separate page
for each attribute element. This option, called Enable book-style page-by
navigation, is selected by default. For steps to group data in a report, see
the Basic Reporting Guide.
Best practices while creating reports and documents
•
Consider using one of MicroStrategy’s pre-designed templates when
creating documents for a mobile device. The pre-designed templates take
into account the size of the device’s screen. For a list of pre-designed
templates, see Creating documents for mobile devices using a template,
page 23.
•
Enable drilling to give users the ability to view information at different
levels within a single report. Drilling allows users to get more information
from one report without having to browse to, and run, other reports.
•
When designing graph reports to be used on a mobile device, consider the
following:

To display tooltips on mobile devices, enable tooltips for the graph
series while creating the graph. For steps, see the Basic Reporting
Guide.

To maximize the graph size, move the legend below the graph.

The following graph types are supported on Android devices:
– Bubble
– Funnel
– Gauges
– Horizontal Area
– Horizontal Bar
– Horizontal Line
18 Best practices for designing reports and documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
2
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
– Pareto
– Pie
– Scatter
– Vertical Area
– Vertical Bar
– Vertical Line

If you must display more information than can fit on one screen, use
page-bys to break the graph in logical places across multiple screens.
•
When designing grid reports, add padding around the cells to make the
data more legible on mobile devices.
•
Because Android devices come in varying screen sizes, a document
designed for iOS may appear different when viewed on an Android
device. To adapt a document’s display to an Android device, while leaving
the display on an iOS device unaffected, use the following properties to
modify the document:



Use the Fit Page or Fit Width options to ensure that the document fits
to the size of the screen. Before selecting one of these Zoom options on
the Home toolbar, optimize the layout for micro applications. For
steps, see Formatting document tabs: layouts, page 30.
By default, when the document is displayed on an Android device, any
area not used to display the document is rendered in the same color as
the background color defined for the document. You can use the
Document Fill Color or Layout Watermark to provide a background
for any part of the screen that is not used by the rest of the document.
Manually size the column widths of any grids on a document, rather
than using the automatic resizing options.
•
Consider using Mobile Views to support different screen sizes, and
different orientations of the device. For instructions on using Mobile
Views, see Formatting documents for various screen sizes and different
orientations: Mobile Views, page 25.
•
Consider creating documents that include widgets, rather than
converting reports to widgets. Certain features, such as Information
Windows and network lines for the Map widget, can only be used in
documents.
For steps to create widgets in documents, see Chapter 3, Displaying data
as interactive visualizations: Widgets.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Best practices for designing reports and documents for mobile devices
19
2
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
•
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
If you are creating an Interactive Grid widget, it is recommended that you
assign an action to only one attribute form in the widget. For example, if
you want one attribute to act as a selector, ensure that drilling is disabled
for the Grid/Graph, and that attributes on the Grid/Graph do not link to
other reports or documents.
For steps to create an Interactive Grid widget, see Displaying data in
rows and columns: Interactive Grid widget, page 105.
•
Consider using links to add interactivity to your document. For example,
you can create links that allow users to send an email, make a phone call,
or execute related reports and documents. For information and the steps
to create links, see Opening a device’s installed applications from
documents, page 158 and Linking to reports and documents from a
mobile document, page 163.
•
If you have prompts in a linked-to report, make sure that there are default
answers saved for the prompts.
Best practices while creating reports and documents for the
iPhone 5
The iPhone 5 has a different aspect ratio than the iPhone 4. To ensure that
your reports and documents display correctly on an iPhone 5, follow the best
practices below:
•
By default, reports and documents displayed on the iPhone 5 are
displayed with black bars on the edges to fill the screen. If you design
your reports and documents to fill the iPhone 5 screen, you can create an
iPhone configuration that enables the iPhone 5 to display them on the
entire screen. For steps, see Configuring MicroStrategy Mobile for
iPhone or iPad, page 226.
•
You can use Mobile Views to support documents that need to be
displayed on both the iPhone 4 and the iPhone 5. You can size each layout
according to the phone’s screen size. This is the recommended approach
if you are designing for both the iPhone 4 and iPhone 5. For instructions
on using Mobile Views, see Formatting documents for various screen
sizes and different orientations: Mobile Views, page 25.
•
You can dock objects at the top or bottom of the screen as an alternative
to Mobile Views. If you design the content that displays in the middle of
the screen to fit the iPhone 5, that content will scroll when viewed on an
iPhone 4. If you design the content that displays in the middle of the
screen to fit the iPhone 4, empty space will be displayed when viewed on
20 Best practices for designing reports and documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
2
an iPhone 5. This allows you to use a single view for both devices.
However, using multiple views is recommended, so that the users do not
experience additional scrolling or empty space.
To dock an object at the top of the screen, insert the object in the page
header section of the document. In the Properties and Formatting dialog
box for the section, select the Dock to top of screen (Mobile only) check
box. When the document is displayed on a mobile device, the docked page
header is always displayed at the top of the screen, remaining in place as
the user scrolls up or down in the document.
Similarly, to dock an object at the bottom of the screen, insert the object
in the page footer section. In the Properties and Formatting dialog box for
the section, select the Dock to bottom of screen (Mobile only) check
box.
Best practices while creating reports and documents for
Blackberry
•
If you want to place attributes on the columns of a grid report, you must
design the report in original layout data view, which disables certain
MicroStrategy Mobile features. Otherwise, any attributes on the columns
are automatically moved to the rows in MicroStrategy Mobile. For details
about the different data views, see Selecting a data view for reports and
documents on BlackBerry devices, page 61.
•
If you want to place metrics on the rows of a grid report, you must design
the report in original layout data view, which disables certain
MicroStrategy Mobile features. Otherwise, any metrics on the rows are
automatically moved to the columns in MicroStrategy Mobile. For details
about the different data views, see Selecting a data view for reports and
documents on BlackBerry devices, page 61.
•
Any report designed in tabular interactive data view with objects in its
page-by field will display the currently selected page-by data in
MicroStrategy Mobile, by default. The page-by field can be changed in
MicroStrategy Mobile. For more information about the different data
views, see Selecting a data view for reports and documents on
BlackBerry devices, page 61.
•
If the report is designed in original layout data view, changing objects in
the page-by field is disabled. For more information about the different
data views, see Selecting a data view for reports and documents on
BlackBerry devices, page 61.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Best practices for designing reports and documents for mobile devices
21
2
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
•
Note that font types and sizes, and the alignment of text, are not applied
to reports on BlackBerry devices. The default BlackBerry fonts are used,
and users can adjust the font size in the MicroStrategy Mobile
application. However, font colors and styles that you define, such as bold
or italic, are displayed.
•
If you are defining thresholds on the report or document, use thresholds
formatted as quick symbols, colors, or text replacements. Thresholds
involving the size and alignment of text are not supported.
•
Consider the following when adding Grid/Graphs to a BlackBerry
document:


Each Grid/Graph in a document is displayed as a separate tab when
the document is displayed on the BlackBerry device.
The names of the tabs above a document are determined by the names
of the Grid/Graphs in the document. You can specify the name of a
Grid/Graph in the Title field in the Properties dialog box in
MicroStrategy Developer or MicroStrategy Web. If you do not specify
a title, the generic name of the Grid/Graph is displayed.
•
Note that selectors, panel stacks, widgets, lines, rectangles, and text fields
are not displayed on BlackBerry devices.
•
To include graphs in documents for BlackBerry devices, you must design
the document in original layout data view. Original layout data view
disables some Mobile features. For details about the different data views,
see Selecting a data view for reports and documents on BlackBerry
devices, page 61.
•
When designing a graph report, enable Automatic graph layout. This
ensures that the objects on the graph are not repositioned when viewed
on a BlackBerry device. For the steps to do this, see the Graphing chapter
of the Advanced Reporting Guide.
Creating documents for mobile devices
This section describes the ways in which you can design dashboard-style
documents for iOS- and Android-based devices, and to use features
specifically designed for some devices.
If you are creating an app, you can use dashboard-style documents as the
pages and panels of your app and create links on buttons and tab bars in your
22 Creating documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
2
documents to allow users to navigate to other pages or panels in the app. For
steps, see Chapter 4, Using links in documents.
This section assumes that you have created a document with the datasets
that you want to analyze. For steps to create a document, refer to the Report
Services Document Creation Guide.
Creating documents for mobile devices using a template
A document template allows you to start with a predefined structure when
you create a new document. You can use several predesigned templates for
your mobile documents to help you create documents that are correctly sized
for the device’s screen, as described below.
The following templates are optimized for display on iPhone and Android
smartphones:
•
iPhone Portrait: This template is designed to be viewed on an iPhone or
Android smartphone held in a vertical position. Only the Detail Header
section of the document is displayed.


Width: 6.6 inches
Height: 9.6 inches, which includes room for the smartphone’s status
bar

Supported orientation: Portrait only

Graph tooltips displayed: Yes
•
iPhone Portrait Micro-Application: This template is the same as the
iPhone Portrait template, except that the Optimize layout for micro
application option is selected, preventing users from performing actions
such as zooming in or out of the document. This allows you to better
control the user’s experience and interaction with the document.
•
iPhone Landscape: This template is designed to be viewed on an iPhone
or Android smartphone held in a horizontal position. Only the Detail
Header section of the document is displayed.

Width: 10 inches. The smartphone’s status bar is not displayed in
landscape view.

Height: 6.6 inches

Supported orientation: Landscape only
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Creating documents for mobile devices
23
2
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices

Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Graph tooltips displayed: Yes
•
iPhone Landscape Micro-Application: This template is the same as the
iPhone Landscape template, except that the Optimize layout for micro
application option is selected, preventing users from performing actions
such as zooming in or out of the document. This allows you to better
control the user’s experience and interaction with the document.
•
iPhone Map Information Window: You can define an Information
Window for a Map widget to be displayed on an iPhone or Android
smartphone, to display additional information when a user taps a map
marker in the widget. Use this template to create a document layout for
use as an Information Window. For detailed steps, see Using a layout as
an Information Window in a Map widget, page 118.

Width: 3 inches

Height: 2 inches
The following templates are optimized for display on iPad and Android
tablets:
•
•
iPad Portrait: This template is designed to be viewed on an iPad or
Android tablet held in a vertical position. Only one section of the
document is displayed.

Width: 8 inches

Height: 10 inches, which includes room for the tablet’s status bar

Supported orientation: Portrait only
iPad Landscape: This template is designed to be viewed on an iPad or
Android tablet held in a horizontal position. Only one section of the
document is displayed.

Width: 10.67 inches

Height: 7.33 inches

Supported orientation: Landscape only
For documents displayed on an iOS device, you can create a navigation
document, which contains only a tab bar. A tab bar displays a series of
buttons, which users can tap to navigate through the documents in your app.
Use the following templates to create a navigation document. For steps and
examples, see Linking from documents with buttons and tab bars,
page 180.
24 Creating documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
2
•
Navigation for iPad: This template is designed to create a navigation
document for iPads.
•
Navigation for iPhone: This template is designed to create a navigation
document for iPhones.
Formatting documents for mobile devices
You can ensure that the document displays correctly on mobile devices by
defining the display properties, such as whether the document layout is
optimized for mobile phones, and whether the page-by bar and re-prompt
icon are displayed.
You can format the display properties at the following levels:
•
For each Mobile View. You can create Mobile Views to define how your
document appears on different devices, and for different orientations of
the device. For example, you can size a graph so that it takes up less
vertical space when displayed in landscape orientation on a device. For
instructions to define Mobile Views, see Formatting documents for
various screen sizes and different orientations: Mobile Views, page 25.
•
In multi-layout documents, for each document layout. For descriptions of
the layout display properties, see Formatting document tabs: layouts,
page 30 and Disabling swiping between layouts in iOS documents,
page 33.
You must use MicroStrategy Web to define these properties. For
instructions, see the steps below.
Formatting documents for various screen sizes and different
orientations: Mobile Views
You can specify how to display documents on iPhone, iPad, and Android
devices by using Mobile Views. Mobile Views allow you to quickly and easily
determine how the elements of a document are displayed in the following
scenarios:
•
When users rotate their devices. For example, you can resize a graph to
take advantage of the extra horizontal space when the device is held in
landscape orientation, or rearrange the controls on the document to
accommodate the extra vertical space when the mobile device is held in
portrait orientation.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Creating documents for mobile devices
25
2
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
•
When users access the same document from different devices, which may
have different screen sizes. For example, you can size text to take up less
room on a mobile phone in one Mobile View, or enlarge an image to fit a
tablet in another Mobile View. The document is automatically displayed
using the Mobile View that most closely matches the height and width
(resolution) of the device’s screen.
•
When users access the same document on an iPhone 4 and an iPhone 5,
which have different screen sizes. You can create a view for each device,
with the corresponding layout height. The objects on each layout can have
different sizes and positions.
When you use a Mobile View, controls in the document keep the same basic
settings when displayed in different Mobile Views. For example, a selector
containing a list of regions targets a graph displaying revenue data. If the
user selects the Southeast region from the selector, revenue information for
Southeast is displayed in the graph. When the user rotates the mobile device
and the document is displayed using a different Mobile View, Southeast
remains selected and the data displayed in the graph is unchanged.
Parameters you can change in Mobile Views
Once you have added a Mobile View to a document, you can do the following:
•
Display a preview of the Mobile View in Design Mode or Editable Mode in
Web.
•
Edit controls in the Mobile View. You can edit the following options for a
control independently in each Mobile View:
any option that is not included in the list below also edits
 Editing
this property for all other Mobile Views in the document. For
example, if you change the background color of a document
section to green in one Mobile View, the section is displayed as
green in all other Mobile Views.

The position of the control in the document

The height and width of the control


The height of the control's title bar (for Grid/Graphs, panel stacks,
and selectors)
Whether the control is hidden. You can determine whether a control
will be visible when the Mobile View is displayed on a mobile device.
All controls in the document must be included in each Mobile View
you define. However, you can hide a control in an individual Mobile
26 Creating documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
2
View to prevent it from being displayed when the document is viewed
on a mobile device. For steps to determine whether a control is visible,
see the Report Services Document Creation Guide.
For example, you want to create two Mobile Views, but only want to
display a specific grid in the Mobile View for a single mobile device.
You must hide the grid in the Mobile View in which you do not want
the grid to be displayed.

•
Whether the height and width of the control are automatically
determined or are fixed at a specific size

The height of a document section

Whether a document section can grow or shrink to fit its contents

Whether to hide a document section if it has no content
Show or hide all controls in the document in Design Mode, regardless of
whether they are shown when the document is displayed on a mobile
device.
By default, the mobile device tries to display a document using the Mobile
View that matches the exact height and width of the device’s screen. If there
is more than one Mobile View with the same height and width as the mobile
device’s screen, the first of these Mobile Views, as listed in the Manage Views
Editor, is used. Otherwise, the mobile device displays the Mobile View whose
width most closely matches the width of the mobile device’s screen.
Using Mobile Views with multi-layout documents
Documents can contain multiple layouts. Once you create a Mobile View, it is
automatically available to every layout in the document.
For example, a multi-layout document contains three layouts. If you create a
Mobile View to determine how the document is shown on an iPhone, you
must edit the controls in each layout to define how the layouts will be
displayed. You can use the Orientation option for Mobile Views in
conjunction with the Supported Orientation option for document layouts to
determine how a mobile device chooses the best Mobile View to use to
display a document layout, as follows:
•
If the Supported Orientation of the document layout is set to Both
Portrait and Landscape, the document layout is displayed using the
Mobile View that most closely matches the height and width of the mobile
device, as well as the orientation in which the mobile device is held.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Creating documents for mobile devices
27
2
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
For example, if the mobile device is held vertically, the mobile device
attempts to display the document layout using the Mobile View that has
Orientation set to Portrait or Portrait and Landscape, and most closely
matches the height and width of the device. If only Mobile Views
designed to be displayed in landscape orientation have been defined for
the layout, the mobile device chooses the best Mobile View from among
those defined and rotates the Mobile View to be displayed vertically, to
match the orientation of the mobile device.
•
If the Supported Orientation of the document layout is set to either
Portrait Only or Landscape Only, the document layout is displayed using
the Mobile View that most closely matches the height and width of the
mobile device, as well as the Supported Orientation of the layout.
For example, if the Supported Orientation is Portrait Only, the mobile
device attempts to display the document layout using the Mobile View
that has Orientation set to Portrait or Portrait and Landscape, and most
closely matches the height and width of the mobile device. If only Mobile
Views designed to be displayed in landscape orientation have been
defined for the layout, the mobile device chooses the best Mobile View
from among those defined and displays the Mobile View vertically, to
match the Supported Orientation of the document layout. The Mobile
View is locked to the same orientation as the Supported Orientation
option, meaning that if the Supported Orientation is set to Portrait Only
and a Mobile View is displayed vertically on the mobile device, the
orientation of the layout as displayed on the mobile device remains the
same and does not rotate regardless of whether the user rotates the
mobile device.
a document is viewed on the iPhone, the Supported
 When
Orientation option determines which layout is displayed on the
mobile device. The mobile device then determines the best Mobile
View to use to display the layout. For more information on the
Supported Orientation setting, see the MicroStrategy Web Help.
To define a Mobile View in a document
1 In MicroStrategy Web, open the document in Design Mode or Editable
Mode.
2 From the Tools menu, select Manage Views. The Manage Views Editor
opens.
default Mobile View is automatically displayed in the list of
 AMobile
Views, and cannot be deleted.
28 Creating documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
2
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
3 Click the Duplicate icon next to an existing Mobile View. A new Mobile
View is automatically created.
4 In the Name field, type a name for the new Mobile View.
5 Under the Resolution column, specify the height and width of the mobile
device screen on which to display the Mobile View, as follows:
a In the first field, type the width, in pixels, of the device screen.
b In the second field, type the height, in pixels, of the device screen.
6 You can specify whether the Mobile View is designed to be displayed on a
mobile device when the device is held vertically or horizontally. From the
Orientation drop-down list, select one of the following:
•
To display the Mobile View when the device is held vertically, select
Portrait Only.
•
To display the Mobile View when the device is held horizontally, select
Landscape Only.
•
To display the Mobile View when the device is held vertically or
horizontally, select Portrait and Landscape.
7 Repeat the appropriate steps above to define each Mobile View.
8 You can determine which Mobile View to display in Design Mode when
the document layout is displayed in Web. Under the Current column,
select the Mobile View to display.
9 To delete an existing Mobile View, click the Delete icon next to the
Mobile View to delete.
10 You can choose to show all controls in Design Mode in Web, regardless of
whether or not they are marked as hidden. For example, you design a
Mobile View to be displayed on the iPhone. The Mobile View contains
several controls that will be displayed on the iPhone, as well as a grid that
is marked as hidden and will not be displayed. You can choose to display
all the controls in Design Mode, including the grid. Do one of the
following:
•
To display all controls in the layout in Design Mode, regardless of
whether or not they are hidden, select the Show hidden objects in
Design Mode check box.
•
To display only the controls that are specified as not hidden, clear the
Show hidden objects in Design Mode check box.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Creating documents for mobile devices
29
2
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
11 Click OK to save your changes.
12 Add controls to the document, such as text fields, images, graphs, and so
on. For steps to add controls to a document, see the Report Services
Document Creation Guide. When you add a new control to the document,
a message is displayed asking if you would like to make the control visible
in all Mobile Views. Do one of the following:
•
To make the control visible in all views, select Yes.
•
To make the control visible in only the current Mobile View, select No.
•
To remove a control from a Mobile View, select the control, and press
Delete. A message is displayed asking you if you want to delete the
control from the document. To hide the control from the current
Mobile View, while keeping it visible in all other Mobile Views, select
No.
To determine which Mobile View to display in Web
13 From the Tools menu, select Manage Views. The Manage Views editor
opens.
14 Under the Current column, select the Mobile View you want to display.
15 Click OK to save your changes.
To delete a Mobile View from a document
16 From the Tools menu, select Manage Views. The Manage Views editor
opens.
17 Click the Delete icon next to the Mobile View you want to delete.
18 Click OK to save your changes.
Formatting document tabs: layouts
Each layout in a document can be defined to display on an iPhone, iPad, or
Android device independently of other layouts within the same document.
Steps are provided below to format a document layout for mobile devices.
For an introduction to multi-layout documents, see the Report Services
Document Creation Guide.
30 Creating documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
2
To define how tabs in a document display on mobile devices
1 In MicroStrategy Web, open the document in Design Mode.
2 From the Tools menu, select Layout. The Properties dialog box opens.
3 From the left, under Layout Properties, click Mobile. You can define the
following display options:
•
From the Supported Orientations drop-down list, select which
orientations you want the layout to support:

Portrait Only (height is greater than width)

Landscape Only (width is greater than height)

Portrait and Landscape
4 You can also define the following display options for documents:
•
To allow users to filter the display of the document by tapping a
page-by element from the page-by bar, select the Display page-by
interface check box.
•
To allow users to change their prompt answers, select the Display
filter interface check box. The Filter button displays on the layout.
•
To use a layout as an Information Window in a Map widget, select the
Use as Information Window for the Map widget check box.
An Information Window is a small pop-up window that provides
additional details about a location. It is displayed when a user selects a
map marker in a Map widget. For more information, see Using a
layout as an Information Window in a Map widget, page 118.
the document is to be displayed on multiple devices, it is
 Ifrecommended
that you use a panel stack as the Information
Window. For information, see Providing additional
information to users: Information Windows, page 40.
•
To prevent Android users from performing actions such as scrolling in
the document, choose Optimize layout for micro application.
Optimizing the layout for a micro-application prevents allows you to
better control the user’s experience and interaction with the
document.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Creating documents for mobile devices
31
2
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Selecting this option allows you to size the layout for Android devices
to fit the page or the width of the device's screen. When a user views
the document on an Android device, a fit-to-page layout is zoomed
and displayed within the screen, so that he does not need to scroll
vertically or horizontally to view any data. A fit-to-width layout is
zoomed to the width of the screen, so that a user does not need to
scroll horizontally to view any data. To do this, complete the following
steps:
a Select Optimize layout for micro application.
b Click Apply.
c
On the Home toolbar, select either Fit Page or Fit Width from the
Zoom drop-down list.
5 You can choose to always open a document in full screen mode. From the
left, under Document Properties, click Document, and select the Always
open this document in full screen mode check box.
displayed on an iPhone in landscape orientation are
 Documents
automatically displayed in full screen mode.
When documents are displayed in full screen mode, the navigation bars
and action menu are hidden. You can control whether users can access
the hidden navigation bars and action menu.
•
To display the navigation bars and action menu when users tap on the
full screen button at the top of the app, select the Allow users to
access navigation bars and action menu check box (default).
•
To prevent users from accessing the navigation bars and access menu,
clear the Allow users to access navigation bars and action menu
check box.


On the iPad, users are also unable to access the layout bar, which
displays the different tabs in the document.
On the iPhone in landscape orientation, users are unable to access
the layout bar, which displays the different tabs in the document,
and the page-by bar. In Portrait orientation, users can access both.
Consider doing this when you want to control how users exit and
interact with the document, such as when the document is part of a
custom mobile app with its own navigation system.
To allow users to perform actions that would normally be done in the
action menu, you can create a link in the document that performs the
same action. For example, to allow users to exit the document, you
32 Creating documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
2
can create a link in the document that opens another document or
sends them to a different screen in the app, such as the Home page.
For steps, see Using links to access features within the MicroStrategy
Mobile application, page 178.
6 Click OK. The Properties dialog box closes.
Disabling swiping between layouts in iOS documents
By default, users can navigate between layouts in a document by swiping to
the left or right. On an iPad or iPhone, you can disable this default so that
users must use the layout bar to navigate between layouts.
To disable swiping between layouts in documents on iOS devices
1 In MicroStrategy Web, open the document in Design Mode.
2 From the Tools menu, select Document Properties. The Properties
dialog box opens.
3 From the left, under the Document Properties section, click Mobile.
4 Do one of the following:
•
To allow users to swipe between pages or select an option in the layout
bar to display a report or document, select the Enable swiping to
switch layout check box (default).
•
To disable swiping between layouts and have users switch layout by
tapping the layout’s name in the layout bar, clear the Enable swiping
to switch layout check box.
5 To enable graph tooltips on the device, select the Enable graph tooltips
check box.
6 Click Apply. The Properties dialog box closes.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Creating documents for mobile devices
33
2
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Displaying documents on iOS devices with a dark or light
theme
On the iPad and iPhone, you can choose whether documents use a dark or
light theme. In the image shown below, the document on the left is using the
dark theme, while the document on the right is using the light theme.
A document’s theme controls the colors of its title bar, menu, and may also
control the colors of the widgets in the document.
You may want to choose the dark theme if the document’s background is also
dark, so that the title bar and menu match the document. Similarly, if the
document’s background is light, you may want to choose the light theme.
You can also display documents with the same theme the app is using. By
default, Mobile apps use the dark theme.
To choose which theme a document displayed on the iPad or iPhone uses
1 In MicroStrategy Web, open the document in Design Mode.
2 From the Tools menu, select Document Properties. The Properties
dialog box opens.
3 From the left, under the Document Properties area, select Mobile.
34 Creating documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
2
4 From the Document theme color drop-down list, select one of the
following:
•
If you want the document and its widgets to use the same theme as the
rest of the Mobile app, select Application theme color (default).
•
If you want the document to always use the dark theme, select Dark.
•
If you want the document to always use the light theme, select Light.
Enabling automatic refresh for documents
For iPhone, iPad, and Android devices, you can define whether or not the
document refreshes itself as it is being displayed on a mobile device.
Automatic refresh is helpful if the document’s data is frequently updated.
refresh also applies to documents viewed in Express Mode
 Automatic
in MicroStrategy Web.
To enable automatic refresh in an iOS or Android document
1 In MicroStrategy Web, open the document in Design Mode.
2 From the Tools menu, select Document Properties. The Properties
dialog box opens.
3 From the left, under the Document Properties section, click Advanced.
4 Select the Automatically Refresh check box.
5 In the field, type the amount of time, in seconds, to wait before each
refresh.
6 Click OK. The Properties dialog box closes.
Enabling zoom for iOS documents
For the iPhone and iPad, you can define whether or not you can zoom in and
out of the document by pinching and double-tapping.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Creating documents for mobile devices
35
2
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
To enable zooming in an iOS document
1 In MicroStrategy Web, open the document in Design Mode.
2 From the Tools menu, select Document Properties. The Properties
dialog box opens.
3 From the left, under the Document Properties section, click Mobile.
4 Select the Enable zoom (pinch and double-tap) check box.
5 Click OK. The Properties dialog box closes.
Creating an image watermark for an Android document
An image watermark is a faint design appearing in the background of a
document. A watermark typically identifies or decorates pages. For example,
a business logo can appear in the background of an Android document.
To create an image watermark for an Android document
1 In MicroStrategy Web, open the document in Design or Editable Mode.
2 From the Tools menu, select Document Properties. The Properties
dialog box opens.
3 To make the background of the document transparent:
a From the left, select Color and Borders.
b From the Color drop-down list, select No Fill.
4 From the left, select Watermark.
5 To create an image watermark:
a From the Watermark drop-down list, select Image watermark.
image file must be available to both the Intelligence Server
 The
and to the designers of the document.
b Type the path and file name of the image in the Source field.
36 Creating documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
c
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
2
By default, the image is automatically resized to fit within the
document margins while retaining its aspect ratio. To scale the image
manually, select a percentage from the Scale drop-down list.
6 Click OK to return to the document.
Allowing users to access information easily: mobile-friendly
panel stacks
In addition to the standard features supported by panels in documents, you
can use the following features to make viewing data in your app easy for
users:
•
Allow users to easily switch between panels by tapping on circles
displayed in a docked panel selector that appears at the bottom of a panel
stack. See Allowing users to easily switch between panels: docked panel
selectors, page 38.
•
Allow users to switch between panels by swiping. See Allowing users to
switch panels by swiping, page 39.
•
Save screen space by using an Information Window, which is a pop-up
window that can display additional details when users tap a selector in a
document or a marker in a map widget. See Providing additional
information to users: Information Windows, page 40.
•
In documents for iPad, determine whether a panel stack resets to the first
panel when an attribute selector that targets the panel stack is changed.
See Resetting panel stacks when selectors are changed, page 52.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Creating documents for mobile devices
37
2
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Allowing users to easily switch between panels: docked
panel selectors
A docked panel selector allows users to switch between panels by tapping on
circles displayed on a selector bar that appears at the bottom of a panel stack.
An example of a panel with a docked selector on the iPad is shown below:
A row of circles, each representing a panel, is displayed in the center of the
selector. The current panel is marked with a dark circle.
You can use a docked panel selector in an app to display multiple graphs or
widgets in one space. You can also use the docked panel selector with a panel
stack to create an interactive slide show, where the information in one panel
progresses naturally to the information displayed in the next.
The steps to create a docked panel selector are described below.
To create a docked panel selector
1 In MicroStrategy Web, create a new document, or open an existing
document in Design Mode.
2 From the Insert menu, choose Panel Stack. When you move the mouse
cursor to the Layout area, the pointer changes to crosshair.
3 Click and drag in the Layout area to create the panel stack.
38 Creating documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
2
To create and configure a selector for the panel stack
4 Right-click the panel stack, and choose Create Panel Selector. A
drop-down selector appears above the panel stack.
5 Right-click the panel selector and choose Properties and Formatting.
The Properties and Formatting dialog box appears.
6 From the left, choose the Selector category.
7 Under Mobile, ensure that the Display selector docked to its panel
stack check box is enabled.
8 Click OK to save the changes.
To add panels and content to the panel stack
9 Hover the mouse cursor over the panel stack. A toolbar appears above the
panel stack.
10 Click Add Panel to add panels to the stack.
11 For each panel, click Add Content, and add grids or graphs to the panel.
Allowing users to switch panels by swiping
You can allow users to change panels in a panel stack by swiping the device’s
screen to move to the next or previous panel.
Prerequisites
This procedure assumes that you have created a document with the
following:
•
A panel stack. For steps to add panel stacks to documents, see the
Dashboards and Widgets Creation Guide.
•
A selector that targets the panel stack. For steps to add selectors to
documents, see the Dashboards and Widgets Creation Guide.
To allow users to switch panels by swiping
1 Open the document in Design or Editable Mode.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Creating documents for mobile devices
39
2
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
2 Right-click the panel stack with the docked panel selector and select
Properties and Formatting. The Properties and Formatting dialog box
opens.
3 From the left, select General.
4 Select the Allow current panel to be changed without selector check
box.
5 Click OK to return to the document.
Providing additional information to users: Information
Windows
Information Windows let users view additional information about a specific
object by tapping it. A pop-up window displays the additional information. A
user can display an Information Window by tapping:
•
An attribute element in a grid or graph.
•
A button.
•
An image.
•
An item in a selector.
•
An object in a widget. For example, a user can tap a store’s location in a
Map widget to display the store’s address, phone number, and ratings.
•
A text field.
An Information Window is a panel stack that is configured to appear as a
pop-up window over the selected object, displaying an additional
40 Creating documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
2
visualization or additional information based on the selected object. An
example of an Information Window in an iPad document is shown below:
You can customize the data that displays in an Information Window
depending on the content of the selected object by using the object as a
selector. In the above example, the Subcategory column in the grid is used as
a selector. When a user taps an element in the column, the Information
Window is displayed with data specific to that attribute element.
You can also use an Information Window as a navigational menu that
displays when a user clicks on a button in the page. For example, in the
MicroStrategy Mobile demo app below, an Information Window is used to
display a list of useful links within the app. The Information Window is
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Creating documents for mobile devices
41
2
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
configured to slide in from the left side of the screen when the user clicks a
menu button in the app.
To use an Information Window in a document, you must do one of the
following:
•
Define a panel stack to be used as the Information Window, and a Grid/
Graph or selector that uses the panel stack as an Information Window, as
described in To define an Information Window for a Grid/Graph or a
selector in a mobile document, page 43.
•
Define a panel stack to be used as the Information Window, and a text
field, image, or button that uses the panel stack as an Information
Window, as described in To define an Information Window for a text
field, an image, or a button in a mobile document, page 46.
You can specify how the Information Window is displayed, by specifying how
it opens (for example, it can slide in from the right), how it closes (using a
Close button or tapping outside the window), its location, and its opacity. For
examples of the different options and steps to specify them, see Specifying
the display of an Information Window on an iPad or iPhone, page 47.
42 Creating documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
2
To define an Information Window for a Grid/Graph or a selector in a mobile
document
1 In MicroStrategy Web, navigate to the document to add an Information
Window to. The document must contain a Grid/Graph or a selector,
which must contain data related to the data to be placed on the panel
stack. This procedure includes steps to add a selector; for steps to create a
Grid/Graph, see the Report Services Document Creation Guide.
For example, the document shown below contains a basic grid:
2 Open the document in Design Mode.
To define the panel stack for the Information Window
3 From the Insert menu, choose Panel Stack. When you move the cursor
into the Layout area, the pointer becomes a crosshair.
4 Click and drag anywhere in the Layout area to create the panel stack. The
panel stack is added to the document.
5 Right-click the panel stack, and select Properties and Formatting. The
Properties and Formatting dialog box opens.
6 From the left, click General, then type an appropriate name for the panel
stack in the Name field. This name appears as the title of the Information
Window on the mobile device.
7 Select the Use as Information Window check box.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Creating documents for mobile devices
43
2
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
8 Click OK to save the changes.
9 Add data related to the Grid/Graph to the Grid/Graph or selector.
For example, in the document above, a pie chart representation of
Revenue for each Year is added to the panel stack, as shown below:
10 Do one of the following:
•
If you are using a Grid/Graph, define the Grid/Graph as a selector.
Follow the steps below:
a In the report grid, right-click the attribute you want to use as the
selector, and choose Use as Selector. MicroStrategy Web
automatically attempts to find targets for the selector.
In the above example, the Region attribute is used as a selector for
the Information Window.
44 Creating documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
2
b To verify that the selector targets the Information Window,
right-click the attribute again, and choose Edit Selector. The
Configure Selector dialog box appears, as shown below.
c
In the Selected Targets list, ensure that the Information Window
panel appears in the list.
d Click OK.
•
If you are using a selector, create the selector to target the panel used
as an Information Window. Follow the steps below:
a Click the arrow next to the Selector Control icon
on the
Controls toolbar, and then choose how to display the selector from
the drop-down list.When you move the mouse to the layout area,
the pointer becomes crosshairs.
b Click the section of the Layout area in which to place the selector.
If you click and drag in the section, you can size the selector.
c
Right-click the selector and select Properties and Formatting.
The Properties and Formatting dialog box opens.
d From the left, choose Selector.
e
Select an attribute, custom group, or consolidation in the Source
field. The elements of the source are displayed as items in the
selector.
f
In the Selected list, ensure that the Information Window panel
appears in the list.
g Click OK.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Creating documents for mobile devices
45
2
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
11 Save the document.
For the example above, when the document is executed on an iPad, the
Information Window appears when the user taps an element in the
Region column, as shown below:
To define an Information Window for a text field, an image, or a button in a
mobile document
1 In MicroStrategy Web, navigate to the document to add an Information
Window to.
2 Open the document in Design Mode.
To create the panel stack for the Information Window
3 From the Insert menu, choose Panel Stack. When you move the cursor
into the Layout area, the pointer becomes a crosshair.
4 Click and drag anywhere in the Layout area to create the panel stack. The
panel stack is added to the document.
5 Right-click the panel stack, and select Properties and Formatting. The
Properties and Formatting dialog box opens.
6 From the left, click General, then type an appropriate name for the panel
stack in the Name field. This name appears as the title of the Information
Window on the mobile device.
46 Creating documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
2
7 Click OK to save the changes.
8 Add controls to the panel stack, such as Grid/Graphs or text fields.
To define the text field, image, or button that uses the Information Window
9 Add a text field, image, or button to the panel stack.
10 Right-click the text field or image, and select Properties and
Formatting. The Properties and Formatting dialog box opens.
11 From the left, click General.
12 From the Panel Stack drop-down list, select the panel stack to use as the
Information Window.
13 Click OK to save your changes.
14 Save the document.
Specifying the display of an Information Window on an iPad or iPhone
You can specify how an Information Window opens on an iPad or iPhone: by
popping up over the document, flipping up (like turning over a card),
increasing in size, or sliding in from an edge of the screen.
You can display a Close button on the Information Window or have it close
when the user taps outside the Information Window.
An Information Window can display in the best position automatically, at the
position of the panel stack, above or below the selected object, or to the right
or left of the selected object.
You can specify the transparency of the Information Window.
You specify these options by defining:
•
The window Mode, which is how the Information Window opens (pop up,
flip up, scale, or slide)
•
Whether or not the Close button is displayed
For pop-up Information Windows, you can specify the placement, or
position, of the Information Window.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Creating documents for mobile devices
47
2
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
•
A flip-up or scaling Information Window displays in the center of the
screen.
•
A sliding Information Window displays at the edge that it slid from.
In the document below, a user can tap the buttons on the left to display
Information Windows.
48 Creating documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
2
Each Information Window is formatted differently. If a user taps the KPI
button, an Information Window without a Close button pops up.The user can
tap anywhere outside of the Information Window to close it.
If the user taps the Task Logger button, the Task Logger Information
Window pops up. Notice that a Close button is displayed.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Creating documents for mobile devices
49
2
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
When the user taps the Profit Forecast button, the Profit Forecast
Information Window slides in from the right.
To specify how an Information Window displays on iPads and iPhones
1 In Web, open the document in Design Mode.
2 Right-click the panel stack that is used as an Information Window, and
select Properties and Formatting.
3 From the left, choose the General category.
4 To specify how to open the Information Window, select one of the
following Window mode options:
•
To open the Information Window by popping it up, select Appear.
(This is the default.)
•
To open the Information Window by flipping it up, like turning over a
card, select Flip Up.
50 Creating documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
•
To open the Information Window by gradually increasing its size,
select Scale Up.
•
To open the Information Window by sliding it from an edge of the
screen, select Slide.
2
5 If you selected Appear as the Window Mode, you can specify the location
of the Information Window. Select one of the following options from the
Placement drop-down list:
•
To display the Information Window in the best position, select
Automatic. (This is the default.)
•
To display the Information Window at the position of the panel stack,
select Fixed.
•
To display the Information Window above the selected object (for
example, the item in the selector or the attribute in the grid), select
Above.
•
To display the Information Window below the selected object, select
Below.
•
To display the Information Window to the left of the selected object,
select Left.
•
To display the Information Window to the right of the selected object,
select Right.
6 If you selected Slide as the Window Mode, you can specify which edge to
slide the Information Window from. Select one of the following options
from the Position drop-down list:
•
Right (the default)
•
Left
•
Above
•
Below
7 By default, Information Windows on an iPhone fill the screen when they
display. To scale the Information Window so it is the same size on the
iPhone as in Web, select the Display in partial screen per panel stack
size on mobile phone check box.
Information Windows on an iPad automatically scale so they are the
same size as in Web.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Creating documents for mobile devices
51
2
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
•
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
If you selected Slide as the Window Mode, you can specify how much
of the Information Window initially displays. Users can then drag the
Information Window out to view the rest of the Information Window.
Do one of the following:

If you selected Right or Left as the Information Window’s position,
specify how much of the Information Window’s left or right side
displays, respectively. Type the value, in inches, in the Initial
sliding in width field.
To display the full Information Window, type 0 (default).

If you selected Above or Below as the Information Window’s
position, specify how much of the Information Window’s bottom
or top side displays, respectively. Type the value, in inches, in the
Initial sliding in height field.
To display the full Information Window, type 0 (default).
8 By default, the Information Window is closed when a user taps outside of
the Information Window. To close the Information Window by tapping a
button instead, select the Dismiss only when ‘Close’ button is tapped
check box.
9 If the Information Window is set to open by flipping, increasing in size, or
sliding into the screen, you can define how transparent the Information
Window displays. Do the following:
a From the left, select Effects.
b In the Transparency field, type a percentage. A higher value displays
the Information Window as more transparent, while a lower value
displays the Information Window as more solid. The default value is
0.
c
To blur the sections of the document that show through the
transparent Information Window, select Enable blur effect.
10 Click OK to save your changes and return to the document.
Resetting panel stacks when selectors are changed
In documents for iPad, you can determine whether a panel stack resets to the
first panel when an attribute selector that targets the panel stack is changed.
By default, the current panel (the panel that is displayed) does not change
when an attribute selector is changed. The steps to enable this option follow.
52 Creating documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
2
To determine whether a panel stack resets when a selector is changed
1 In Web, open the document in Design Mode.
2 Right-click the panel stack, and select Properties and Formatting.
3 In the General category, select the Reset to first panel when targeted
(Mobile only) check box.
4 Click OK to save your changes.
Allowing users easy access to document content: docked
headers and footers
You can ensure that users always have access to a section of content in a
mobile document by adding the content to a docked page header or page
footer. The content of a docked page header is always displayed at the top of
the screen, while a docked page footer is always displayed at the bottom,
regardless of screen size. Docked headers and footers remain in the same
place on the screen as the user scrolls up or down in the document, allowing
the user easy access to the footer’s content.
Some examples of how you can use docked headers and footers are:
•
To display important information, such as the name of your company,
project, or app, copyright information, or contact information.
•
To create a navigation bar of useful links. Do this if you want to create a
custom navigation bar instead of the tab bar MicroStrategy provides. For
steps to create a tab bar, see Creating a tab bar to hold buttons,
page 184.
Steps are below to define a docked page header or page footer.
To dock a header or footer to the top or bottom of a document
1 Right-click the page header or page footer section that you want to define
as docked, then select Properties and Formatting. The Properties and
Formatting dialog box opens.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Creating documents for mobile devices
53
2
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
2 From the left, click General in the Properties section. Do one of the
following:
•
To display the page header or page footer as an ordinary header or
footer that is not docked to the top or bottom of the document, clear
the Dock to top of screen (Mobile only) check box or the Dock to
bottom of screen (Mobile only) check box
•
To display the page header or page footer as docked, select the Dock
to top of screen (Mobile only) check box or the Dock to bottom of
screen (Mobile only) check box.
Allowing users to copy text from documents on iOS devices
On an iPad or iPhone, a user can copy text from a document, by tapping and
holding the text to copy. If zoom is disabled, a user can also double-tap the
text.
If the document uses a document template other than an iPad or iPhone
template, the document may use a Detail section. The Detail section of a
document displays one row for each row of data in the document’s dataset.
(For descriptions and examples of the different document sections, see the
Designing and Creating Documents chapter of the Report Services
Document Creation Guide.) If the text is displayed in the Detail section, a
user taps the text to copy.
For example, a document contains the heading “List of Regions” in the Detail
Header section, and the actual regions in the Detail, as shown below:
Zoom is disabled in the document, so double-tapping the word Region
displays a pop-up menu. The user can copy the selected text (Region), or
select all the text in the text field (List of Regions).
54 Creating documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
2
When a user taps Northeast, which is in the Detail section, the word
Northeast is selected. The pop-up menu allows the user to copy the selected
text (Northeast).
For a document, you can enable copying for the whole document, and also
enable or disable copying for a specific text field. This means that you can
enable copying for all text fields on a document, but specify that a particular
text field cannot be copied. For steps, see To allow users to copy text from a
text field in a document below.
To allow users to copy text from a text field in a document
1 In MicroStrategy Web, open the document in Design Mode.
2 To enable copying for the whole document, follow the steps below:
a From the Tools menu, select Document Properties. The Properties
and Formatting dialog box opens.
b From the list of categories on the left, under Document Properties,
select Mobile.
c
To enable copying from all text fields on the document, select the
Enable copy for text check box.
Text sub-selection is only supported outside of the Detail
 section.
This means that if the user selects text in the Detail
section of the document, all the text in the Detail section is
selected. A user cannot select a single word, as he can in other
document sections. The example on page 54 demonstrates this.
3 By default, all text fields use the document-level setting to determine
whether or not copying is enabled. You can enable or disable copying on a
specific text field by following the steps below:
a Right-click the text field, and select Properties and Formatting. The
Properties and Formatting dialog box opens.
b From the list of categories on the left, select General.
c
Select one of the following:


© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
To enable copying on this text field, select Enable copy for this
text.
To disable copying on this text field, select Disable copy for this
text.
Creating documents for mobile devices
55
2
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
d Click OK to save your changes and return to the document.
Notifying users: Displaying a badge next to the MicroStrategy
Mobile application icon
You can choose to display and update a badge displayed next to the
MicroStrategy Mobile application icon on a user’s iPhone or iPad. The badge
is an alert you can use to inform users of important information, such as new
content or updates. A badge displays as a red circle with white text.
You can:
•
Update the badge each time that the user runs a document. For steps, see
Updating the MicroStrategy Mobile application badge each time that a
document is run, page 56.
•
Update the badge when the data in a report meets specific threshold
conditions. For steps, see Updating the MicroStrategy Mobile
application badge when the data in a report meets specific threshold
conditions, page 57.
Updating the MicroStrategy Mobile application badge each
time that a document is run
You can update the badge displayed next to the MicroStrategy Mobile
application icon on a user’s iPhone or iPad each time that the user runs a
document. To do so, you must add a text field to the document which
contains the value to display in the badge, as described in the steps below.
When the user runs the document, the value displayed in the text field is
automatically used to update the badge.
To update the MicroStrategy Mobile application badge each time that a
document is run
1 In MicroStrategy Web, open the document in Design or Editable Mode.
2 You can have MicroStrategy update the badge with the value of a metric,
rather than a static value. Do one of the following:
•
To update the badge with a metric value, from the Dataset Objects
panel on the left, click and drag the metric onto the layout area. A text
56 Creating documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
2
field is automatically created and displayed, containing shortcut text
that will be automatically replaced with the metric’s value when the
document is run.
•
To update the badge with a static value, from the Insert menu, select
Text, then click the location in the layout area to add the text field to.
A blank text field is automatically created and added to the document.
In the field, type the value to display, then click outside the text field
to apply your changes.
3 Right-click the text field and select Properties and Formatting. The
Properties and Formatting dialog box opens.
4 Under Mobile, select the Set application badge to value of this field
check box.
5 Click OK to apply your changes.
Updating the MicroStrategy Mobile application badge when
the data in a report meets specific threshold conditions
You can update the badge displayed next to the MicroStrategy Mobile
application icon on a user’s iPhone or iPad when a metric on a report meets
specific threshold conditions. This alerts users who see the badge to data that
is likely to be important for making business decisions. To do this, you must
create an alert-based subscription based on the metric, as described in the
steps below.
Prerequisites
•
You must have the MicroStrategy Distribution Services product installed.
•
MicroStrategy Web must be configured to use Distribution Services.
•
Mobile device users must have the Use MicroStrategy Mobile and Mobile
View Document privileges.
To update the MicroStrategy Mobile application badge when the data in a
report meets specific threshold conditions
1 In MicroStrategy Web, run the report to use to update the application
badge.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Creating documents for mobile devices
57
2
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
2 Right-click the name of a metric in the report, then point to Alerts. Select
Mobile Notifications. The Alerts Editor opens.
Define the condition
3 From the Filter On drop-down list, select the attribute or metric to use to
create a condition.
4 If you are creating a condition based on a metric, do the following:
a Select a comparison operator, such as Greater Than or Less Than.
b Enter a value in the field on the right or click Select Metric to choose
another metric to compare the original metric to.
5 If you are creating a condition based on an attribute, do one of the
following:
•
To define your condition by typing specific attribute form values:
a Select the Qualify option.
b From the drop-down list on the left, select the attribute form on
which to base the condition. For example, you can qualify on the
attribute element's ID form, one of its description forms, or the
DATE if the attribute is time-based.
c
From the next drop-down list, select a comparison operator such
as Greater Than or Less Than. The operators available for a
selection depend on the attribute form you chose above.
d Do one of the following:
– To compare the attribute form to a specified value, type the
value in the field.
– To compare the first attribute form to a second attribute form,
click Select Attribute, then select the second attribute form
from the drop-down list.
•
To define your condition by selecting attribute elements from a list:
a Choose the Select option.
b From the drop-down list on the left, select In List or Not In List. If
you select Not in List, then the attribute elements in the Selected
list will not be included in the threshold condition.
58 Creating documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
c
•
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
2
Move attribute elements from the Available list to the Selected list.
Elements in the Selected list are included in the threshold
condition.
To search for a specific element, use the Search for field. Select the
Match case check box to return only items that match the upper and
lower cases you typed in the Search for field.
6 Click the Apply icon to define the condition.
7 To add another threshold condition, select Add Condition, then repeat
the appropriate steps above to define the condition.
Specify delivery options
8 Expand Delivery Settings, then enter a name for the subscription in the
Name field.
9 From the Schedule drop-down list, select a schedule or event. The
schedule choices available are created in the Developer Schedule
Manager. For steps, see the Scheduling Jobs and Administrative Tasks
chapter in the System Administration Guide.
10 If you want alerts delivered to a mobile device:
a Click To to choose an address. The Recipients Browser dialog box
opens.
b You can search for contacts or a contact list in the Find field. The
contacts will appear in the Available list below.
c
Click the left arrow and right arrow to add or remove contacts from
the To, Cc, and Bcc fields.
d Click OK to save the list of addresses.
11 From the Device type drop-down list, select the type of device to deliver
the notifications to.
12 From the Target Application drop-down list, select the type of
application you want to send the report to.
13 Select the Update application badge with the value of this metric
check box. From the drop-down list next to the check box, select the
metric whose value you want to display next to the application icon. Once
a row of data in the report meets the threshold condition you defined in
the steps above, the value of this metric, as displayed in the row, is shown
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Creating documents for mobile devices
59
2
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
next to the application icon. The first row of data that meets the threshold
condition is used to update the application icon.
For example, in the report displayed below, you can define a threshold
condition as “Profit greater than or equal to 200,000”. If you select Sales
Team from the drop-down list, 8 is displayed next to the application icon.
14 If you want to specify an expiration date for the subscription, expand
Advanced Options and select the Do not deliver after check box, then
specify an expiration date by choosing a date from the calendar.
15 Click OK to create the subscription.
Creating documents that use Transaction Services to update
your data warehouse
You can create documents for iOS and Android devices that allow users to
change values in grids and then write those changes to your data warehouse.
Use Transaction Services in your apps and documents to update data, write
new information to your warehouse, or delete existing records. This feature
is available when you install the Transaction Services product.
For an introduction to Transaction Services, see the Advanced Reporting
Guide.
Some examples of how you can use Transaction Services are:
•
To create a Corporate Request Center that allows users to approve or
deny time off, expenses, and purchase order requests.
•
To create inspection forms. Inspectors can input data with sliders and
selectors. They can also take pictures of any issues they find. The results
of their inspections are instantly written to the database.
•
To create and update budgets or calendars.
60 Creating documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
2
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
Prerequisites
•
You must have the Transaction Services product.
•
You must have the Web Configure Transaction privilege.
Overview
The following is a high-level overview of the tasks you need to perform to
create a document that uses Transaction Services. Each high-level step
describes where to find specific instructions for designing
transaction-enabled documents:
•
In Developer, create a Transaction Services report using the Freeform
SQL Editor. For instructions, see the Advanced Reporting Guide.
•
In MicroStrategy Web, create a dataset report that includes the attributes
and metrics you added to the Transaction Services report above. For
instructions, see the Report Services Document Creation Guide.
•
In MicroStrategy Web, create a document for mobile devices that uses the
above dataset report, and link it to the Transaction Services report you
created above. For instructions, see the Report Services Document
Creation Guide.
For iOS devices, the document can include a transaction table, which
provides a structure to organize multiple input object controls for the
same transaction. For steps to create a transaction table, including an
example, see Organizing transactions with tables on iOS devices,
page 78.
The values in documents you create using the above procedure can only be
edited by users who have the Execute Transaction privilege.
Selecting a data view for reports and documents on BlackBerry
devices
Reports and documents that are designed to be viewed in a BlackBerry
device must have a data view assigned to them. Each of these data views has
its own benefits but also disables some features:
•
Tabular interactive data view allows the widest number of report and
document manipulations on the mobile device, but does not allow certain
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Creating documents for mobile devices
61
2
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
report formatting during the design process. See Tabular interactive
data view, page 62 for details.
•
Original layout data view provides flexibility in the design of reports and
documents, but disables some of the functionality available to the user.
See Original layout data view, page 62 for details.
The report designer designates the data view for each report when the report
is designed in MicroStrategy Web or Developer.
When designing a report or document for a BlackBerry user, it is important
to think about the way the user will interact with it. If the user will benefit
from a simple grid layout and the ability to rearrange the data on the report,
the Tabular Interactive data view is the best choice. If the report is best
understood with minimal manipulations, but requires a more complex
layout, Original Layout data view is more appropriate.
For steps to set the data view when designing a report for BlackBerry devices,
see the MicroStrategy Web Help.
Tabular interactive data view
Tabular interactive data view allows BlackBerry users to use all functionality
available to work with the reports and documents on the mobile device. The
full functionality described in the MicroStrategy Mobile Analysis Guide is
available to the user in tabular interactive data view.
However, this data view restricts some design features, as described below:
•
Placing attributes in columns: Any attributes placed in the columns of a
grid will be moved to the rows of the grid when the report is delivered to
the device.
•
Placing metrics in rows: Any metrics placed in the rows of a grid will be
moved to the columns of the grid when the report is delivered to the
device.
Original layout data view
Original layout data view provides flexibility in the design of a report or
document. It allows you to use the design features that are disabled in
tabular interactive data view.
62 Creating documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
2
However, original layout data view disables some of the Mobile user’s
functionality. The disabled Mobile user functionality is described below:
•
Sorting on a grid
•
Moving objects to and from the page-by axis
•
Rearranging rows on a grid
•
Rearranging columns on a grid
Designing large reports for use in MicroStrategy Mobile in the original layout
data view improves the loading time of a report when objects are in the
page-by field. Reports in this data view load only the data for the currently
selected page to the mobile device, rather than loading all of the data at once.
When designing a report in original layout data view, the designer is able to
place attributes on the columns and metrics on the rows of a grid. This
design ability, known as cross-tabbing, allows the user to see metrics for
different attributes shown side-by side. This is illustrated in the image below:
Allowing users to filter data: prompts
A prompt is a question that the system presents to a user when a report is
executed. The user’s answer determines the data that is returned by the
report. Specific prompts can be added to a report for use on an iPhone, iPad,
or Android device that has the MicroStrategy Mobile application. These
prompts are then displayed when the prompted report, or a document that
uses the prompted report as a dataset, is executed on the device.
You can use prompts to customize the data within an app to the user. For
example, an app contains information on sales and inventory for all stores of
a company nationwide, with a prompt asking for which store(s) the user
would like to view data. Store managers in different regions typically want to
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Allowing users to filter data: prompts
63
2
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
see data for different stores. Including a prompt allows you to create one app
that all store managers can use.
If an app or document has more than one prompt, you can filter the options
available in the second prompt based on the user’s answers in the first
prompt. To do this, add the first prompt as a filter on the second prompt. For
steps to create a filter, see the Basic Reporting Guide.
For an introduction to prompts, the basic prompt types, prompt creation,
and adding a prompt to a report, see the Basic Reporting Guide. For
instructions to add a prompt to a document, see the Report Services
Document Creation Guide.
For best practices when creating prompts for mobile devices, see Best
practices for creating prompts for mobile devices, page 65.
For steps to answer prompts in MicroStrategy Mobile, see the MicroStrategy
Mobile Analysis Guide.
You can display prompts on mobile devices in the following styles:
•
Textbox: This prompt lets users type a value via a keypad to answer a
prompt.
•
Slider: This prompt lets users select a numeric value on a horizontal
slider.
•
Stepper: This prompt displays a numeric value. Users can tap the
increment and decrement buttons to increase or decrease the value for
their prompt answer.
•
Switch: This prompt lets users choose between two choices, On and Off.
•
Wheel: This prompt displays a wheel or row of wheels that the user can
scroll through to specify a date or date and time. On Android devices, this
prompt is displayed as a stepper.
•
Calendar: This prompt lets users select a date from a calendar.
•
Geo Location: This prompt lets users filter results based on their current
geographical location. The prompt includes a request for permission to
enable a GPS-style locator. For more information, see Prompting users
for their location: Geo Location prompts, page 74.
•
Barcode Reader: This prompt lets users answer a prompt by scanning or
typing a barcode. For more information, see Creating Barcode Reader
prompts, page 75.
64 Allowing users to filter data: prompts
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
•
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
2
Tree: This prompt lets users answer a prompt by selecting objects in a
tree. Tapping one object in the tree displays all objects underneath it. For
more information, see Allowing users to choose elements from multiple
attributes: Hierarchy prompts, page 73.
Prompts for mobile devices are divided into four types: value prompts,
attribute element prompts, hierarchy prompts, and object prompts. Value
prompts require the user to select a single value, such as a date or number.
Attribute element prompts require the user to select from a limited list of
available attribute elements.
Hierarchy prompts require the user to select an attribute or attribute
element from a hierarchy of related attributes. For example, an app may
display data for a time period that the users specify. The app may include a
prompt on the Time hierarchy, which contains the Year, Month, and Day
attributes. Users can then choose to view data for a specific year, month, or
day.
Object prompts require the user to select one or more objects from a list of
available objects. Objects prompts allow users to choose exactly what data
they want to view. For example, a document may contain a grid with the
Region and City attributes. You can add an object prompt to allow users to
choose which metrics or filters to add to the grid.
Best practices for creating prompts for mobile devices
•
Create prompts specifically designed for use on mobile devices. Some
examples of the prompt types are listed below:





•
Slider, which allows users to answer the prompt by selecting a
numeric value on a slider.
Stepper, which allows users to answer the prompt by using increment
and decrement buttons.
Wheel, which allows users to answer the prompt by moving wheels to
specify a value.
Geo Location, which allows users to filter results based on their
current geographical location.
Barcode Reader, which allows users to answer the prompt by scanning
or typing a barcode.
Prompts that are not specifically designed for mobile devices can still be
used. In general, use:
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Allowing users to filter data: prompts
65
2
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
Mobile Design and Administration Guide

The List style for single selections.

The Shopping Cart style for multiple selections on iOS devices.

The Geo Location style for geographical location data.

The Barcode Reader style for barcode data.
Allowing users to filter data based on a single value: Value
prompts
A value prompt lets users select a single value, such as a date or specific text
string, and filter report data based on their selection. The different types of
value prompts are:
•
Date and time prompt: This prompt type asks users to type or select a
date, and returns data with the Date data type that matches the user’s
selection. For example, the Date prompt can be useful when added to a
filter that screens data based on Year=2006. The prompt lets users select
a specific date within the year of the filter’s condition. Date prompts are
used in filters that qualify on a date.
Date and time prompts are displayed as wheels on an iPhone or iPad, and
are displayed as a date/time stepper on an Android device.
•
Numeric prompt: This prompt type asks users to type a numeric value.
Numeric value prompts accept integers or decimals up to 15 digits of
precision. Numeric prompts can be used in any filter that needs a number
input from the user. For example, a numeric prompt may be used to filter
results where the minimum value for Revenue is entered by the user.
Numeric prompts can be displayed as text boxes, numeric wheels, sliders,
steppers, switches to choose between two numeric values, and location
prompts.
•
Text prompt: This prompt type asks users to type a string of text in a text
box.
Text prompts can be displayed as text boxes, or as barcode reader
prompts.
•
Big decimal prompt: This prompt type asks users for a “big decimal”
value. Big decimal value prompts accept integers and decimals up to 38
digits of precision.
Big decimal prompts can be displayed as text boxes.
66 Allowing users to filter data: prompts
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
2
For more information about value prompts, see the MicroStrategy Web
Help.
To create a value prompt
1 On the MicroStrategy Web home page, click Create Prompt. The Create
Prompt page opens, with a list of the types of prompts you can create.
Click Value Prompt.
2 Specify the type of value prompt, making your selection based on your
requirements:
•
Date and Time prompt: This prompt lets users filter for data related
to either a specific date or a range of dates.
•
Numeric prompt: This prompt lets users filter numeric data, usually
based on a metric.
•
Text prompt: This prompt lets users filter text data, usually based on
attribute forms.
•
Big Decimal prompt: This prompt lets users filter data based on a big
decimal value for a metric.
3 Click the General tab.
4 Specify a title and description for the prompt in the Title and
Instructions fields.
To restrict the prompt answers
5 To require users to answer the prompt before running the report, select
the Prompt answer is required check box.
6 To set the maximum and minimum values that can be entered by the
user, select the Minimum value and Maximum value check boxes and
type a value in the respective fields. You can specify a minimum value
even if you do not specify a maximum value.
To specify the layout and display style of the prompt
7 Click the Style tab.
8 From the Display style drop-down list, specify a presentation style, such
as Textbox, for the prompt. This is how the prompt is displayed to the
user.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Allowing users to filter data: prompts
67
2
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
9 Depending on your requirements, choose the appropriate display style
and options by referring to the following table:
End Goal
Prompt Type and
Display Style
Setup Recommendations and Requirements
Select a date from
a calendar
Prompt type:
Date & Time
Minimum value: Specify the earliest date that can be used to
answer the prompt.
Display style:
Maximum value: Specify the latest date that can be used to
answer the prompt.
Textbox
Select a date and/ Prompt type:
or time from a
Date & Time
wheel
Display style:
Textbox
Minimum value: Specify the earliest date and time that can be
used to answer the prompt.
Maximum value: Specify the latest date and time that can be
used to answer the prompt.
Allow user to select time: Specify whether or not the user can
select a time as well as a date to answer the prompt.
Interval (minutes): Specify the interval displayed between each
value on the wheel. For example, an interval of 30 allows users
to select times in 30-minute intervals, such as 9:30 A.M., 10:00
A.M., 10:30 A.M., and so on.
Type a numeric
value to answer a
prompt
Prompt type:
Numeric
Minimum value: Specify the lowest value that can be used to
answer the prompt.
Display style:
Textbox
Maximum value: Specify the highest value that can be used to
answer the prompt.
Use a switch to
choose between
two numeric
values
Prompt type:
Numeric
On value: Specify the numeric value used when the switch is
set to its On position. The default is 1.
Display style:
Switch
Off value: Specify the numeric value used when the switch is
set to its Off position. The default is 0.
Select a numeric
value on a
horizontal slider
Prompt type:
Numeric
Minimum value (required): Specify the lowest selectable value
in the slider.
Display style:
Slider
Maximum value (required): Specify the highest selectable
value in the slider.
Interval: Specify the interval displayed between each value on
the slider. For example, an interval of 10 allows users to specify
values in increments of 10, such as 10, 20, 30, and so on.
Use a stepper to
increment or
decrement a
numeric value
Prompt type:
Numeric
Minimum value: Specify the lowest value that is displayed in
the prompt.
Display style:
Stepper
Maximum value: Specify the highest value that is displayed in
the prompt.
Interval: Specify the interval used to increment or decrement
values in the stepper. For example, if the stepper’s minimum
value is set to 100, and the interval is 10, users can increment
the stepper value to 100, 110, 120, and so on.
68 Allowing users to filter data: prompts
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
End Goal
Select a numeric
value from a
wheel
2
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
Prompt Type and
Display Style
Setup Recommendations and Requirements
Prompt type:
Numeric
Minimum value: Specify the lowest value that is displayed in
the prompt.
Display style:
Wheel
Maximum value: Specify the highest value displayed in the
prompt.
Interval: Specify the interval displayed between each value on
the wheel. For example, an interval of 30 allows users to
specify values in increments of 30.
Filter data based
on a user’s
current location
Prompt type:
Numeric
Mobile preferences: Select the Latitude or Longitude option
to filter data based on the current latitude or longitude.
Display style:
Geo Location
Note: For Geo Location prompts, you must create one prompt
for the longitude, and one for the latitude.
For a detailed description of the Geo Location prompt, see
Prompting users for their location: Geo Location prompts,
page 74.
Type text to
answer a prompt
Scan or type an
item’s barcode
Prompt type:
Text
Minimum number of characters: Specify the minimum
required length of the prompt answer.
Display style:
Textbox
Maximum number of characters: Specify the maximum
allowable length of the prompt answer.
Prompt type:
Text
Minimum number of characters: Specify the minimum
required length of the barcode.
Display style:
Barcode Reader
Maximum number of characters: Specify the maximum
allowable length of the barcode.
For a detailed description of the Barcode Reader prompt, see
Creating Barcode Reader prompts, page 75.
Type a large
number to answer
a prompt
Prompt type: Big
Decimal
Minimum value: Specify the lowest value that can be used to
answer the prompt.
Display style:
Textbox
Maximum value: Specify the highest value that can be used to
answer the prompt.
For examples of each prompt display style, see Allowing users to filter
data: prompts, page 63.
To save the prompt
10 To save the prompt, click Save As. The Save As dialog box opens.
11 Specify a name, description, and the location in which to save the prompt
and click OK. The Save As dialog box closes, and the prompt is saved.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Allowing users to filter data: prompts
69
2
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Allowing users to choose from a list of attribute elements:
Attribute element prompts
An attribute element prompt lets users select prompt answers from a limited
list of specific attribute elements.
The table on page 71 provides a list of attribute element prompt types that
you can create in MicroStrategy Web for use on a mobile device. To create a
prompt that accomplishes a specific goal, find the task you want to perform
in the first column in the table, then see the remaining columns for the
display style, recommendations, and requirements to create the prompt. For
images of each prompt display style, see Allowing users to filter data:
prompts, page 63.
For more information about attribute element prompts, see the
MicroStrategy Web Help.
To create an attribute element prompt
1 On the MicroStrategy Web home page, click Create prompt.
2 The Create Prompt page opens with a list of the types of prompts that you
can create. Click Attribute Element List.
3 To determine the attribute whose elements the user can choose from,
click Select Attribute. Select the attribute whose elements are displayed
in the prompt and click OK.
To define the elements that the user can choose from
4 Choose one of the following options:
•
To display all the attribute elements to users while they are answering
the prompt, choose List all elements (no restriction). This option is
recommended only if there are a small number of elements for the
attribute.
•
To create a list of attribute elements from which users can choose,
select Use a predefined list of elements. This option is
recommended if users need to choose from a specific set of elements.
To select the elements, click Add, then click OK. To remove an object,
highlight it and click Remove. To remove all items, click Clear.
70 Allowing users to filter data: prompts
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
•
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
2
To narrow the list of available attribute elements by using a filter,
choose Use a filter to reduce the number of elements. This option
is recommended for attributes with a large number of elements.
For example, you can restrict the Customer attribute by only showing
the top 100 customers. Browse to and select the filter.
5 Click the General tab.
6 Specify a title and description for the prompt in the Title and
Instructions fields.
7 To require users to answer the prompt before running the report, specify
whether the prompt requires an answer. Select the Prompt answer is
required check box.
8 Set the maximum and minimum number of prompt answers allowed, if
desired. Enter these numbers in the Minimum number of answers and
Maximum number of answers fields.
9 Click the Style tab.
10 You can determine the presentation style used to display the prompt to
the user. The default is Shopping Cart. From the Display style
drop-down list, select the presentation style you want to use.
11 Depending on your requirements, select the appropriate display style and
options by referring to the following table:
End Goal
Select a date-based attribute
element from a calendar
Display
Style
Calendar
Setup Recommendations and Requirements
Minimum date: Specify the earliest date that users can
select.
Maximum date: Specify the latest date that users can
select.
Select an attribute element
from a list
List
Show search box: Specify whether or not users are
presented with a search box to filter the list of attribute
elements.
Make search required: Specify whether or not to require
that users search for elements.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Allowing users to filter data: prompts
71
2
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
Display
Style
End Goal
Use the current geographical
location to filter attribute
elements
Geo
Location
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Setup Recommendations and Requirements
Select location mapping level: Select the level at which
to filter attribute elements. For example, if this option is set
to City, the attribute elements will be filtered to include only
those in the current city.
Select location mapping attribute: Select the attribute to
use to filter the element list. The location mapping attribute
must contain attribute forms for latitude and longitude, and
these attribute forms must be visible on the template.
For a detailed description of the Geo Location prompt, see
Prompting users for their location: Geo Location prompts,
page 74.
Scan or type the barcode of an
item to search for an attribute
element
Barcode
Reader
Show search box: Specify whether or not users are
presented with a search box to filter the list of attribute
elements.
Make search required: Specify whether or not to require
that users search for elements.
Barcode mapping attribute form: Select the attribute
form used to look up barcode information.
For a detailed description of the Barcode Reader prompt,
see Creating Barcode Reader prompts, page 75.
To save the prompt
12 To save the prompt, select Save As. The Save As dialog box opens.
13 Specify a name, description, and the location in which to save the prompt
and click OK.
72 Allowing users to filter data: prompts
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
2
Allowing users to choose elements from multiple attributes:
Hierarchy prompts
Users can answer a prompt on an iPad or iPhone by selecting attribute
elements from all of the attributes in a hierarchy, using the Hierarchy
prompt.
Use Hierarchy prompts when users want to view or compare data for
different types of attribute elements. For example, a user wants to analyze
sales information across all the products in his store. The user wants to be
able to analyze sales data for specific items in his store and analyze sales data
across different product categories. You can create a Hierarchy prompt on
the Product hierarchy, which contains both the Item and Category attributes,
and add it to the report.
For steps to create a Hierarchy prompt, refer to the Basic Reporting Guide.
Allowing users to choose from a list of objects: Object prompts
Users can answer a prompt on an iPad or iPhone by selecting from a list of
objects. The object prompt is more flexible than the attribute element
prompt. Instead of choosing from a list of attribute elements, users can
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Allowing users to filter data: prompts
73
2
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
choose from a list of objects, such as attributes, metrics, and custom groups.
Users can also choose which filter to apply to a report or document.
Use Object prompts when users want to control what data they view in a
report or document. For steps to create an Object prompt, refer to the Basic
Reporting Guide.
Prompting users for their location: Geo Location prompts
The Geo Location prompt lets users answer a prompt by using their device’s
current geographical location. Geo Location prompts are typically used to
filter data in a Map widget. For example, a Map widget displays several
locations as markers on the map display. You can choose to display only
those map markers that are in the user’s current city.
The location name that is returned by a Geo Location prompt is based on
Google’s geocoding. The prompt determines the user’s longitude and latitude
using the mobile device’s GPS receiver, and passes this information to
Google Maps to return information about the user’s location.
You can also use an attribute element prompt to filter attribute elements
based on the location of the mobile device. To support attribute element
prompts, your MicroStrategy schema must include a location mapping
attribute that includes attribute forms for latitude and longitude
information.
For example, to filter a list of stores by the state in which the mobile device is
located, provide a location mapping attribute that contains attribute forms
for the state name, latitude, and longitude.
The attribute that provides the list of attribute elements that are filtered and
displayed by the Geo Location prompt, also called the display attribute, does
not have to be the same as the location mapping attribute. For example, the
Customer State is both the display attribute and the location mapping
attribute. When the prompt is displayed on a mobile device, the list of
prompt answers is filtered to display the current state, as shown in the image
below. Instead, if the display attribute is the Store attribute, and the location
mapping attribute is Customer State, the list of prompt answers is filtered to
74 Allowing users to filter data: prompts
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
2
display the stores in the current state, as shown in the image below on the
right. Users can select stores from the list for which to display data.
You can:
•
Create a prompt that automatically uses the device’s current latitude and
longitude. While creating the prompt, you must define two value
prompts, one for latitude and one for longitude.
For steps to create value prompts, see To create a value prompt, page 67.
•
Create a prompt that filters an attribute element list using the current
geographical location, by defining an attribute element prompt with the
display style set to Geo Location.
For steps to create an attribute element prompt, see To create an
attribute element prompt, page 70.
Creating Barcode Reader prompts
The Barcode Reader prompt lets users scan or type an item’s barcode using
the device to answer a prompted report or document.
You can add a Barcode Reader prompt to a report or document by defining a
prompt and setting its display style to Barcode Reader. The prompt is then
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Allowing users to filter data: prompts
75
2
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
displayed as a Barcode Reader when the report or document is executed, as
shown below:
Some examples of how you can use the Barcode Reader prompt are:
•
To spontaneously view a product’s sales and inventory information.
•
To view other locations where the product is stocked, as stored in your
database.
•
To compare the product’s popularity with other products in the same
category or with the same brand name.
The Barcode Reader prompt supports the following types of barcodes:
•
QR code
•
UPC-A
•
UPC-E
•
EAN-8
•
EAN-13
76 Allowing users to filter data: prompts
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
2
You can do the following:
•
To allow iPhone, iPad, and Android users to filter report results based on
a product barcode, you can define a value prompt with the display style
set to Barcode Reader.
For steps to create a value prompt, see To create a value prompt,
page 67.
•
To allow iPhone, iPad, and Android users to search for an item in an
attribute element list, you can define an attribute element prompt with
the display style set to Barcode Reader. If an item’s barcode matches the
scanned or typed barcode, its name is returned in the search and can be
selected to answer the prompt.
For steps to create an attribute element prompt, see To create an
attribute element prompt, page 70.
To support the scanning of barcodes using MicroStrategy Mobile, you must
store the barcode data used in the associated prompt with a database data
type that supports text data. MicroStrategy recommends using the varchar
data type for your database to store the barcode data. For details about
storing data in your warehouse, see the Project Design Guide.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Allowing users to filter data: prompts
77
2
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Allowing users to filter data using filter panels
You can allow users to filter data within a dashboard-style document using a
panel of selectors, called a filter panel. Users select different options in the
filter panel, which changes the data that is displayed in the document.
You can customize the filter panel so that each filter in the panel is
collapsible, similar to the Filters panel in dashboards. For steps, see the
procedure below.
For detailed steps to add a filter panel to a document, see the Dashboards
and Widgets Creation Guide.
To make each filter in a filter panel collapsible
1 In MicroStrategy Web, open the document containing the filter panel in
Design or Editable Mode.
2 Right-click the filter panel and select Properties and Formatting.
3 Under the Panel Stack area, select the Show as collapsible panel
(Mobile only) check box.
Organizing transactions with tables on iOS
devices
A transaction-enabled document contains embedded write-back
functionality for the purposes of decision-making or initiating a transaction.
Transaction Services-enabled documents allow you to update, delete, or
create new entries in your database from within your Mobile app.
If you have multiple input object controls on a document displayed on an iOS
device, you can create a transaction table to group and organize those
controls. For general background information on transaction-enabled
documents, including the prerequisites needed to work with them, see the
Transaction-enabled Documents chapter of the Report Services Document
Creation Guide.
78 Allowing users to filter data using filter panels
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
2
You can create a transaction table that is displayed at all times in the
document, or that pops up as an Information Window when a user taps an
object.
The image below gives an example of a transaction table in an app for store
inspectors. The inspector fills in all the fields to complete the transaction
table, and then taps Submit to submit the changes.
The high-level steps to create and enable a transaction table are described
below:
1 Create a transaction table, as described in Creating a table, page 81.
2 Link the transaction table to a Transaction Services-enabled report. Data
from the input objects defined in the Transaction Services report is
displayed in the table cells for users to edit.
3 Link each input object on the Transaction Services report to a cell in the
transaction table.
4 Determine what type of input object control is displayed to users when
they view the Transaction Services-enabled document. Analysts use these
input object controls to edit the data displayed in a document. For
example, users can type text in a text field, turn a switch on and off to
specify a numeric value, select a value from a list, and so on.
The following input control types are displayed as a list in a transaction
table:
•
Check box
•
Likert Scale
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Organizing transactions with tables on iOS devices
79
2
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
•
Radio List
•
Toggle
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Only the MicroStrategy Mobile-specific procedure for creating a transaction
table is included in this guide. For detailed procedures for the remaining
steps to create transactions, including descriptions of the available input
object controls, see the Transaction-enabled Documents chapter of the
Report Services Document Creation Guide.
The parts of a table
A transaction cell is the basic component of a transaction table. A transaction
cell contains an input object control, which are the objects that allow analysts
to edit the data displayed in a document. For example, users can type text in
a text field, turn a switch on and off to specify a numeric value, select a value
from a list, and so on.
An example of a transaction table in Design Mode is show below:
A transaction cell displays a title and a placeholder, as described below:
•
Cell title: The title or description of the cell. An input object control cell
displays the value entered by the user. In the example above, Name,
Email, and Year are cell titles.
•
Cell placeholder text: A hint for the user about the format for an input
object control. In the example above, “Last, First” and
[email protected] are placeholders. A placeholder is optional. In the
example, “Make and Model” does not have a placeholder.
If an input object control is required, the placeholder text displays
“Required” automatically for the user on a mobile device. If the
placeholder is not empty, the text “(Required)” is added to the
80 Organizing transactions with tables on iOS devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
2
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
placeholder text. When you configure the transactions, you select
whether the control is required.
A transaction table contains at least one group. Groups collect related cells
together under a descriptive title. The example above contains two groups,
Customer and Vehicle, which separate and give context to the cells that
require customer information and cells that require vehicle information.
You can create a group that is displayed to the document designer but hidden
from users. For example, you may create a cell that contains a macro to
gather the mobile device’s ID. Since no input is required from the user, only
the mobile device, you may want to hide the group. To hide a group, name
the group hidden.
A transaction table also displays a Clear button and a Submit button, or
Cancel and Submit if the transaction table is used as an Information
Window.
•
The Submit button submits the data in the transaction table. If the
transaction table is displayed as an Information Window, the
Information Window is also closed.
•
The Clear button erases all the information added to the transaction
table, allowing the user to start again.
•
The Cancel button closes the Information Window without submitting
the data in the transaction table.
You can customize the button names, but they are referred to as Clear and
Submit throughout this chapter. By default, changes are cleared or submitted
automatically, as soon as the button is tapped. You can require that a
confirmation message is displayed after the Clear or Submit button is
tapped.
Creating a table
Prerequisites
•
You must have the Transaction Services product.
•
You must have the Web Configure Transaction privilege.
•
The Transaction Services report that you want to link to the Grid/Graph
or text fields has already been created. This report must contain the input
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Organizing transactions with tables on iOS devices
81
2
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
object for each value that you want to allow users to change. For steps to
create a Transaction Services report, see the Advanced Reporting Guide.
The high-level steps to creating a table are listed below, with links to the
appropriate steps.
1 Add a table. See Adding a table to a document, page 82 for steps to create
and format a table. The new table contains a single cell in a single group,
and the Clear and Submit buttons. You can customize the actions and
name of the buttons, as described in the procedure.
2 Add groups to the table. A group is a collection of related cells. You can
add as many groups as needed to the table. If the table contains multiple
groups, you can change the order that the groups are displayed in. For
steps, see Adding and moving groups in a table, page 88.
3 Add transaction cells to the table. You can add as many transaction cells
as needed. If the table contains multiple cells, you can change the order
that the cells are displayed in. For steps, see Adding or moving cells in a
table, page 89.
Adding a table to a document
To add a table
1 In MicroStrategy Web, open the document in Design Mode or Editable
Mode.
2 From the Insert menu, select Table Control (Mobile). When you move
the cursor to the Layout area, the pointer becomes crosshairs. Click in the
desired location in the Layout area. If you click and drag in the Layout
area, you can size the table. An empty table container is added to the
document, with a single cell in a single group, and the Clear and Submit
buttons, as shown below:
82 Organizing transactions with tables on iOS devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
2
To change the group title
3 To change the group title from the default of Title, double-click the group
title text, and type your title. Press ENTER to add the text.
•
If you do not want to display a title for this group, double-click the
group title text and delete the text.
•
If you want to hide this group from users, type hidden as the title.
The title is not case-sensitive, so you can use Hidden or HIDDEN as
well.
To display the table as an Information Window
A transaction table can either be displayed at all times in the document,
or it can pop up as an Information Window when a user taps an object. To
use an Information Window, follow the steps below. To display a
transaction table at all times in the document, skip to To customize the
buttons’ name and actions, page 85.
4 Add the text field, image, or button that will open the transaction table in
an Information Window.
5 Right-click the newly added object, and select Properties and
Formatting. The Properties and Formatting dialog box opens.
6 From the left, click General.
7 From the Panel Stack drop-down list, select the panel stack to use as the
Information Window.
8 Click OK to save your changes.
9 Right-click the table and select Properties and Formatting. The
Properties and Formatting dialog box opens.
10 From the left, click General.
11 Select the Use as Information Window check box.
12 To display a title bar in the Information Window, complete the following
steps:
a Select the Show Title Bar check box.
b From the Title drop-down list, select Custom Title.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Organizing transactions with tables on iOS devices
83
2
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
c
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Type a title in the Title field. This text is used as the title of the
Information Window.
13 To specify how to open the Information Window on an iPad, select one of
the following Window mode options:
•
To open the Information Window by popping it up, select Appear
(default).
If you select Appear, you can specify the location of the Information
Window on an iPad. Select one of the following options from the
Placement drop-down list:






To display the Information Window in the best position, select
Automatic (default).
To display the Information Window at the position of the panel
stack, select Fixed.
To display the Information Window above the selected object (for
example, the item in the selector or the attribute in the grid), select
Above.
To display the Information Window below the selected object,
select Below.
To display the Information Window to the left of the selected
object, select Left.
To display the Information Window to the right of the selected
object, select Right.
•
To open the Information Window by flipping it up, like turning over a
card, select Flip Up.
•
To open the Information Window by gradually increasing its size,
select Scale Up.
•
To open the Information Window by sliding it from an edge of the
screen, select Slide.
If you select Slide, you can specify which edge to slide the Information
Window from, on an iPad or iPhone. Select one of the following
options from the Position drop-down list:

Right (default)

Left

Above
84 Organizing transactions with tables on iOS devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide

Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
2
Below
To customize the buttons’ name and actions
14 If the Properties and Formatting dialog box is not open, right-click the
table and select Properties and Formatting. The Properties and
Formatting dialog box opens.
15 From the left, select Buttons.
16 You can change the name displayed on the Submit button, by replacing
the default text in the Display text field in the Submit button area.
17 You can choose to display a message asking for confirmation when a user
taps the Submit button, before the user’s changes are submitted. Do one
of the following:
•
To display the confirmation message, select the Require
Confirmation check box in the Submit button area.
•
To submit changes without displaying a confirmation message, clear
the Require Confirmation check box in the Submit button area.
18 You can determine which action is performed after a user submits his
changes. Select one of the following under Subsequent Actions:
•
To return to the document without performing any additional actions,
select the No subsequent action option.
•
To refresh the display of the document, select the Refresh the
current document option.
•
To run a specific report or document, complete the following steps:
a Select the Run a new report or document option. Click ... (the
browse button), navigate to and select the report or document you
want to run, and click OK.
b Specify whether the report or document will be executed using
data cached on the mobile device. Do one of the following:
– To run the report or document without using data cached on
the mobile device, select the Force Live Execution check box.
– To run the report or document using data cached on the mobile
device, clear the Force Live Execution check box.
c
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
You can choose to use the same prompt answers that were chosen
in the source document to answer the prompts in the target report
Organizing transactions with tables on iOS devices
85
2
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
or document. To use the same prompt answers, select the Answer
prompts with the same answers as the source check box. If
both the source and target report/document contain the same
prompts, the user will not be asked to provide prompt answers.
The user will still be prompted for any prompts that exist in the
target but that do not exist in the source.
•
To display a custom confirmation message after changes are
submitted, select the Display message after submitting option.
Type the message in the field below the option.
•
A Transaction Services-enabled document that is pre-cached is run in
the background, and its results are stored on the mobile device on
which it is executed, improving the speed with which the document is
run. You can choose to update document results cached on a mobile
device after the user submits his changes, by using the Invalidate
Mobile Device Cache setting to mark a document’s results as in need
of updating.
If the document is defined to be pre-cached, the document will be
automatically pre-cached each time the user submits his changes. If
the document is not defined to be pre-cached, the document will be
automatically executed using data cached on the Intelligence Server
the next time the document is run, or executed against the data source
if no cached data is available. For background information on
pre-caching, see Chapter 5, Administering MicroStrategy Mobile. Do
one of the following:


To have the document pre-cached each time the user submits his
changes, select the Invalidate Mobile Device Cache check box.
To allow the user to submit his changes without marking the data
cached on the mobile device as in need of updating, clear the
Invalidate Mobile Device Cache check box.
19 You can change the name displayed on the Clear button (or Cancel
button, if the table is displayed as an Information Window), by replacing
the default text in the Display text field in the Clear button area (or
Cancel button area).
20 You can choose to display a message asking for confirmation when a user
taps the Clear button (or Cancel button, if the table is displayed as an
Information Window). Do one of the following:
•
To display the confirmation message, select the Require
Confirmation check box in the Clear button area (or Cancel button
area).
86 Organizing transactions with tables on iOS devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
•
2
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
To discard changes without displaying a confirmation message, clear
the Require Confirmation check box in the Clear button area (or
Cancel button area).
To format the table
21 In the Properties and Formatting dialog box, from the left, select Color
and Lines.
22 From the first drop-down list at the top of the dialog box, select Table.
The next drop-down list is then automatically displayed as Body.
23 To change the background fill of the table, select the color from the Color
drop-down list.
24 To change the border around the table, select one of the following from
the Borders options:
•
To hide the table border, select None.
•
To use a single color for the entire border, select All. From the first
drop-down list, select the type of border (thick, thin, and so on). From
the second drop-down list, select the border’s color.
•
To use different colors on different sides of the table, select Custom.
For each side (Top, Bottom, Left, and Right), select the border type
and the border color.
25 From the left, select Font.
26 You can change the font for the cell title and value for all cells in the table,
and for all the group titles. For each part that you want to format, follow
the steps below:
a From the first drop-down list, select Cells or Groups.
b From the second drop-down list, select the part of the table to format.
Your options are:
c

Title (available for cells and groups)

Value (available for cells)
Format the font, including the font type, color, size, and so on.
27 Click OK to save your changes.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Organizing transactions with tables on iOS devices
87
2
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Adding and moving groups in a table
A group organizes cells related to each other so that they appear together in a
table. A table can contain multiple groups or only a single group.
Prerequisite
Before you can add a group to a table, you must have already created a table,
as described in Adding a table to a document, page 82. When you create a
table, a group is automatically created in the table.
To add or move a group in a table
1 In MicroStrategy Web, open the document in Design Mode or Editable
Mode.
2 Click the Add new group button in the table. A new group is added to the
table, with a single cell.
3 To change the group title from the default, double-click the group title
text, and type your title. Press ENTER to add the text.
you do not want to display a title for this group, double-click the
 Ifgroup
title text and delete the text.
4 If you have multiple groups in a table, you can change the order that the
groups are displayed in the table. Select a group to move, by clicking the
group, not the group title or a cell. Then drag and drop the group to its
new position. As you drag the group, a blue arrow is displayed to indicate
its new position.
Deleting a group
Prerequisite
The table must contain at least two groups to delete a group, because a table
must always have at least one group.
88 Organizing transactions with tables on iOS devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
2
To delete a group from the table
1 In MicroStrategy Web, open the document in Design Mode or Editable
Mode.
2 Right-click the group to delete, and select Delete Group.
Delete Group option is not available if the table contains a
 The
single group.
Adding or moving cells in a table
You can add as many cells as necessary. If you add multiple cells, you can
change the order of the cells.
Prerequisites
•
Before you can add a cell to a table, you must have already created a table,
as described in Adding a table to a document, page 82.
•
If you want to add the cell to a group in the table, you must have already
created the group. See Adding and moving groups in a table, page 88 for
steps.
you create a table or a group, a default cell is added as well. You
 When
can configure the cell as though you added it yourself, by following the
procedure below, skipping over the step to add a new cell.
To add or move a cell in a table
1 In MicroStrategy Web, open the document in Design Mode or Editable
Mode.
2 Hover the cursor over the group to add the cell to. Click the Add new cell
button that is displayed. A new cell is added to the table, displaying Title
and Placeholder in the cell.
3 The cell title is the description for the cell. To change the cell title from
the default, double-click the Title text, and type your title. Press ENTER
to add the text.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Organizing transactions with tables on iOS devices
89
2
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
4 The placeholder text contains a hint for the user about the format for an
input object control. For example, if the input object control is a login, the
placeholder text can be domain/user or [email protected] To change
the text from the default, double-click the Placeholder text, and type the
new text. Press ENTER to add the text.
To move a cell
5 Select the cell to move, by clicking the cell, not the cell title or other
component. Then drag and drop the cell to its new position. As you drag
the cell, a yellow bar is displayed to indicate its new position.
After you have created the table, you need to enable transactions for the
document, as described in the Transaction-enabled Documents chapter of
the Report Services Document Creation Guide.
90 Organizing transactions with tables on iOS devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
3
3.
DISPLAYING DATA AS
INTERACTIVE VISUALIZATIONS:
WIDGETS
Introduction
A widget is a rich, graphical display of the results of data, which allows users
to visualize data in different ways than they can when using traditional
reports. Widgets are sophisticated visualization techniques that can combine
with rich interactivity to enable users to understand their data more
effectively.
You can use the following methods to define widgets for mobile devices:
•
Display reports as widgets. This is recommended if you want to display
only one widget on the screen. Note that certain features, such as
Information Windows for the Map widgets, require you to create widgets
in documents.
To display reports as widgets, you need to use the Custom Visualizations
Editor in MicroStrategy Web. For steps, see the MicroStrategy Web
Help.
•
Add widgets to documents. This is recommended if you want to display
additional information on the same layout as the widget. Instructions are
included in this chapter to create and add widgets to documents.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
91
3
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Adding widgets and visualizations to
documents for mobile devices
The following table contains a list of mobile widgets, the mobile devices on
which they can be displayed, and links to background information for each
widget.
other than the mobile widgets in this table are displayed as
 Widgets
grid or graph reports on mobile devices.
Widget
Description
Displays on Link
Data Cloud
widget
Displays the names of attribute
elements in various font sizes to depict
the differences in metric values.
iPhone, iPad Displaying a Data Cloud
widget, page 94
Date Selection
widget
Allows users to view data about events
on an interactive calendar.
iPad,
Android
tablet
Displaying an interactive
event calendar: Date
Selection widget, page 95
Graph Matrix
Visualization
Displays data using a variety of graph
styles, such as the line graph, bubble
graph, or grid.
iPad
Displaying data in an
interactive graph: Graph
Matrix widget, page 99
Heat Map
widget
Allows users to visualize data as
rectangles color-coded and sized to
depict the differences in metric values.
iPad,
Android
Displaying data in a Heat
Map widget, page 99
Image Layout
widget
Allows users to visualize data as
colored areas or bubble markers
overlaid on an image.
iPad,
Android
Displaying data as an
overlay on an image: Image
Layout widget, page 101
Image Viewer
widget
Allows users to browse through a
collection of images.
iPhone,
iPad,
Android
Displaying images: Image
Viewer widget, page 102
Interactive Grid
widget
Displays data in a compact tabular
layout.
iPhone,
iPad,
Android
Displaying data in rows and
columns: Interactive Grid
widget, page 105
Map widget
Allows users to search and view
information for locations on a map.
iPhone,
iPad,
Android
Displaying geographical
data: Map widget, page 109
Microcharts
widget
Allows users to analyze trends at a
glance using compact charts and line
graphs.
iPhone,
iPad,
Android
Visualizing trends:
Microcharts widget,
page 127
Multimedia
widget
Allows users to download and view
multimedia files, such as videos, PDFs,
and ePub books.
iPhone, iPad Downloading and viewing
multimedia files: Multimedia
widget, page 131
92 Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
3
Widget
Description
Displays on Link
Network widget
Allows users to analyze relationships
between items and clusters as a
network of connected nodes.
iPad
Visualizing relationships:
Network widget, page 133
Photo Uploader
widget
Allows users to upload images by
taking a new image or using an existing
image on their mobile device.
iPhone,
iPad,
Android
Uploading images: Photo
Uploader widget, page 133
RSS Reader
widget
Allows users to view and update an
RSS news feed.
iPhone, iPad Displaying RSS feeds: RSS
Reader widget, page 138
Survey widget
Allows users to interact with the survey
in a Transaction Services-enabled
document and submit their answers,
which are then stored in your data
source.
iPad
Gathering data from users:
Survey widget, page 140
Timeline widget
Allows users to view events or
important milestones in the status of a
product.
iPad
Displaying a Timeline
widget, page 142
Time Series
widget
Displays data for a specific period of
time in a line graph.
iPhone,
iPad,
Android
Displaying data trends:
Time Series widget,
page 147
Video Player
Play video directly in a document.
Videos can be cached for offline
viewing.
iPhone, iPad Downloading and playing
videos: Video Player widget,
page 152
you are designing widgets for an iPhone or Android device, you can
 Ifdetermine
whether the widget takes up the entire screen. For steps,
see Displaying widgets using the entire screen on mobile devices,
page 154.
Some widgets are also available as interactive visualizations in Visual
Insight, which allows you to quickly create a customized, interactive Visual
Insight dashboard.
In a dashboard, users can add or remove attributes and metrics, change the
type of visualization that is used, or create new filters and thresholds in the
dashboard on-the-fly. Consider using dashboards when your users want a
high degree of interaction with their data. Dashboards can be especially
helpful in strategic business meetings to spontaneously discover the answer
to any business queries that come up.
You can create visualizations that highlight or filter other visualizations in a
dashboard when a user taps on an attribute element in the visualization.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
93
3
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
For steps to create a dashboard, see the MicroStrategy Web Help.
The following visualizations can be viewed in a dashboard on an iPad:
•
Density Map visualization
•
Grid visualization
•
Graph visualization
•
Graph Matrix visualization
•
Heat Map visualization
•
Image Layout visualization
•
Map visualization
•
Map with Areas visualization
•
Network visualization
Displaying widgets as grids or graphs
You can determine whether mobile widgets are displayed as widgets or grid
or graph reports on mobile devices. For detailed procedures on displaying
widgets, see the Dashboards and Widgets Creation Guide.
upgrading from MicroStrategy 9.2.1m, widgets that were
 After
previously created to display on Android tablets may display as grids
or graphs on the mobile device. To display these widgets on Android
tablets, ensure that Android Tablet is selected as a display option for
the widget. For detailed procedures on displaying your widgets on
Android tablets after an upgrade from MicroStrategy 9.2.1m, see the
Upgrade Guide.
Displaying a Data Cloud widget
A Data Cloud widget for the iPhone and iPad displays the names of attribute
elements in various font sizes to depict the differences in metric values
between the elements. This type of widget allows users to quickly identify the
most significant positive or negative contributions.
94 Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
3
A Data Cloud widget is a list of attribute elements. The first metric on the
widget’s template determines the font size for the attribute elements. A
bigger font for an element indicates a larger metric value.
For steps to add a Data Cloud widget to a document and specify formatting
options, see the Dashboards and Widgets Creation Guide. You can also
define an Information Window that displays when an attribute element is
tapped. For instructions on creating an Information Window, see Providing
additional information to users: Information Windows, page 40.
Displaying an interactive event calendar: Date Selection widget
The Date Selection widget displays events in an interactive calendar in either
a Month, Week, or Day view on an iPad. An example of a Date Selection
widget is shown below:
You can use the Date Selection widget as a calendar of events or
appointments within your app. Users can select an event to display an
Information Window or open a link containing information on the event. If
you have Transaction Services, users can then edit or delete events.
For instructions on creating an Information Window, see Providing
additional information to users: Information Windows, page 40. For steps
to define a link in a widget using the Links Editor, see the Providing Flash
Analysis and Interactivity: Widgets chapter in the Dashboards and Widgets
Creation Guide.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
95
3
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
You can also use the Date Selection widget as a filter for the data in your
dashboard. Users can select an event on the widget and automatically update
the rest of the dashboard with data that relates to the event. To do this, you
define the Event attribute as a selector. For steps, see the Dashboards and
Widgets Creation Guide.
Prerequisites
For a Grid/Graph to be used as a Date Selection widget, it must include at
least two attributes on the rows. These attributes must meet the following
criteria:
•
The first attribute represents each day displayed in the calendar, and
must contain elements of the Date data type.
•
The second attribute provides the events displayed in the calendar, and
uses the following attribute forms:



•
The first attribute form contains a description of the event.
The second attribute form (optional) contains the image displayed for
the event when the widget is shown in Day View. This attribute form
must be of the image data type.
The third attribute form (optional) contains the image displayed for
the event when the widget is shown in Week View. This attribute form
must be of the image data type.
The third attribute (optional) provides the category name of each event in
the calendar, and is used to color-code the events. It uses the following
attribute forms:


The first attribute form contains the description of the category.
The last attribute form (optional) contains the color in which to
display the category, stored as a hex value. The value must be of the
form 0xFFFFFF or FFFFFF.
Additional attributes, if any, are displayed when a user taps on the event
in the calendar.
You can add objects from multiple datasets to the Grid/Graph containing the
widget. You must have the correct privileges and the project must allow
Grid/Graphs to use multiple datasets. For steps to allow Grid/Graphs to use
multiple datasets, see the Adding Text and Data chapter of the Document
Creation Guide.
96 Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
3
To create a Date Selection widget for mobile devices
1 In MicroStrategy Web, open the document in Design or Editable Mode.
2 From the Insert menu, point to Widgets, then Mobile, and select Date
Selection.
3 Click the location on your document where you want to place the widget.
The Grid/Graph containing the widget is displayed.
4 If desired, resize the widget by clicking and then dragging its handles.
5 From the Dataset Objects panel on the left, select attributes and drag
them on to the widget. Place at least two attributes on the Grid/Graph’s
rows, as described in the prerequisites above.
Formatting a Date Selection widget
You can format a Date Selection widget by:
•
Selecting whether events in the Month view are grouped by day or week.
For steps, see To select the grouping of events in the Month view,
page 97.
•
Automatically assigning colors to event categories. The colors are based
on the elements of the categorization attribute of the widget’s dataset. For
steps, see To automatically assign colors to event categories, page 98.
•
Specifying the color of each event category. For steps, see To assign a
specific color to each category, page 98.
Prerequisites
The following procedures assume that you have already created the Date
Selection widget you want to modify.
To select the grouping of events in the Month view
1 Open the document in Flash Mode.
2 Right-click the widget, then select iPad Properties. The iPad Date
Selection dialog box is displayed.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
97
3
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
3 From the Month view is displayed by drop-down list, select one of the
following:
•
Day: When the widget is shown in the Month view on an iPad, events
are grouped by day.
•
Week: When the widget is shown in the Month view on an iPad,
events are grouped by the week.
4 Click OK to save your changes.
To automatically assign colors to event categories
1 Open the document in Flash Mode.
2 Right-click the widget, then select iPad Properties. The iPad Date
Selection dialog box is displayed.
3 From the Color events by drop-down list, select Attribute.
4 From the Series color palettes, select the colors you want to use to
display the event categories. Each color will automatically be assigned to
a category and displayed when the widget is viewed on a mobile device.
5 Click OK to save your changes.
To assign a specific color to each category
1 Open the document in Flash Mode.
2 Right-click the widget, then select iPad Properties. The iPad Date
Selection dialog box is displayed.
3 From the Color events by drop-down list, select Attribute Form. The
events are color-coded based on the attribute form that contains the color
for each category.
4 Click OK to save your changes.
98 Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
3
Displaying data in an interactive graph: Graph Matrix widget
The Graph Matrix widget allows you to quickly analyze various trends across
several metric dimensions. The widget consists of several line graphs that
allow users to analyze and compare trends in metric data.
An example of the Graph Matrix widget is shown in the image below.
For steps to add a Graph Matrix widget to a document and specify formatting
options, see the Dashboards and Widgets Creation Guide. You can also
define an Information Window that displays when a graph is tapped. For
instructions on creating an Information Window, see Providing additional
information to users: Information Windows, page 40. You can define a link
in the widget to open a report or another document. For steps to define a link
in a widget using the Links Editor, see the Providing Flash Analysis and
Interactivity: Widgets chapter in the Dashboards and Widgets Creation
Guide.
You can also use the Graph Matrix visualization in dashboards. For
information on creating analyses, refer to the MicroStrategy Web Help.
Displaying data in a Heat Map widget
The Heat Map widget for the iPad and Android tablet displays elements as
rectangles and lets users quickly grasp the state and impact of a large
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
99
3
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
number of variables at one time. An example of the Heat Map widget on the
iPad is shown below:
For steps to add a Heat Map widget to a document and specify formatting
options, see the Dashboards and Widgets Creation Guide.
You can also use the Heat Map visualization in dashboards. For information
on creating analyses, refer to the MicroStrategy Web Help.
By default, the header for each group in a Heat Map widget is displayed in
the middle of the group. For example, in the Heat Map widget above,
Northeast is displayed in the middle of all elements that belong to Northeast.
For steps to display headers at the top of the widget, see the procedure below.
You can define an Information Window that displays when a rectangle is
tapped. For instructions on creating an Information Window, see Providing
additional information to users: Information Windows, page 40.
You can create a link on one of the attributes in the widget that opens a
report or another document. For steps to define a link in a widget using the
Links Editor, see the Providing Flash Analysis and Interactivity: Widgets
chapter in the Dashboards and Widgets Creation Guide.
100 Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
3
Displaying data as an overlay on an image: Image Layout
widget
You can add an Image Layout widget to a document to display an image
overlaid with colored areas or bubble markers. For example, you can display
a map of the United States, with a bubble marker displayed over each state.
You can have states with a high number of stores displayed using large
bubble markers, and states with a low number of stores displayed using
small bubble markers. As another example, you can display the layout of a
store in the widget, with each aisle displayed as a separate region, then have
MicroStrategy automatically color each aisle based on the number of visits
each aisle receives. The image below shows an Image Layout widget with a
map of a store, in which each section of the store is displayed as a separate
colored region.
You can display the Image Layout widget on an iPad or Android tablet with
MicroStrategy Mobile. For steps to add an Image Layout widget to a
document and specify formatting options, see the Dashboards and Widgets
Creation Guide.
A shape file is an HTML file that contains the image that you want to display
in the widget, as well as the location of each bubble marker or area you want
to display on top of the image. MicroStrategy provides several default shape
files for you to choose from, including a map of countries of the world and a
map of states in the United States.
You can define your own shape file for use in the widget, such as the layout of
a store or floor in a building, using the same steps as you would to customize
an Image Layout visualization. You can also create multiple shape files and
have the user choose which shape file displays in the widget. For steps, see
the Dashboards and Widgets Creation Guide.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
101
3
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
You can also define an Information Window that displays when a marker or
an area is tapped. For instructions on creating an Information Window, see
Providing additional information to users: Information Windows, page 40.
Displaying images: Image Viewer widget
You can use the Image Viewer widget to display images and image
description in a document on an iPhone, iPad, or Android device with
MicroStrategy Mobile. Users can zoom in and out of the images.
For iPhone and iPad, you can choose to display the images in a slide show,
filmstrip, or matrix layout, specify the captions to display for each image,
format the background and border color of the widget, and so on.
You can define:
•
An Information Window that displays when an image is tapped. For
instructions on creating an Information Window, see Providing
additional information to users: Information Windows, page 40.
•
A link in the widget to open a report or another document. For steps to
define a link in a widget using the Links Editor, see the Providing Flash
Analysis and Interactivity: Widgets chapter in the Dashboards and
Widgets Creation Guide.
Prerequisites
•
You must create an attribute to place on the widget’s Grid/Graph, with
the following attribute forms:



The first attribute form contains the location in which each image is
saved.
The second attribute form contains a description of each image.
The third attribute form contains the unique numeric ID of each
image.
To add an Image Viewer widget to a document
1 Open the document in Design or Editable Mode.
2 From the Insert menu, point to Widgets, then point to Mobile, and select
Image Viewer.
102 Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
3
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
3 Click the location on your document where you want to place the widget.
The Grid/Graph containing the widget is displayed.
4 If desired, resize the widget by clicking and then dragging its handles.
5 From the Dataset Objects panel on the left, select attributes and metrics,
and drag them on to the Grid/Graph, as described in the prerequisites
above.
choose the attribute forms displayed for an attribute in the widget,
 Toright-click
the header of the attribute, point to Attribute Forms, then
select the attribute forms to display.
Configure the widget’s display properties
6 Right-click the widget, then select Properties and Formatting. The
Properties and Formatting dialog box opens.
7 From the left, select Widget.
8 Click the Widget Properties icon. The Image Viewer Properties dialog
box opens.
9 From the Display Style drop-down list, select the display style to use to
show images in the widget, as follows:
•
To display the images in an interactive slideshow, select Slideshow
(default). Users can switch between images by performing a
horizontal swipe motion on the mobile device.
•
To display the images in a filmstrip layout, select Filmstrip. Users can
scroll through images vertically or horizontally, as determined by the
Scroll Direction option described below.
•
To display the images in a table layout, with evenly spaced rows and
columns, select Matrix. You can specify the number of rows and
columns displayed in the table using the Number of Rows and
Number of Columns options described below.
10 You can determine whether to display images in the widget in a vertical or
horizontal layout. This option is only available if the Display Style option
is set to Filmstrip. From the Scroll Direction drop-down list, select one
of the following:
•
To display images in a vertical layout, select Vertical (default). Users
can perform a vertical swipe motion on the mobile device to scroll
through the images.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
103
3
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
•
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
To display images in a horizontal layout, select Horizontal. Users can
perform a horizontal swipe motion on the mobile device to scroll
through the images.
11 You can determine how many rows of images are displayed in the widget.
In the Number of Rows field, type the number of rows to display. This
option is only available if the Display Style option is set to Matrix.
12 You can determine how many columns of images are displayed in the
widget. In the Number of Columns field, type the number of columns to
display. This option is only available if the Display Style option is set to
Matrix.
13 From the First Caption Line drop-down list, select the attribute form
that contains the first line of captions you want to display for images in
the widget.
14 From the Second Caption Line drop-down list, select the attribute form
that contains the second line of captions you want to display for images in
the widget.
15 You can specify the default action (such as drilling on an attribute or
opening a report or document) to perform when the user taps an image
caption in the widget. From the Default Action Form drop-down list,
select an attribute form. The action defined for this attribute form will
automatically be performed when the user taps the caption.
16 From the Background Color palette, select the background color of the
widget by doing one of the following:
•
To display a transparent background color, click No Fill.
•
To display a solid background color, select the background color from
the palette. You can access additional colors by clicking More Colors.
17 From the Border Color palette, select the color of the border to display
around the images in the widget by doing one of the following:
•
To display the borders as transparent, click No Fill.
•
To display a solid border color, select the border color from the
palette. You can access additional colors by clicking More Colors.
18 From the Border Width drop-down list, select the thickness of the border
to display around the images. The default value is 5 pixels.
19 Click OK to return to the Properties and Formatting dialog box.
104 Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
3
20 Click OK to save the changes.
Displaying data in rows and columns: Interactive Grid widget
The Interactive Grid widget allows you to display data in a compact tabular
layout on an iPhone, iPad, or Android device that has MicroStrategy Mobile
downloaded. Attributes and metric values are displayed in columns in the
widget, as shown below. You can specify multiple display options for the
widget, such as whether to apply banding to the rows in the widget, whether
to display multiple attributes or metrics in a column as stacked together in a
single row or allow users to toggle between the values displayed in the
column, and so on.
You can allow users to directly edit the data displayed in the widget using a
mobile device. For example, you create a widget to display a list of time off
requests. A user can tap a button next to each request to display a check mark
for approved requests and an X for rejected requests, then submit their
changes to their data source. To accomplish this, you must link the widget's
Grid/Graph to a Transaction Services report. For steps and background
information about Transaction Services, see the Advanced Documents
chapter in the Report Services Document Creation Guide.
You can allow users to perform an action when they tap an attribute or
metric in the widget on a mobile device. To do this, you must assign the
action to the attribute or metric on the widget's Grid/Graph in Web. For
example, if several customer regions are displayed in an Interactive Grid
widget, you can allow users to tap the name of a customer region to update
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
105
3
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
the data displayed in another grid in the document. Only one action can be
performed for each attribute or metric. If more than one action is enabled for
an attribute or metric, the action with the highest priority is performed. You
can enable the following actions for a value in the widget, in order of highest
to lowest priority:
•
Edit data for the attribute or metric, by displaying the attribute or metric
as an input object control in a Transaction Services-enabled document.
For steps and background information about Transaction Services, see
the Advanced Documents chapter in the Report Services Document
Creation Guide.
•
Use an attribute or metric in the widget as a selector. To do this, you must
define the attribute or metric as a selector on the widget's Grid/Graph.
For steps, see the MicroStrategy Web Help.
•
Open a link to a report or document. For steps to define a link in a widget
using the Links Editor, see the Providing Flash Analysis and
Interactivity: Widgets chapter in the Dashboards and Widgets Creation
Guide.
•
Drill on an attribute element. For steps to enable drilling in a Grid/
Graph, see the Displaying Reports in Documents: Grid/Graphs chapter
in the Report Services Document Creation Guide.
The steps to add an Interactive Grid widget to a document follow.
Prerequisites
For a Grid/Graph to be used as an Interactive Grid widget, it must meet the
following requirements:
•
At least one attribute on the rows. The elements of this attribute are
displayed in the first column of the widget.
•
At least one metric on the columns. The metric values are displayed in
additional columns in the widget.
You can add objects from multiple datasets to the Grid/Graph containing the
widget. You must have the correct privileges and the project must allow
Grid/Graphs to use multiple datasets. For steps to allow Grid/Graphs to use
multiple datasets, see the Adding Text and Data chapter of the Document
Creation Guide.
106 Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
3
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
To create and add an Interactive Grid widget to a document
1 Open the document in Design or Editable Mode.
2 From the Insert menu, point to Widgets, then Mobile, and select
Interactive Grid.
3 Click the location on your document where you want to place the widget.
The Grid/Graph containing the widget is displayed.
4 If desired, resize the widget by clicking and then dragging its handles.
5 From the Dataset Objects panel on the left, select attributes and metrics,
and drag them on to the Grid/Graph, as described in the prerequisites
above.
Configure the widget’s display properties
6 Right-click the widget, then select Properties and Formatting. The
Properties and Formatting dialog box opens.
7 From the left, select Widget.
8 Click the Widget Properties icon
dialog box opens.
. The Interactive Grid Properties
9 If you added more than one attribute to the widget, you can group the
data displayed in the widget based on the first attribute in the widget’s
Grid/Graph. Do one of the following:
•
To group the data displayed in the widget, do the following:
a Select the Apply Grouping to check box. The first attribute on the
widget’s Grid/Graph is automatically used to group the data when
the widget is viewed.
b On iPhones, you can change the background color used for the
attribute elements in the grouping. From the Grouping
background drop-down list, select the color you want to use as
the background for the attribute elements. In the example image
above, Grouping background is set to gray.
To remove the grouping background you applied, select No Fill.
c
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
On iPhones, you can change the font size used for the attribute
elements in the grouping. From the Grouping font size
Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
107
3
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
drop-down list, select the size of the font you want to use. In the
example image above, Grouping font size is set to 16.
•
To display the widget without grouping its data, clear the Apply
grouping to check box.
10 From the Color Theme drop-down list, select a color theme to use to
display the background color, border color, and header color of the
widget.
11 By default, the rows of the widget are not banded. To apply banding to the
widget, select the Banding check box.
12 By default, the width of the columns in the widget is automatically
determined. To manually specify the width of each column, clear the
Automatic column sizing check box. In the Width (%) fields, specify the
width of each column as a percentage. The widths for all columns should
add up to 100.
13 You can select a default action (such as drilling on an attribute, opening a
report or document, or acting as a selector) to perform for attributes and
metrics that have no action defined on the widget’s Grid/Graph. From the
Default Action Form drop-down list, select an attribute. The action
defined for this attribute will automatically be performed when a user
taps a value in the widget for which no action is explicitly defined.
that you assign an action to only one attribute
 Itformis recommended
in the widget. For example, if you want one attribute to act as
a selector, ensure that drilling is disabled for the Grid/Graph, and
that the attribute does not link to another report or document.
14 If you place multiple attributes or metrics in a column, you can choose
whether to display each attribute element or metric value stacked
together in a single row in the widget, or to allow the user to tap the
header of a column to change which attribute or metric value is displayed.
Do one of the following:
•
To allow users to tap a column header to change which object is
displayed, select the Toggle check box.
•
To display each object as stacked values in a single row, clear the
Toggle check box. Column headers are not displayed when values are
displayed as stacked.
15 You can create, rearrange, or delete columns in the widget:
108 Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
3
•
To rearrange report objects within the columns, click a report object
and drag it to a new location.
•
To add a new column to the widget, click Add Column. The new
column is added and displayed.
•
To delete a column, click
to the right of the column.
first two columns in the widget are added to the widget by
 The
default and cannot be deleted.
16 Click OK to return to the Properties and Formatting dialog box.
17 Click OK to save the changes.
Displaying geographical data: Map widget
With a Map widget, users can search and view information for locations on a
map on an iPhone, iPad, or Android device. You can specify the geographical
location of each location on the map by either supplying the location as a
spatial point, or by providing separate values for the longitude and latitude.
Locations on the map are displayed as map markers, bubble markers,
color-coded areas, or points along a path displayed on the map. Tapping a
location displays an Information Window with additional details about the
selected location, as shown below:
You can display data in the Map widget in the following ways:
•
Display your data using static images as map markers. You can define a
threshold on this metric to change the image used for the map markers.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
109
3
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
For information on defining thresholds on a metric, see the
MicroStrategy Web Help.
•
Display your data using bubble markers. The size of each bubble marker
is automatically determined based on the value of the metric on the
columns of the widget. You can define a threshold on this metric to
change the color of the bubble markers. For information on defining
thresholds on a metric, see the MicroStrategy Web Help.
•
For iPhone and iPad documents, display your data as areas color-coded
based on the population density of locations on the map. For example,
you can display areas with a high concentration of stores in red, and areas
with a low concentration of stores in blue.
•
Display your data as points on a path displayed on the map. The line used
to represent the path is displayed as thicker for larger metric values and
thinner for smaller metric values. For example, you can display ridership
at different stops along a train route, with the most popular stations
displayed with the thickest lines extending from the station.
•
For iPhone and iPad documents, color-code geographical regions, based
on your data. For example, you can give each country displayed on a map
a different color, based on their type of government. MicroStrategy
provides maps with pre-defined regions, such as countries of the world or
states in the US.
•
Create and format a custom Information Window, which is a pop-up
window that displays additional data, for the Map widget. For steps to
define an Information Window, see Providing additional information to
users: Information Windows, page 40.
•
Filter the locations displayed on a Map widget to view only those
locations that meet certain criteria. For example, if store locations are
displayed on the widget, you can limit the displayed stores to only those
within a specified zip code. For more information on filtering by
110 Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
3
geographical location, see Using the Geo Location prompt in the Map
widget, page 120.
•
For iPhone and iPad documents, once you create a Map widget, you can
display lines that show relationships between locations on the map. For
steps to use lines for relationships, see Using lines to display
relationships between locations in a Map widget, page 124.
To display your data in the Map widget, you must provide geographical
information for each location in the map using attributes or attribute forms.
You can provide this data in the following ways:
•
During the import data process, you can define an attribute and assign it
a geo role to identify what type of geographical information it contains.
For example, you can create an attribute called City, which contains the
names of multiple cities, then assign it the City geo role. Web
automatically creates the City attribute with the attribute forms Latitude
and Longitude, which contain the latitude and longitude of each city. You
can then use the City attribute to provide latitude and longitude
information for locations in the widget. Web automatically adds latitude
and longitude information as attribute forms to data columns with the
Country, State, Zip Code, City, or Location geo roles. You can also use
attributes that have been assigned the Latitude or Longitude geo roles to
provide geographical information as attributes, as described in the
prerequisites below. For background information on importing data into
MicroStrategy Web, including steps to assign a geo role to an attribute,
see the MicroStrategy Web Help. For steps to assign a geo role to an
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
111
3
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
attribute in Developer, see the Developer Help (formerly the
MicroStrategy Desktop Help).
•
Your administrator can create attributes containing location data to
support the Map widget. Steps to create location data are included in the
Warehouse Structure for Your Logical Data Model chapter in the Project
Design Guide.
Creating a Map widget
Prerequisites
The Grid/Graph for the Map widget must meet the following requirements:
•
Place the attribute or attributes containing the geographical information
on the rows. The attributes must provide this information in one of three
ways:

If you want to display geographical regions on the map, you must
provide an attribute whose values match the names of regions in a
map provided by MicroStrategy. You select the map you want to use in
the steps below.
For example, MicroStrategy provides a map called Countries of the
World. To display a map that contains a colored area for each country
in which your company has sales representatives, you can create an
attribute called Country, which contains the names of these countries,
then use the Country attribute to provide location information in a
widget that uses the Countries of the World map.

To provide the geographical information using attributes, you must
provide one of the following:
– One attribute that contains the latitude of each location and one
attribute that contains the longitude of each location. For example,
you can provide an attribute that has been assigned the Latitude
geo role and an attribute that has been assigned the Longitude geo
role.
– One attribute that provides geographical information for each
location as a point.

To provide the geographical information using attribute forms, you
must provide one of the following:
– One attribute, which provides the latitude and longitude of each
location using separate attribute forms. For example, you can
112 Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
3
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
provide an attribute that has been assigned the Country, State, Zip
Code, City, or Location geo roles.
– One attribute that provides geographical information for each
location as a point, using a single attribute form.
you are using attribute forms, be sure that the attribute
 Ifforms
containing the geographical information are visible in
the grid. Right-click the header of the attribute, point to
Attribute Forms, then select the attribute forms you want to
display.
•
Place at least one metric on the columns. You can define a threshold on
this metric to change the display of markers on the map. For more
information on thresholds, see the MicroStrategy Web Help.
You can add objects from multiple datasets to the Grid/Graph containing the
widget. You must have the correct privileges and the project must allow
Grid/Graphs to use multiple datasets. For steps to allow Grid/Graphs to use
multiple datasets, see the Adding Text and Data chapter of the Document
Creation Guide.
To create and add a Map widget to a document for mobile devices
1 In MicroStrategy Web, open the document in Design or Editable Mode.
2 From the Insert menu, point to Widgets, then Mobile, and select Map.
3 Click the location on your document where you want to place the widget.
The Grid/Graph containing the widget is displayed.
4 If desired, resize the widget by clicking and then dragging its handles.
5 From the Dataset Objects panel on the left, select attributes and metrics,
and drag them on to the Grid/Graph, as described in the prerequisites
above.
Configure the widget’s display properties
6 Right-click the widget, then select Properties and Formatting. The
Properties and Formatting dialog box opens.
7 From the left, select Widget.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
113
3
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
8 On the right, ensure that the check boxes for the mobile devices you are
designing for are enabled, as applicable.
9 Click the Widget Properties icon
opens.
. The Map Properties dialog box
10 You can replace map markers with static images, bubble markers,
color-coded areas based on the population density of locations on the
map, or geographical regions. Do one of the following:
•
To use map markers to mark locations on the map, select the Use
Image Markers option. From the drop-down list, select the marker
image to use to display locations on the map. A preview of the selected
marker style is displayed to the right of the drop-down list.
•
To use bubble markers to mark locations on the map, select the Use
Bubble Markers option. The size of each bubble marker is
automatically determined based on the value of the metric on the
columns of the widget.
•
To use shades of color to indicate the concentration of locations on the
map, select the Use Density Maps option. From the drop-down list,
select the color theme to use to automatically color areas on the map.
A preview of the selected color theme is displayed to the right of the
drop-down list.
•
To display locations on the map as points on a path, select the Use as
a Path on the Map option. From the drop-down list, select the color
of the line to use to display the map path.
•
To display geographical regions on the map, select the Show Areas
option. From the drop-down list, select the regions you want to use in
the map.
11 You can determine how to size bubble markers representing negative
metric values. From the Negative Values are Represented As
drop-down list, select one of the following:
•
To use the absolute value of the metric to size the bubble marker,
select Absolute Numbers. For example, a bubble representing a
metric value of -2,500 will be displayed as the same size as a bubble
representing 2,500.
•
To display bubble markers representing negative metric values as
bubbles with a size of 7 pixels, select Bubbles Sized at 7 Pixels.
114 Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
3
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
12 You can determine whether or not to apply threshold formatting to image
markers or bubble markers in the widget. Do one of the following:
•
To enable threshold display, select the Apply threshold for the map
check box.
•
To disable threshold display, clear the Apply threshold for the map
check box.
13 You can choose to provide geographical information for the widget using
attributes or attribute forms. From the Use Attribute or Form
drop-down list, select one of the following:
•
To provide geographical information using attributes, select Use
Attribute.
•
To provide geographical information using attribute forms, select Use
Attribute Form.
14 You can determine whether to provide geographical information to the
widget as a point, or as separate latitude and longitude values. Do one of
the following:
•
To define the location as a point:



•
From the Select Data Type drop-down list, select the Point
option.
If the Use Attribute or Form drop-down list is set to Use
Attribute Form, from the Select Attribute drop-down list, select
the attribute that contains the attribute form you want to use to
display the widget.
From the Select Point drop-down list, select the attribute or
attribute form that contains the point information.
To define the location as a latitude and longitude:



© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
From the Select Data Type drop-down list, select the Latitude/
Longitude option.
If the Use Attribute or Form drop-down list is set to Use Attribute
Form, from the Select Attribute drop-down list, select the
attribute that contains the attribute forms you want to use to
display the widget.
From the Select Latitude drop-down list, select the attribute or
attribute form that contains the latitude information.
Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
115
3
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets

Mobile Design and Administration Guide
From the Select Longitude drop-down list, select the attribute or
attribute form that contains the longitude information.
15 From the Selection Display Attribute/Form drop-down list, select the
attribute to use to display data in the Information Window when the user
selects locations in the widget.
16 By default, if multiple locations in the widget have the same latitude and
longitude—for example, two stores located in the same building—a
separate map marker is displayed for each location. If you are designing
this widget to be displayed on an iPhone or iPad, you can choose to
display a separate map marker for each store, or display a single map
marker for all of the stores at that location. Do one of the following:
•
To display a single map marker, select the For repeated rows,
display only one marker for same location check box. When the
user taps the map marker on the document, information for each
location at the selected latitude and longitude is displayed. If map
markers in the widget are displayed as bubble markers and a group of
locations are located at the same latitude and longitude, the bubble
marker for this group is sized and colored based on the last location in
the group, as displayed in the widget. If subtotals are displayed in the
widget, the subtotal for the group is used to size and color the bubble
marker.
•
To display a separate map marker for each location, clear the For
repeated rows, display only one marker for same location check
box.
17 On a mobile device, tapping a map marker on the map displays additional
information about the location in an Information Window.
You can define a layout in the document to use as a custom Information
Window, and format its appearance. Select the Display Information
Window from document layout check box. For instructions to configure
the layout to use as the Information Window, see To specify a layout as
an Information Window in a Map widget, page 119.
you are designing the document for both iOS and Android
 Ifdevices,
it is recommended that you use a panel stack as the
Information Window. For detailed steps to define panel stacks as
Information Windows, see Providing additional information to
users: Information Windows, page 40.
•
From the Select Layout to use drop-down list, select the name of the
layout to use as the Information Window.
116 Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
3
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
18 You can specify the display theme to use to display the widget. For
example, you can display the map as a satellite image, a map with
topographical details, and so on. From the Default View drop-down list,
select a display theme.
19 You can specify the type of magnification to apply to the map when the
user selects a location in the widget. From the Redraw Behavior on
Selector Action drop-down list, select one of the following:
•
To maintain the widget's current level of magnification, select Keep
the Current Zoom.
•
To refit the contents of the widget to the selected area, select Refit the
Content.
20 You can let users select areas, zoom in and out of the widget, and so on
using the map toolbar. Under Map Elements Visibility Options, choose
from the following:
•
To display the map toolbar at the top of the widget, select the Map
toolbar check box. This option is selected by default.
•
To allow the user to select which display theme to use to display the
map, select the Map view options check box. This option is selected
by default.
•
To display a slider that allows the user to zoom in and out of the map,
select the Zoom bar (Web only) check box. This option is selected by
default.
•
To allow the user to view a list of the areas he has selected in the
widget, select the Selection list bucket (Mobile only) check box. This
option is selected by default.
Complete the widget
plus sign (+) at the top of the interface allows you to add
 The
additional datasets to the Map widget for display in MicroStrategy
Web. For steps to add additional datasets for Web, see the GIS
Integration Help.
21 Click OK to return to the Properties and Formatting dialog box.
22 Click OK again to save changes.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
117
3
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Using a layout as an Information Window in a Map widget
When a user taps a map marker in a Map widget on an iPhone, iPad, or
Android device, a pop-up window is displayed. This Information Window
provides additional details about the location, such as the location name and
related metric values, as shown below:
Information Windows are automatically displayed for all markers, using a
default layout and format. You can create and format a custom Information
Window to display for a Map widget. To define a custom Information
Window, you create a document layout, using either Developer or Web. You
then enable the layout to be displayed as an Information Window and specify
the layout as the Information Window in the Map widget’s properties.
Layouts enabled as an Information Window are not displayed with the other
layouts in a document and are only displayed on mobile devices.
If you define an Information Window in a separate document, you can reuse
the Information Window layout by importing it into other documents. For
instructions on importing layouts, see the Report Services Document
Creation Guide.
Prerequisite
This procedure assumes you have already added a Map widget to the
document. For instructions, see To create and add a Map widget to a
document for mobile devices, page 113.
118 Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
3
To specify a layout as an Information Window in a Map widget
1 In MicroStrategy Web, open the document that contains the Map widget
in Design Mode.
Create the layout to use as the Information Window
2 From the Insert menu, select Layout. The Insert Layout dialog box
opens.
3 Do one of the following to define a style for the new layout:
•
To define a layout style, click the Layout tab, then select a layout style.
•
To import a layout from a saved document, click the Document tab,
then select a previously saved document.
4 Click OK. The new layout is displayed.
Add content to the layout
5 The content that you add to this layout is displayed in the Information
Window. You can add any controls to the layout, including text fields,
Grid/Graphs, images, shapes, and so on. For instructions, about
designing documents, see the Report Services Document Creation Guide.
container that displays the Information Window on the
 The
iPhone is 1.5 inches wide. Its height is defined to fit to the content,
with a maximum height of 1 inch.
Enable the layout to be displayed as an Information Window
6 From the Tools menu, select Document Properties. The Properties
dialog box opens.
7 From the Layout Properties section on the left, select Mobile.
8 Select the Use as Information Window check box.
9 Click OK. The layout is enabled as an Information Window.
Specify the Information Window layout to be displayed in the Map widget's
properties
10 Select the tab of the layout that contains the Map widget, then right-click
the widget.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
119
3
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
11 Select Properties and Formatting. The Properties and Formatting
dialog box opens.
12 From the left, select Widget.
13 Click the Widget Properties icon
opens.
. The Map Properties dialog box
14 Select the Display Information Window from document layout check
box.
15 From the Select Layout to use drop-down list, select the name of the
layout to use as the Information Window.
16 Click OK to apply the changes.
17 Click OK to return to the document.
Using the Geo Location prompt in the Map widget
The Geo Location prompt lets users answer a prompt by using the device’s
current geographical location. In a Map widget, a Geo Location prompt is
typically used to filter data in the widget. For example, you can choose to
display only those map markers that are in your current state.
cannot add a prompt directly to a document; you must define the
 You
prompt on the dataset reports used for the document. For more
information on using prompts in documents, see the Report Services
Document Creation Guide.
You can create the Geo Location prompt to do the following:
•
To automatically use the device’s current longitude and latitude to filter
the widget’s results, define value prompts with the display style set to Geo
Location. You must define two value prompts, one for latitude and one
for longitude. The prompts are then automatically answered and do not
display in the interface.
•
To filter an attribute element list using the current geographical location,
you can define an attribute element prompt with the display style set to
Geo Location.
Geo Location prompts are defined in MicroStrategy Web. For instructions,
see Prompting users for their location: Geo Location prompts, page 74.
120 Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
3
Filtering data based on geographical distance from a mobile
device
You can filter data in a report to display information based on the distance
between a location on the report, and the current location of an iPhone, iPad,
or Android device. For example, in the image below, a report displays a list of
stores.
When the report is viewed on a mobile device, the user can choose to display
only stores within a ten mile radius, as shown in the image below.
If the report is displayed as a Map widget, only map markers for stores
within a ten mile radius are displayed, as shown below.
To filter data based on the distance from a point of interest to a mobile
device, you must first create a metric to calculate this distance. The steps to
create this metric are described below.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
121
3
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Once you have created the distance calculation metric, you can use it to filter
data by creating a prompt or filter using the metric. For example, you can:
•
Create a prompt to allow users to display only data for locations within a
specified radius of the mobile device.
•
Create a filter to automatically display data only for locations greater than
a certain distance from the mobile device.
•
In a Map widget, display map markers only for locations within a
specified radius.
Prerequisite
•
You must create an attribute with attribute forms containing the latitude
and longitude of each location to use for the distance calculation. For
example, the Store attribute in the example above has two attribute
forms, Latitude and Longitude, which contain the latitude and longitude
information for each store.
•
You must create two Geo Location prompts, one each for the latitude and
longitude. The prompts must be created as value prompts, as described in
Allowing users to filter data based on a single value: Value prompts,
page 66.
To create a metric to calculate the distance between locations and a mobile
device
1 In Developer, from the File menu, point to New, and then Metric. The
New Metric dialog box opens.
2 Click OK to create a new metric. The Metric Editor opens.
3 In the Definition pane, type the formula of the metric you want to create.
Use the syntax in the table following this procedure for the metric’s
definition.
4 Click Save and Close. The Save As dialog box opens.
5 In the Object name field, type the name of the new metric. Use the name
provided in the table below.
6 Navigate to the location in which you want to save the new metric, then
click Save. The new metric is created.
122 Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
3
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
7 Repeat the appropriate steps above to create each of the metrics required
to calculate the distance to each store.
8 Once you have created the distance calculation metric, Point_Distance,
you can create any of the following prompts to use the metric:
•
A Metric Qualification prompt. You can add the prompt to a report to
let users specify a distance radius for which to display data. For
information on creating Metric Qualification prompts, see the
MicroStrategy Web Help.
•
A Metric Set Qualification filter. You can add the filter to a report or to
a dataset report in a document, to automatically filter the data using
the current location of the mobile device.
•
A prompt or filter that will use the metric, added to a report displayed
as a Map widget, or to the dataset report of a Map widget in a
document. When the Map widget is displayed on a mobile device, only
the map markers for locations within the specified distance from the
mobile device are displayed.
Metric Name
Metric Definition
Location_Lat
Max([email protected])
Replace AttributeName with the name of the location attribute, and
replace LatitudeFormName with the attribute form that contains the
latitude information for each location. For example, for an attribute named
Store with the attribute forms Latitude and Longitude, create a metric with the
name Location_Lat, with the definition Max([email protected]).
Location_Long
Max([email protected])
Replace AttributeName with the name of the location attribute, and
replace LongitudeFormName with the attribute form that contains the
longitude information for each location. For example, for an attribute named
Store with the attribute forms Latitude and Longitude, create a metric with the
name Location_Long, with the definition
Max([email protected]).
DeltaLat/2
(Radians(([Location_Lat] - ?LatitudePromptName))
/ 2)
Replace LatitudePromptName with the name of the value prompt for
latitude. For example, if the value prompt is named Latitude, the definition
is (Radians(([Location_Lat] - ?Latitude)) / 2).
DeltaLong/2
(Radians (([Location_Long] ?LongitudePromptName))/2)
Replace LongitudePromptName with the name of the value prompt for
longitude. For example, if the value prompt is named Longitude, the
definition is (Radians(([Location_Long] - ?Longitude))
/ 2).
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
123
3
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Metric Name
Metric Definition
A
((Sin([DeltaLat/2]) * Sin([DeltaLat/2])) +
(((Cos(Radians(?Latitude)) *
Cos(Radians([Location_Lat]))) * Sin([DeltaLong/
2])) * Sin([DeltaLong/2])))
C
(2 * [Atan2](Sqrt((1-A)), Sqrt(A)))
Point_Distance
(3959 * C)
Note: This value is based on the radius of the Earth, 3,959 miles or 6,371 km.
To calculate the distance between the stores and the mobile device using a
different unit of distance, replace 3959 with the radius of the Earth in the units
you want to use to measure distance. For example, to calculate distance in
kilometers, the metric definition is (6371 * C).
Using lines to display relationships between locations in a
Map widget
Once you create a Map widget for an iPhone or iPad, you can show
relationships between locations on the map when the widget is displayed on
the device. To do this, you display lines between the map markers. You can
choose to display these lines using different thicknesses or colors depending
on the relationship between locations.
Prerequisites
•
The procedure assumes that you have created a Map widget. For more
information on the requirements for this widget, see Creating a Map
widget, page 112.
•
If you provided the location of each map marker in the Map widget using
attribute forms, the Latitude, Longitude, and ID attribute forms of the
location attribute should be displayed in the Map widget.
•
If you provided the location of each map marker in the Map widget using
attributes, you must include the lookup attribute on the Map widget.
•
You must create a Grid/Graph that is used to display lines in the widget.
This Grid/Graph includes the metrics used to determine the color and
thickness of lines between map markers, and attributes containing the
IDs of the starting and ending locations of each line. The IDs provided
must correspond to the IDs used to identify map marker locations in the
Map widget. The steps to create this Grid/Graph are below.
124 Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
3
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
To display lines between map markers in a Map widget
1 Open the document in Design or Editable Mode.
To create the Grid/Graph for the relationships
2 From the Insert menu, select Grid/Graph.
3 Click the location on your document in which you want to place the Grid/
Graph. This Grid/Graph will not be visible when the widget is displayed
on the device, and should be in the same document section as the Map
widget.
4 From the Dataset Objects panel on the left, select attributes and metrics,
and drag them on top of the Grid/Graph, as described below:
•
You must place two attributes on the rows of the Grid/Graph, which
must provide the IDs of the starting and ending locations of each line
in the widget. The IDs provided must correspond to the ID forms in
the attribute used to identify map marker locations in the Map widget.
Place the attributes as follows:


•
The first attribute is the lookup attribute for the widget. It must
contain a single attribute form containing the ID of the starting
location for each line.
The second attribute must be a single attribute form containing
the ID of the ending location for each line.
Place at least one metric on the Grid/Graph’s columns:

The first metric automatically determines the thickness of each
line displayed in the widget, with thick lines representing large
metric values. For example, if airports are displayed in the Map
widget, and the lines represent flights between each airport, you
can add the Passenger Count metric to the Grid/Graph. When the
widget is displayed on a mobile device, the flights with the most
passengers are displayed with thick lines, while flights with less
passengers are displayed with thin lines.
display each line using the same thickness, you can provide
 Toa metric
with a constant value.

© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
The second metric is used to determine the color of each line in the
widget. By default, each line in the widget is displayed using the
default color. You can override the default color by defining a
Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
125
3
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
threshold to change the font color of the metric values that meet
the threshold condition. For information on creating thresholds,
refer to the MicroStrategy Web Help.
only one metric is placed on the columns, all lines will
 Ifdisplay
using the default color.
5 The ID attribute form of each attribute must be displayed in the Grid/
Graph you just created. If they are not displayed, for each attribute,
right-click the header of the attribute, point to Attribute Forms, then
select the attribute forms you want to display.
6 If you provided the location of each map marker in the Map widget using
attributes, you must include the lookup attribute on the Grid/Graph that
you just created to display lines between the map markers. Place the
lookup attribute on the rows of the Grid/Graph, directly before or directly
after the attributes providing the latitude and longitude of each map
marker.
To enable the line display
7 Right-click the Map widget, then select Properties and Formatting. The
Properties and Formatting dialog box opens.
8 From the left, click Advanced.
9 Clear the Enable incremental fetch on grid check box, and click Apply.
10 From the left, select Widget.
11 Click the Widget Properties icon
opens.
. The Map Properties dialog box
12 To enable the display of lines, select the Display Affinity Lines/Arcs
check box.
13 If the Use Attribute or Form option is set to Use Attribute, from the
Select Lookup Attribute drop-down list, select the lookup attribute.
14 From the Select Affinity Data drop-down list, select the Grid/Graph that
you created above.
15 From the Draw Arcs/Lines drop-down list, select Arcs to display curved
lines or Lines to display straight lines.
126 Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
3
16 From the Max Line Thickness drop-down list, select the maximum
thickness that can be used to display lines in the widget. The thickness of
each line is automatically determined based on the value of the first
metric on the new Grid/Graph’s rows. The default value is 5.
17 Click OK to return to the Properties and Formatting dialog box.
18 Click OK to save changes and return to the document.
Visualizing trends: Microcharts widget
The Microcharts widget for iOS and Android devices lets users visualize
trends in a metric at a quick glance. Depending on the number of metrics
used in the underlying report, the Microcharts widget can display one, two,
or three microcharts. For example, bar and sparkline microcharts convey
trends in a metric, and bullet microcharts compare a metric’s actual value to
its targets. An example of a Microcharts widget is shown below:
The Microcharts widget can be used in the following modes:
•
Grid mode: This is the default setting. In this mode, all attributes except
the last one from the left are grouped and displayed as rows in the widget.


You can display Grid mode in Tree mode, which groups the rows in
the widget logically. Users can collapse and expand the rows as
needed to see more detailed data. You must enable Tree mode for
users to access it; steps are provided in the Dashboards and Widgets
Creation Guide.
If the widget is displayed on an iPhone or iPad, users can sort the
widget based on a column in the widget. Users can sort the widget
based on:
– Attribute elements or metric values
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
127
3
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
– Elements in a consolidation
– Attribute elements or metric values with thresholds applied
If your widget contains subtotals, you can control where the subtotals
are displayed when the widget is sorted. Edit the subtotals to display
at the top or bottom of each group. For steps, see the Document
Creation Guide.
•
KPI List mode: In this mode, key performance indicators (KPIs), such as
Profit, Revenue, and so on, are displayed in a list. Each KPI is represented
by its own row of microcharts.
mode and Vertical Scroll mode are not available for mobile
 Ticker
devices.
You can also define Information Windows that display when the widget is
tapped. For instructions on creating an Information Window, see Providing
additional information to users: Information Windows, page 40.
Creating a Microcharts widget
Prerequisites
In a document, create a Grid/Graph that meets the following minimum
requirements:
•
For a Microchart widget in Grid mode, the report must have at least two
attributes in the rows. The last attribute from the left is used as the X-axis
for the bar graph and sparkline microchart.
•
For a Microchart widget in KPI List mode, the report must have only one
attribute in the rows.
•
At least two metrics in the columns. The first metric from the left
determines the height of the bars for the bar microchart, and the peaks of
the sparkline microchart. The second metric displays a horizontal
reference line for both microcharts.
steps to create a Microcharts widget, and for more information
 For
on creating Grid/Graphs that meet the data requirements for the
Microcharts widget, as well as variations of the widget based on
the number of metrics used, see the Dashboards and Widgets
Creation Guide.
128 Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
3
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
You can add objects from multiple datasets to the Grid/Graph containing the
widget. You must have the correct privileges and the project must allow
Grid/Graphs to use multiple datasets. For steps to allow Grid/Graphs to use
multiple datasets, see the Adding Text and Data chapter of the Document
Creation Guide.
Displaying the Microcharts widget in KPI List mode
By default, if the Grid/Graph has only one attribute row, the Microcharts
widget displays in KPI List mode. To configure other properties of the
widget, you must run the document in Flash Mode in MicroStrategy Web,
and then change the properties, as described in the steps below.
You must determine how many of the metrics to use for each KPI. For
example, if you specify three metrics for each KPI, the first three metrics
from the left are used for the first KPI, the next three for the second, and so
on.
To display the Microcharts widget in KPI List mode
1 In MicroStrategy Web, navigate to the document where you have defined
the Microcharts widget, and open it in Flash Mode. The document should
open with the Microcharts widget displayed.
2 Right-click the Microcharts widget, and select Properties. The
Microcharts properties dialog box opens.
3 From the drop-down list at the top left, choose Mode. If your widget has a
single attribute row, the KPI List Mode check box is enabled by default.
the widget contains more than one attribute, the KPI List Mode
 Ifcheck
box is disabled.
4 In the Metrics per KPI field, type the number of metrics to use for each
KPI.
5 Click OK.
6 Click Save to save the document.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
129
3
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Enabling Smooth Scroll mode
You can enable Smooth Scroll mode to ensure that the metric columns
displayed in the widget on an iPad or Android with MicroStrategy Mobile
have enough space.
In Smooth Scroll mode, if there is enough space on the mobile device to
display all the attribute columns in the widget plus at least one metric, the
attribute columns are allowed to take up as much space as they require. If
space is limited, however, priority is given to displaying the metrics in the
widget, and attributes are displayed in the remaining space. Users can
perform a horizontal swipe gesture to view the metric columns that cannot fit
on a single page.
To enable Smooth Scroll mode for a Microcharts widget
1 In Flash Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties. The
Microcharts dialog box opens.
2 From the drop-down list, select Mode.
3 Select the Enable Smooth Scroll Mode for Metrics (Mobile Only) check
box.
4 From the Metric Column Spacing drop-down list, determine how to size
and display columns in the widget by selecting one of the following:
•
To display columns as more compact in width, select Compact.
•
To display columns using the default width, select Normal.
•
To display columns as wider than the default, select Large.
5 Click OK to apply your changes.
Selecting a display theme for the widget
You can select a display theme to use to display the Microcharts widget on a
mobile device. Display themes are used only for widgets displayed on mobile
devices, not for widgets displayed in Flash Mode.
130 Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
3
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
To select a display theme for the Microcharts widget
1 In Flash Mode or Interactive Mode, right-click the widget and select
Properties. The Microcharts dialog box opens.
2 From the drop-down list, select Options.
3 From the Choose Theme drop-down list, select a color theme to use to
display the widget, as follows:
•
To display the widget using a light-colored theme, select Light
(default).
•
To display the widget using a dark-colored theme, select Dark.
•
To display the widget using custom color options that you define,
select Custom. The colors that you select for the widget in the
Microcharts dialog box will be used to display the widget on a mobile
device.
4 Click OK to apply your changes.
Downloading and viewing multimedia files: Multimedia widget
You can allow users to browse and view files in a web folder, such as
documents, images, and videos, using a Multimedia widget. When viewed on
an iPhone or iPad with MicroStrategy Mobile, the Multimedia widget
displays a list of available files, along with information about each file,
including the file name, description, and file type. Users can tap the
Download icon next to a file displayed in the widget to download and view
the file. When the mobile device is offline, users can view files that have been
downloaded and automatically stored on their mobile device. Files that have
not been stored on the mobile device are greyed out and cannot be viewed
offline.
Users can view the following types of files using the Multimedia widget:
•
Audio and video files
•
ePub files
•
Excel
•
HTML
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
131
3
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
•
Image
•
PDF
•
Plain text
•
PowerPoint
•
Word
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
PDF files are displayed in-app using a native PDF reader.
Prerequisites
Before creating a Multimedia widget, you must perform the following tasks:
•
Create the document in which to insert the Multimedia widget.
•
Configure an XQuery database instance to retrieve web folder contents.
For steps to configure this database instance, see the Custom SQL
Queries: Freeform SQL and Query Builder chapter in the Advanced
Reporting Guide.
•
Create an XQuery report to use to access the web folder that contains the
files to display in the widget. Add the XQuery report as a dataset report in
the document. For steps to create the XQuery report, see the Custom SQL
Queries: Freeform SQL and Query Builder chapter in the Advanced
Reporting Guide.
To create and configure a Multimedia widget
1 In MicroStrategy Web, open the document in Design or Editable Mode.
2 From the Dataset Objects panel on the left, click and drag the dataset
report to the area of the document in which to display the widget. The
attributes on the Grid/Graph of the dataset report should be displayed in
the following order:
•
MW_URL
•
MW_Name
•
MW_ModifiedOn
•
MW_ModifiedOnText
•
MW_DBIGUID
132 Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
3
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
•
MW_ThumbnailURL
•
MW_Description
3 Right-click the dataset report, then select Properties and Formatting.
The Properties and Formatting dialog box opens.
4 From the left, click Widget.
5 From the Widget drop-down list, point to Mobile, then select
Multimedia.
6 Click OK to save your changes and return to the document.
Visualizing relationships: Network widget
You can create a Network widget to allow analysts to quickly and easily
identify relationships between related items and clusters, such as when
visualizing a social network or displaying a market basket analysis. Attribute
elements are displayed as nodes in the visualization, with lines (called edges)
drawn between the nodes to represent relationships between elements. Once
the visualization is created, users can view characteristics of the nodes and
the relationships between them, using display options such as node size,
edge thickness, and edge color.
For steps to add a Network widget to a document and specify formatting
options, see the Dashboards and Widgets Creation Guide. You can also
define Information Windows that display when a node is tapped. For
instructions on creating an Information Window, see Providing additional
information to users: Information Windows, page 40.
You can also use the Network visualization in dashboards. For information
on creating analyses, refer to the MicroStrategy Web Help.
Uploading images: Photo Uploader widget
Analysts can use the Photo Uploader widget to upload images from an
iPhone, iPad, or Android device. A user can choose to take a new photo to use
as an image, use an existing image on his mobile device, or delete images.
For example, you can add the Store attribute to the widget’s Grid/Graph, and
then add a prompt to the document to allow users to select a store. Users can
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
133
3
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
run the document, then select the store in which they are taking a picture
with their mobile devices. When the image is uploaded, the name of the store
is stored in the user’s data source, along with the description of the image
and the location in which the image is stored. For steps to create prompts,
see Allowing users to filter data: prompts, page 63.
Prerequisites
•
You must have the Transaction Services product.
•
You must have the Web Configure Transaction privilege.
•
This procedure assumes you have already created attributes and metrics
to place on the widget. The widget is used to store information about the
images before they are uploaded and must contain a placeholder row of
data for each image you want to upload. The data in these rows is updated
when users upload images. The following attributes and metrics must be
created:

One attribute that contains the following attribute forms:
– The first attribute form is the location in which each image is
saved. The values may be blank or placeholders, and are updated
with new paths when users upload images.
– The second attribute form contains a description of each image, as
provided by the user.
– The third attribute form (optional) contains a unique numeric ID
of each image that the user uploads.
 Note the following:

•
The number of placeholder rows in the widget determines the
maximum number of images users can upload. For example, if
you create a widget with 20 rows, users can upload a maximum
of 20 images.
•
To choose the attribute forms displayed for an attribute in the
widget, right-click the header of the attribute, point to
Attribute Forms, then select the attribute forms you want to
display.
Two metrics, as follows:
– The first metric is used to indicate whether or not the image has
been uploaded.
134 Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
3
– The second metric (optional) contains the sum of the values in the
first metric, and is used to display the number of images the user
has uploaded.


•
You can provide additional information about an uploaded image by
placing additional attributes and metrics on the widget. For example,
you can add the Store attribute to the widget, and then add a prompt
to the document to allow users to select a store. Users can run the
document, then select the store in which they are taking a picture with
their mobile devices. When the image is uploaded, the name of the
store is stored in the user’s data source, along with the description of
the image and the location in which the image is stored. For steps to
create prompts, see Allowing users to filter data: prompts, page 63.
You can add objects from multiple datasets to the Grid/Graph
containing the widget. You must have the correct privileges and the
project must allow Grid/Graphs to use multiple datasets. For steps to
allow Grid/Graphs to use multiple datasets, see the Adding Text and
Data chapter of the Document Creation Guide.
This procedure assumes you have already created a Transaction Services
report to link to the widget. There must be an attribute form or metric
displayed in the widget (described above) for each input object in the
Transaction Services report. For steps to create a Transaction Services
report, see the Advanced Reporting Guide.
To add a Photo Uploader widget to a document
1 Open the document in Design or Editable Mode.
2 From the Insert menu, point to Widgets, then point to Mobile. Select
Photo Uploader.
3 Click in your document where you want to place the widget. A Grid/
Graph containing the widget is added to the document.
4 If desired, resize the widget by clicking and then dragging its handles.
5 From the Dataset Objects panel on the left, select attributes and metrics,
and drag them on to the Grid/Graph, as described in the prerequisites
above.
6 To specify the size and quality of images uploaded through the Photo
Uploader, the camera used to take images, and other properties,
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
135
3
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
right-click the widget and select Properties and Formatting, then click
the gear icon next to Widget Properties.
You can specify the following options:
a The quality of the images that are uploaded. From the Image Quality
drop-down list, select High, Medium, or Low (default).
b The size of the images uploaded. From the Image Size drop-down list,
select Small, Medium (default), Large, or Actual.
c
Whether users can upload multiple images at one time. From the
Allow Multiple Photos drop-down list, select Yes (default) or No.
d Whether users can use photos already stored on their mobile device.
From the Allow Existing Pictures drop-down list, select Yes (default)
or No.
e
The camera used to take photos by default. Users can still switch
between the cameras. From the Default Camera drop-down list, select
Back (default) or Front.
7 To link the widget to the Transaction Services report, right-click the
widget’s Grid/Graph, then select Configure Transaction. The Configure
Transactions dialog box opens.
8 Click ... (the Browse button), then navigate to and select the Transaction
Services report to link to.
9 A list of the attributes and metrics that can be modified in the
Transaction Services report is displayed in the Transaction Input column.
Perform the following steps for each input object:
a From the Grid Object drop-down list, select the attribute form or
metric to link to the input object.
b You can choose whether users can edit the value of each input object.
Do one of the following:
– To allow users to edit the value of the input object, select the
Editable check box.
– To prevent users from editing the value of the input object, clear
the Editable check box.
must define the first metric on the columns of the widget
 You
to be editable. This metric indicates whether the image has
been uploaded.
136 Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
c
3
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
From the Transaction Input drop-down list, choose a control to
display the input as, such as a text box, slider, and so on.
10 Repeat the appropriate steps above to define and format the control to
display for each input object.
11 Click OK to save your changes and return to the document.
12 To create a button for users to submit a photo, from the Insert menu,
point to Selector, then select Action Selector Button.
13 Click the section of the Layout area in which you want to place the
selector. Right-click the selector, then select Properties and Formatting.
The Properties and Formatting dialog box opens.
14 From the left, click General, then in the Display Text field, type the text
you want to display on the button or link; for example, Submit.
15 By default, a descriptive title bar is displayed for the selector. You can
determine whether to display the title bar. Do one of the following:
•
To display the title bar, select the Show Title Bar check box and type
the title you want to display in the field.
•
To display the selector button or link without the title bar, clear the
Show Title Bar check box.
16 From the left, click Selector. From the Action Type drop-down list,
select Submit.
17 By default, the selector button or link targets each Grid/Graph and panel
stack in the document section in which it is placed. You can choose the
targets of the selector manually instead. To do so, click Click here, then
use the right arrow to move the target Grid/Graph or panel stack from the
Available list to the Selected list. For additional information on working
with selectors, see the MicroStrategy Web Help.
18 Select the appropriate options to define the selector. For the full steps to
define an action selector button, see the Report Services Document
Creation Guide.
19 Click OK to save your changes and return to the document.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
137
3
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Displaying RSS feeds: RSS Reader widget
You can provide an RSS feed on the iPhone and iPad. RSS (Rich Site
Summary, or Really Simple Syndication) is a data format used to display
updated content from a website. An RSS document is called a feed. It
contains either a summary of the content from an associated website or the
full text.
The RSS Reader widget allows users to compare data in the dashboard with
information from external news feed sources. The widget retrieves news
from an RSS news feed and displays it alongside the other components of the
dashboard. The RSS feed is automatically reloaded to display the most
up-to-date news about a variety of topics that you specify.
You can add an RSS Reader widget to a document, then display the widget
when the document is viewed on a mobile device, as shown in the image
above. Users can select an RSS feed to display a list of news items, then select
an item to display from the list. For steps to create an RSS Reader widget and
add it to a document, see the Dashboards and Widgets Creation Guide.
Formatting an RSS Reader widget for mobile devices
You can format how the widget is displayed when viewed on the mobile
device. For example, you can change the color in which the titles of RSS feeds
are displayed, or the background color used for news items that are selected
in the widget.
138 Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
3
The table below suggests formatting ideas and provides steps to format how
an RSS Reader widget is displayed on the mobile device.
What to Format in the Widget
How to Format It
Specify the URL of the RSS feed to
display in the widget
1 In Flash Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties.
The RSS Reader dialog box opens.
2 On the General tab, type the URL of the RSS feed in the
Default RSS Field. To specify multiple URLs, type ??
between each URL. For example:
http://www.businessweek.com/rss/bwdaily.rss??http://
news.google.com/news?ned=us&topic=h&output=rss
3 Click OK to apply your changes.
Specify the title of the RSS feed
displayed in the widget
1 In Flash Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties.
The RSS Reader dialog box opens.
2 On the General tab, type the title of the RSS feed in the RSS
Reader Title field. To specify titles for multiple RSS feeds,
type ?? between each title. For example, you can type
Business??World News to create two RSS feeds, one
named Business and the other named World News.
3 Click OK to apply your changes.
Select the color in which the titles of
RSS feeds are displayed
1 In Flash Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties.
The RSS Reader dialog box opens.
2 On the General tab, select a color from the RSS Reader
Title Color palette.
3 Click OK to apply your changes.
Select the background color of the
widget
1 In Flash Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties.
The RSS Reader dialog box opens.
2 On the General tab, select a color from the Background
Color palette.
3 Click OK to apply your changes.
Select the color of the widget’s border
1 In Flash Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties.
The RSS Reader dialog box opens.
2 On the General tab, select a color from the Border Color
palette.
3 Click OK to apply your changes.
Select the background color to use to
display news items in the widget
1 In Flash Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties.
The RSS Reader dialog box opens.
2 On the NewsItem tab, select Colors from the first drop-down
list.
3 Select Background from the second drop-down list.
4 Select a color from the Background color palette.
5 Click OK to apply your changes.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
139
3
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
What to Format in the Widget
How to Format It
Select the background color displayed
for news items when a cursor hovers
over the item in the widget
1 In Flash Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties.
The RSS Reader dialog box opens.
2 On the NewsItem tab, select Colors from the first drop-down
list.
3 Select Rollover Background from the second drop-down
list.
4 Select a color from the Rollover Background color palette.
5 Click OK to apply your changes.
Select the font color to use to display
news items in the widget
1 In Flash Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties.
The RSS Reader dialog box opens.
2 On the NewsItem tab, select Colors from the first drop-down
list.
3 Select Font from the second drop-down list.
4 Select a color from the Font Color palette.
5 Click OK to apply your changes.
Select the font color to use to display
news items when a cursor hovers over
the item in the widget
1 In Flash Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties.
The RSS Reader dialog box opens.
2 On the NewsItem tab, select Colors from the first drop-down
list.
3 Select Rollover Font from the second drop-down list.
4 Select a color from the Rollover Font Color palette.
5 Click OK to apply your changes.
Select the font color to use for news
items that have been read
1 In Flash Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties.
The RSS Reader dialog box opens.
2 On the NewsItem tab, select Colors from the first drop-down
list.
3 Select Read Articles from the second drop-down list.
4 Select a color from the Read Articles color palette.
5 Click OK to apply your changes.
Select the background color to use to
display news items that are selected in
the widget
1 In Flash Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties.
The RSS Reader dialog box opens.
2 On the NewsDetail tab, select a color from the Background
Color palette.
3 Click OK to apply your changes.
Select the font color to use to display
news items that are selected in the
widget
1 In Flash Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties.
The RSS Reader dialog box opens.
2 On the NewsDetail tab, select a color from the Font Color
palette.
3 Click OK to apply your changes.
Gathering data from users: Survey widget
The Survey widget allows an analyst to interact with a survey on an iPad and
submit answers, which are then stored in your data source. You can create a
140 Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
3
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
survey in a database or on a third-party survey creation website, then display
your survey in a Transaction Services-enabled document on an iPad.
The Survey widget provides an easy way to dynamically generate and
maintain surveys. If you want to modify the survey after its creation (for
example, by adding or editing survey questions), you can update the survey
information provided by the attributes and metrics placed on the widget’s
grid. These changes will automatically be reflected and displayed in the
widget, without requiring any additional configuration changes to the widget
in the document.
You can add a Survey widget to a document, then display the widget when
the document is viewed on a mobile device, as shown in the image above.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
141
3
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
A Survey widget displayed on an iPad can contain the following question
types:
Question Type
Description
Text field
A field consisting of one line in which users can enter text. Text fields
are suited for questions in which users provide a single line of text,
such as an email address.
Text area
A field in which users can type multiple lines of text. Text areas are
suited for comments sections in which users provide multiple lines of
written content.
Radio button
A list of radio buttons, displayed in a table. Users can select one radio
button at a time.
Check box
A list of check boxes, displayed in a table. Users can select more than
one check box at the same time.
Drop-down list
A list of options, displayed in a table. Users can select one option from
the drop-down list at a time.
Likert scale
A series of radio buttons, displayed in a table, that users can choose
from to rate an item on a numeric scale. For example, users can
choose 1 to strongly disagree with a statement, or 5 to strongly agree.
Drag and drop
ranking
A list containing options that users can click and drag to rank them from
highest to lowest.
Star ranking
A row of stars that users can use to submit a specific star rating out of
five stars (such as four out of five stars).
Group question
When you display questions in a question group or table, you specify
which question is treated as the main question. The main question is
displayed as a header above the rest of the questions.
In the example above, the second question is displayed as a table of choices.
The iPad displays the text “Required” for required questions (as shown for
First Name in the example). For steps to create a Survey widget and add it to
a document, including descriptions of the question types, see the
Dashboards and Widgets Creation Guide.
Displaying a Timeline widget
The Timeline widget allows analysts using an iPad to view events or
important milestones in the status of a product. For example, the image
142 Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
3
below shows a Timeline widget for a company that leases commercial jets to
different airlines.
Each line represents a different commercial jet. An icon is displayed to mark
events in the jet’s lifetime, such as a new lease, a lease expiring, a new
purchase, and so on. The metric values on the right are the key performance
indicators (KPIs) for each jet, and the values at the bottom are the KPIs for
each year.
Creating and adding a Timeline widget to a report or
document
The following are instructions to define a Timeline widget for display on a
mobile device. You can also define Information Windows for the widget,
which can display additional information when users tap a section of the
timeline. You can define a link in the widget to open a report or another
document. For steps to define a link in a widget using the Links Editor, see
the Providing Flash Analysis and Interactivity: Widgets chapter in the
Dashboards and Widgets Creation Guide.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
143
3
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Prerequisites
•
You must have a total of three datasets for the Timeline widget, which
contain data as follows:

A main dataset, which must have the following objects:
– One attribute on the rows. Each attribute element is shown as a
row on the Timeline widget. In the example above, the Asset
attribute is placed on the rows.
– The Year and Quarter attributes, in that order, on the columns.
– One metric for Status, with codes for the asset’s status, such as
leased, sold, and so on. This metric determines the color of the
timeline for a particular status. You can define the colors using
thresholds on the Status metric.
– One metric for Event, with codes for events in the asset’s timeline.
You can define the appearance of the event marker by defining a
threshold on the Event metric.
– Optionally, one metric for the count of events for each asset, which
contains the number of events that have occurred in a given
quarter. If this value is greater than 1 for a specific quarter, a
number badge for the quarter is displayed in the widget in place of
an event icon. This number badge contains the number of events
that affected the asset during the quarter.

A dataset that relates the asset to the KPI metrics. The metrics are
displayed on the right side of the widget. The dataset must contain the
following objects:
– On the rows, the attribute for which timelines are displayed. In the
example above, this is the Asset attribute.
– On the columns, the metrics for the KPIs.

A dataset that relates the Year to the KPI metrics. The metrics are
displayed at the bottom of the widget. The dataset must contain the
following objects:
– On the rows, the Year attribute.
– On the columns, the metrics for the KPIs.
144 Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
3
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
To create and configure the Timeline widget for mobile devices
1 In Web, open the document in Design or Editable Mode.
2 From the Insert menu, point to Widgets, then Mobile, and select
Timeline.
3 Click the location on your document where you want to place the widget.
The Grid/Graph containing the widget is displayed.
4 If desired, resize the widget by clicking and then dragging its handles.
To define the grid for the main dataset
5 From the Dataset Objects panel on the left, place the objects from the
main dataset on to the widget. The requirements for these objects are
described in the prerequisites above.
6 To color-code the line for each asset in the widget based on the asset’s
status, you must define a threshold on the status metric to change the
color in which metric values are displayed, as described below:
a Right-click the widget, then point to Thresholds, and select Visual.
The Visual Threshold Editor opens.
b Select the appropriate options to define your threshold. For detailed
steps to define a threshold, see the Formatting a Report chapter in
the Basic Reporting Guide.
7 To display an image icon when an event occurs to an asset in the widget,
you must define a threshold on the event metric to replace metric values
with the image you want to display, as described below.
a Right-click the widget, then point to Thresholds, and select Visual.
The Visual Threshold Editor opens.
b Select the appropriate options to define your threshold. For detailed
steps to define a threshold, see the Formatting a Report chapter in
the Basic Reporting Guide.
To define the grid for displaying metrics by asset
8 From the Insert menu, select Grid, then click the area in the Layout area
in which you want to place the grid.
 This grid will not be visible when the widget is displayed.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
145
3
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
9 From the Dataset Objects panel, drag the objects from the second
dataset, which relates the assets to metrics, on to the grid.
To define the grid for displaying metrics by year
10 From the Insert menu, select Grid, then click the area in the Layout area
in which you want to place the grid.
 This grid will not be visible when the widget is displayed.
11 From the Dataset Objects panel, drag the objects from the third dataset,
which relates the year to metrics, on to the grid.
To configure the widget
12 Right-click the Timeline widget, then select Properties and Formatting.
The Properties and Formatting dialog box opens.
13 On the left, click Widget.
14 In the Available list under Secondary Data Providers, select the grid with
the asset attribute, then click > to move it to the Selected list. Select the
grid with the Year attribute and click > to move it to the Selected list.
15 Click the Widget Properties icon
opens.
. The Timeline Properties dialog box
16 You can choose the starting point from which to display data in the
timeline when the widget is displayed. From the Initial column display
properties drop-down list, select one of the following:
•
To display data in the timeline starting with the most recent dates
available, select Right Justified.
•
To display data in the timeline starting with the earliest dates
available, select Left Justified.
17 You can determine whether to show labels for each quarter displayed in
the timeline. Do one of the following:
•
To show the labels for each quarter, select the Show labels check box.
•
To display the timeline without labeling each quarter, clear the Show
labels check box.
18 Click OK to save your changes and return to the Properties and
Formatting dialog box.
146 Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
3
19 Click OK to save your changes.
Displaying additional information: Information Windows
You can define Information Windows, which are pop-up windows that
display additional information when the user taps an area in the widget when
the widget is displayed on the mobile device. To do so, you must first define a
panel stack containing the information you want to display, then define
specific attributes as selectors targeting the panel stack, as follows:
•
To display an Information Window when the user taps a section of the
timeline for a specific asset and quarter, you must define the Asset, Year,
and Quarter attributes on the Timeline widget as selectors targeting the
panel stack.
•
To display an Information Window when the user taps the name of an
asset in the widget, you must define the Asset attribute in the grid
containing the metrics to be displayed by Asset (the second Grid/Graph
you added to the document) as a selector targeting the panel stack.
For detailed steps to create Information Windows, see Providing additional
information to users: Information Windows, page 40.
Displaying data trends: Time Series widget
The Time Series widget displays data over a specific period of time on an
iPhone, iPad, or Android device. This widget is displayed as a line graph on
the device. You can configure the widget to display multiple data series on
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
147
3
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
the same graph. An example of a Time Series widget on an iPhone is shown
below.
You can configure the Time Series widget to provide data across multiple
time intervals. For example, in the image above, data is displayed for a
one-month time period. However, the widget can also display data for one
year, several years, or for the entire time period. You can add intervals to a
widget by configuring the widget’s properties.
The number of data points displayed in a Time Series widget is determined
by the maximum number of rows displayed in the grid on which it is based.
For steps to change the number of data points displayed in a Time Series
widget in a document, see To determine the maximum number of data
points displayed in a document, page 151.
For iPhones and iPads, you can define:
•
Information Windows that display when the widget is tapped. For
instructions on creating an Information Window, see Providing
additional information to users: Information Windows, page 40.
•
A link in the widget to open a report or another document. For steps to
define a link in a widget using the Links Editor, see the Providing Flash
Analysis and Interactivity: Widgets chapter in the Dashboards and
Widgets Creation Guide.
148 Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
3
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
Prerequisites
For a Grid/Graph to be used as a Time Series widget, it must meet the
following requirements:
•
At least one attribute on the rows. The attribute provides the values along
the horizontal axis of the widget, and should be time-based.
•
At least one metric on the columns. The metric values are graphed in the
widget.
•
To view data for multiple series, place at least one attribute on the
columns. The attribute elements are graphed on the widget’s axis.
•
Ensure that the row and column headers of the report are not merged.
You can add objects from multiple datasets to the Grid/Graph containing the
widget. You must have the correct privileges and the project must allow
Grid/Graphs to use multiple datasets. For steps to allow Grid/Graphs to use
multiple datasets, see the Adding Text and Data chapter of the Document
Creation Guide.
To create and add a Time Series widget to a document
1 In MicroStrategy Web, open the document in Design or Editable Mode.
2 From the Insert menu, point to Widgets, then Mobile, and select Time
Series.
3 Click the location on your document where you want to place the widget.
The Grid/Graph containing the widget is displayed.
4 If desired, resize the widget by clicking and then dragging its handles.
5 From the Dataset Objects panel on the left, select attributes and metrics,
and drag them on top of the widget, as described in the prerequisites
above.
devices can only display up to two metrics in a Time
 Android
Series widget.
Configure the widget’s display properties
6 Right-click the widget, then select Properties and Formatting. The
Properties and Formatting dialog box opens.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
149
3
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
7 From the left, select Widget.
8 Click the Widget Properties icon
box opens.
. The Time Series Properties dialog
9 Interval selectors let users select the time period for which they want to
view data in the widget, allowing them to analyze data at different levels
of detail. You can add, rearrange, or delete interval selectors in a Time
Series widget, as described below.
To add a new interval selector to the widget
a Click Add. The new selector is added and displayed.
b Type a name for the selector in the Name field.
c
From the Template drop-down list, select the control in the document
that contains the time-based attribute you want to use to create the
interval selector. The granularity is automatically determined by the
last (right-most) attribute on the Grid/Graph's rows, as described
above.
d From the Interval unit drop-down list, select the units in which you
want to specify the length of the time interval. For example, to define a
six-month interval, you can select Month as the interval unit.
e
Type the number of units you want to include in the interval in the
Interval size field. For example, if the Interval unit is defined as
Month, you can type 6 to specify a six-month time interval.
f
A summary of the interval selector's properties is displayed in the
bottom pane. Repeat the appropriate steps above to add additional
interval selectors.
To rearrange the order in which an interval selector is displayed
a Click Move up or Move down to change the position of the selector.
To delete an interval selector
a Select the interval selector’s name in the Interval Selector list to the
left, then click Remove. The interval selector is removed.
To use the slider as a selector
10 You can use the slider to filter the data in your dashboard, so that only the
data selected in the slider is displayed. Select the Use slider as selector
check box.
150 Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
3
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
Format colors, labels, and the axis scale
11 Click the Formatting tab.
12 To change the background color of the widget, select a color from the
Background palette.
13 To change the color of the text and lines, select a color from the Line and
Text palette.
14 The color of each series is displayed in the Series palettes. To change the
color of a series, select a color from the corresponding palette.
15 From the Background transparency drop-down list, select a level of
transparency. The higher the percentage, the more transparent the
background is.
16 By default, axis labels are condensed, which means the widget allocates
more space to the chart area than to the labels. You can change this
behavior by clearing the Condense labels check box.
17 You can specify the minimum and maximum values of the axis, by
completing the following steps:
a Select the Custom axis scale check box.
b Type the Maximum axis value.
c
Type the Minimum axis value.
18 Click OK to return to the Properties and Formatting dialog box.
19 Click OK again to save changes.
To determine the maximum number of data points displayed in a document
the number of rows that can be displayed in a grid may
 Increasing
affect performance when the document is displayed.
1 Open the document containing the widget in Design or Editable Mode.
2 Right-click the widget’s Grid/Graph and select Properties and
Formatting. The Properties and Formatting dialog box opens.
3 From the left, select Grid.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
151
3
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
4 Select the Enable incremental fetch in Grid check box.
5 From the Count By drop-down list, select Individual Rows.
6 Type the maximum number of data points to display in the widget in the
Maximum number of rows per page field.
7 Click OK to save changes.
Downloading and playing videos: Video Player widget
On an iPhone or iPad, the Video Player widget loads and plays a video from a
remote location or from the local cache. The widget can display:
•
An online video from a streaming service such as YouTube.
•
An online video from a file server location.
•
A cached video from the WebDAV cache, in offline mode. The WebDAV
cache can be populated by a manual download request.
If the mobile device is online, the Video Player widget loads the video from
the remote location, unless a local cache already exists on the device’s
WebDAV cache store. Caching should be set up whenever possible.
When a user requests a video:
1 The widget checks for a local copy stored on the device, regardless of
whether or not the device is connected. If a cached file is used, the widget
can start playing the video without loading the full file into memory.
2 If the video is not yet cached, then the widget requests the video from the
source. The video can be a streaming video, such as a YouTube video, or a
full video download file served by a web server.
•
A streaming video is buffered and played as it downloads. By default,
the downloaded video file is discarded when the MicroStrategy Mobile
application is closed. You can ensure that the video is downloaded and
stored on the mobile device for offline use. For steps, see Pre-caching
online content on the mobile device for offline use, page 276.
•
A file download video is downloaded fully to the client. Once the video
is fully downloaded, the video can be played. You can pre-cache the
video to download the video before the user requests it. This allows a
faster response time when the video is requested. For steps, see
152 Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
3
Pre-caching online content on the mobile device for offline use,
page 276.
The video is saved to the WebDAV Content Manager cache store so
that it can be shared by other instances of the Video Player widget or
the Multimedia widget. The video source URL is used as the key of the
cache so it can be matched by other requests to the same video.
You can configure the Video Player widget to use one source for online live
requests that are initiated by the user, and a second source for a full file that
can be downloaded and cached by a manual download request. For example,
the live source can be set to a YouTube location while the offline cache source
points to a URL that serves the full video file.
In a different scenario, such as a company that hosts its videos on its own
servers, both sources can use the same URL. For the live request, the device
directly accesses the video from the hosting web server, if a matching cache is
not found on the local cache.
For steps to configure a WebDAV folder, see the Advanced Reporting Guide.
To create and add a Video Player widget to a document
1 In MicroStrategy Web, open the document in Design or Editable Mode.
2 From the Insert menu, point to Widgets, then Mobile, and select Video
Player.
3 Click the location on your document where you want to place the widget.
4 If desired, resize the widget by clicking and then dragging its handles.
5 Right-click the widget, then select Properties and Formatting. The
Properties and Formatting dialog box opens.
6 From the left, select Widget.
7 Click the Widget Properties icon
box opens.
. The Video Player Properties dialog
8 Do one of the following to define the video’s source:
•
To stream the video:
a Select Video streaming.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Adding widgets and visualizations to documents for mobile devices
153
3
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
b The Embed video HTML field is used for online live requests
initiated by users. Type or copy the HTML needed to embed the
video in a site. For example, the HTML for a MicroStrategy
Express demo on YouTube is:
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="//
www.youtube.com/embed/AH4Z9fEybF8" frameborder=
"0" allowfullscreen></iframe>
c
•
The Alternate download URL is a cache source that serves the full
video file. Type the URL in the field.
To download the video:
a Select Video download.
b Type the Video URL.
9 To display a thumbnail for the video, type the Video thumbnail URL.
the video is streamed but an alternate URL is not provided, the
 IfVideo
thumbnail URL field is not available.
10 Click OK to return to the Properties and Formatting dialog box.
11 Click OK to save changes.
Displaying widgets using the entire screen on
mobile devices
By default, when you add a widget to a layout in a document, the widget is
sized to take up the entire screen when displayed on an iPhone or Android
device. Any additional grids, graphs, or widgets you add to the layout are not
displayed. You can choose to display the widget without taking up the entire
screen, and allow the display of other grids, graphs, or widgets together in
the layout.
To determine whether to display a widget using the entire screen on a mobile
device
1 Open the document in Design or Editable Mode.
154 Displaying widgets using the entire screen on mobile devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
3
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
2 Right-click the Grid/Graph containing the widget and select Properties
and Formatting. The Properties and Formatting dialog box is displayed.
3 From the left, select Widget. Do one of the following:
•
To size the widget to fit the entire screen, select the Full Screen check
box.
•
To display the widget without taking up the entire screen, and allow
the display of other grids, graphs, or widgets in the layout, clear the
Full Screen check box.
Displaying widgets on iOS devices with a dark
or light theme
On the iPad and iPhone, you can display widgets using a dark or light theme.
To do this, change the theme of the document containing the widget. In the
image below, the date selection widget on the left uses the dark theme, while
the date selection widget on the right uses the light theme.
You can change the theme for the following widgets:
•
Map
•
Heat Map
•
Time Series
•
Date Selection
•
Survey
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Displaying widgets on iOS devices with a dark or light theme
155
3
Displaying data as interactive visualizations: Widgets
•
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Microchart
For steps to change a document’s theme, see Displaying documents on iOS
devices with a dark or light theme, page 34.
156 Displaying widgets on iOS devices with a dark or light theme
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
4
4.
USING LINKS IN DOCUMENTS
Introduction
You can create the experience of navigating through a native app by adding
links between documents. Each document becomes a page or panel in your
app, which a user can access from, for example, a button or tab bar.
You can also create links that perform actions or open other applications on
the user’s mobile device. For example, a document designer can include a
link that dials a store location’s phone number from the user’s mobile device.
The following topics are covered:
•
Opening a device’s installed applications from documents, page 158.
You can use links that interact with applications installed with mobile
devices, such as email or text messaging.
•
Linking to reports and documents from a mobile document, page 163. A
link lets the user execute another document or report (the target) from a
document (the source). Parameters can be passed to answer any prompts
or set any selectors that are in the target.
•
Using links to access features within the MicroStrategy Mobile
application, page 178. You can use links in a document to access specific
features within the MicroStrategy Mobile application for iPhone or iPad.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
157
4
Using links in documents
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Examples are viewing a folder and emailing a screenshot of the
document.
•
Linking from documents with buttons and tab bars, page 180. A button
can send a user to the various screens, such as the Home screen or the
Report List, on an iPad, iPhone, or Android device. A button can open a
web page, or run a report or document. You can add a single button to a
dashboard, multiple buttons with different formatting in different
locations on the dashboard, or a bar of buttons that are all formatted the
same, called a tab bar.
•
Storing links on NFC tags on Android devices, page 190. You can store a
link on Near Field Communications (NFC) tags to open a report,
document, or folder on an Android device.
Opening a device’s installed applications from
documents
A document displayed on an iPhone, iPad or Android device can interact
with the applications that are installed with the device. For example, a
document can send addresses to Google Maps for directions or open a video.
These applications include:
•
Web browser
•
Email
•
Phone (applicable to mobile phones only)
•
SMS (applicable to mobile phones only)
•
Maps
•
Videos
To allow users to open an external application in a document, you must
create a hyperlink. The hyperlink connects a text field or an image to a web
page or application (the target). When the document is viewed on a device,
the user can click the control to navigate to the target.
158 Opening a device’s installed applications from documents
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
4
Using links in documents
For example, you create a document for the regional managers for a chain of
stores. This document contains information about each of the stores in the
manager’s region, as shown in the image below.
The information includes the store’s address, phone number, the store
manager’s email address, its inventory figures, and so on. When regional
managers view this document on their iPhones, they can:
•
View a map of the store’s location and get directions from their current
location
•
Email the store manager
•
Call the store
To create a link with a larger area that is easier to select, you can define a link
that includes both the text and the area around it, or create an image button
that users can select. To do this, you can:
•
Create an image to use as the button and add a link to it.
•
Insert a transparent image into the document, then enlarge and/or
position it to cover the desired link area. Link the transparent image to
the target. The user can then tap any area covered by the image to open
the link. A sample transparent image is located by default in C:\
Program Files\MicroStrategy\Intelligence Server\
images\1ptrans.gif.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Opening a device’s installed applications from documents
159
4
Using links in documents
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
When you create a hyperlink to open an external application, you must use
the syntax outlined in the table below. Two examples are included for each
type of hyperlink. The first example replaces the italicized variables in the
syntax with specific, static text, while the second replaces it with an attribute,
so that the hyperlink can change according to the data in your document.
To...
Use This Syntax....
Email
<a href="mailto:EmailAddress">Name</a>
Examples:
• <a href="mailto:[email protected]">John Doe</a>
• <a href="mailto:{StoreMgrEmail}">{StoreMgr}</a> where
StoreMgrEmail and StoreMgr are attributes
• <a href="mailto:[email protected]}">[email protected]}</a>
where StoreMgrEmail and StoreMgr are attribute forms of the Store attribute
Email with a
subject
<a href=”mailto:EmailAddress?cc=EmailAddress&subject=
SubjectLine&body=Message”>Text</a>
Example:
• <a href=”mailto:[email protected]?cc=
[email protected]&subject=
Greetings%20from%20MicroStrategy!&body=
I%20have%20reviewed%20your%20store’s%20sales%20results%20and%
20have”%20the%20following%20feedback%20for%20you:>Contact
John Doe</a>
Call
(applicable to
mobile
phones only)
<a href="tel:PhoneNumber">PhoneNumber</a>
Use SMS
links
(applicable to
mobile
phones only)
<a href="sms:SMSNumber">Text</a>
Pass location
to Google
Maps
<a href="http://maps.google.com/maps?q=City">City</a>
Examples:
• <a href="tel:1-555-555-5555">1-555-555-5555</a>
• <a href="tel:{StorePhone}">{StorePhone}</a> where StorePhone is an
attribute
Examples:
• <a href="sms:1-555-555-5555">I’ll be there soon</a>
• <a href="sms:{MgrPhone}">New Message</a> where MgrPhone is an
attribute
Examples:
• <a href="http://maps.google.com/maps?q=Chicago">Chicago</a>
• <a href="http://maps.google.com/maps?q=
{CustomerCity}">{CustomerCity}</a> where CustomerCity is an attribute
• <a href=“geo:38.915645,-77.220796”>MicroStrategy HQ</a>, where
the numbers in the link are the latitude and longitude respectively.
Note: For links to maps.google.com on Android devices, you may be asked to choose
whether to open the link using your default browser, or using Maps.
160 Opening a device’s installed applications from documents
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
To...
Use This Syntax....
Get directions
from Google
Maps
<a href="http://maps.google.com/maps?daddr=Destination&saddr=
Start">Text</a>
Open a video
Display a web
page in the
internal web
browser
(iPad)
By default,
web pages
open in Safari
4
Using links in documents
Examples:
• <a href="http://maps.google.com/maps?daddr=Washington+,DC
&saddr=Chicago">Directions</a>
• <a href="http://maps.google.com/maps?daddr=
{CustomerAddress}&saddr={StoreAddress}">Directions from
{StoreName} to {CustomerName} location</a> where CustomerAddress,
StoreAddress, StoreName, CustomerName are attributes
Example:
• <a href="http://phobos.apple.com/WebObjects/MZStore.woa
/wa/viewAlbum?i=?id=375385132"> <img height="15" width="61"
src="http://ax.phobos.apple.com.edgesuite.net/images/
badgeitunes61x15dark.gif" alt="Tech News Today"></img> </a>
WebPageURL?inApp=1
Replace WebPageURL with the URL of the web page you want to display in the internal
web browser. If the URL contains a ? (question mark) followed by a list of parameters,
such as http://news.google.com/news?ned=us&topic=h&output=rss, type
& (ampersand) followed by inApp=1. For example, http://news.google.com/
news?ned=us&topic=h&output=rss&inApp=1.
Otherwise, the URL of the web page you want to display must end with a / (forward
slash), followed by ?inApp=1. For example, to link to the Google web page, the URL is
http://www.google.com/?inApp=1.
You use the hyperlink properties to define links to the device’s applications,
as described below.
To create a hyperlink to an application on the device
1 In MicroStrategy Web, open the document in Design Mode or Editable
Mode.
2 To use a text field for the hyperlink, complete the following steps (see the
next step for instructions to add an image instead):
a From the Insert menu, select Text.
b Click in the section of the document where you want to place the text
field. If you click and drag in the section, you can size the text field.
ensure that the area of a link is large enough to recognize a user
 Toselecting
it, make sure it has a height and width of at least 40
pixels.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Opening a device’s installed applications from documents
161
4
Using links in documents
c
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Type the text to be displayed to users into the text field. You can add
static text, dynamic text (in the form of data fields and auto text
codes), or a combination to the text field:
•
To add static text, type the static text into the text field.
•
To add a data field, drag and drop a dataset object from the
Dataset Objects panel into the text field.
•
To add an auto text code, from the Insert menu, select Auto-text,
then select the code to insert.
background information about adding text to documents, see
 For
the Report Services Document Creation Guide.
3 To use an image for the hyperlink, complete the following steps:
a From the Insert menu, select Image.
b Click in the section of the document where you want to place the
image. If you click and drag in the section, you can size the image. The
Properties and Formatting dialog box opens.
ensure that the area of a link is large enough to recognize a user
 Toselecting
it, make sure it has a height and width of at least 40
pixels.
c
Type the address of the image file to insert in the Source field.
Navigate to and select the image file to insert in the document.
d Click OK. The image appears in the document.
background information about adding images to documents,
 For
especially to ensure that the image is available as needed, see the
Report Services Document Creation Guide.
4 Right-click the text field or image that you just added, and select
Properties and Formatting. The Properties and Formatting dialog box
opens.
5 From the left, click General, then select the Is hyperlink check box.
6 In the Hyperlink field, delete the “http://” text that is automatically filled
in. Following the syntax in the table on page 160, type the hyperlink into
the Hyperlink field. You can type static text, dynamic text (in the form of
data fields and text codes), or a combination, as described below:
•
To add static text, type the static text into the text field.
162 Opening a device’s installed applications from documents
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
•
4
Using links in documents
To add a data field (that is, an object from a dataset report), type the
object’s name within braces, such as {Revenue} or {Region}. The
name must match either the name of an object in a dataset or its alias.
If either name contains spaces or special characters, you must type it
in square brackets [ ] within the braces; for example, {[Manager
Name]}.
character is any character other than a - z, A - Z, 0 - 9,
 A#,special
_, and . (period).
•
To add an auto text code (that is, document and dataset report
information), type the code within braces. As with data fields, if an
object’s name contains spaces or special characters, enclose it in
square brackets within the braces. For background information about
available auto text codes, see the Report Services Document Creation
Guide.
7 Click OK to return to the document. Notice that the text field is now
underlined, indicating that it is a hyperlink.
Linking to reports and documents from a
mobile document
A link is a connection in a document to another document or a report. A link
lets a user execute another document or report (the target) from a document
(the source), and to pass parameters to answer any prompts that are in the
target. You can link from a text field, an image, or a button.
For example, if a user is viewing a document containing regional sales, he
can select a particular region to execute another document that displays sales
for the stores in that region. This is a form of drilling, where the user has
drilled from region to store. If the document contains a selector, the user can
select a specific region in the selector, then tap a link to another document
that displays sales for the months in that year. The source document could
also link to the underlying dataset report, to display profit and cost values as
well.
Most links can be created using the Link Editor. If you want to specify the
page-by or report view (grid or graph) of a report, or specify the layout or
grouping of a document, use the hyperlink properties and create the link
URLs manually, by using the object ID and link syntax. For steps to create
links using the Link Editor, see Creating a link for a mobile document,
page 165. For steps to create links using manual URLs, see Creating a link
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Linking to reports and documents from a mobile document
163
4
Using links in documents
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
URL to specify page-by, report view, layout, or grouping for the target,
page 172.
Links you can create for iOS devices
You can use links to do the following on an iPhone or iPad:
•
Execute a report, specifying the page-by, prompt answers, and report
view (grid, graph, or both grid and graph).
•
Execute a document, specifying the layout, grouping, prompt answers,
and selector values.


A multi-layout document contains multiple documents, each in its
own layout, creating a “book” of documents. Each layout functions as
a separate document, with its own grouping, page setup, and so on,
but the layouts are generated into a single PDF document.
Grouping a document helps users understand the data better.
Grouping the data sets up a type of hierarchy within the document,
and an inherent or implied sort order for the data.
can change the grouping or layout for the currently displayed
 You
document, or for a target document. If you change the grouping or
layout for the currently displayed document, you still must use the
entire link URL, including the document ID, event parameter, and
so on.
•
Reprompt a report or document.
•
Display the Home screen, Shared Library, Report List, Settings screen,
Status screen, or Help screen.
Links you can create for Android devices
You can use links to do the following on an Android device:
•
Execute a report, specifying whether it is displayed as a grid, a graph, or
both a grid and graph
•
Execute a document
•
Run a report or document from a different project or server
164 Linking to reports and documents from a mobile document
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
4
Using links in documents
Creating a link for a mobile document
Prerequisites
•
The source document and any target reports/documents must be created.
•
If the target report/document contains prompts, you must know what
types of prompts the targets require and how they will be answered by the
link (or by the user). For details on each prompt answer method, see
Specifying how prompts are answered in the target, page 169.
•
If you want to pass selector values from the source document to the target
document, both the source and the target must contain the same selector.
This means that either both documents must contain a selector with the
same name (such as Region Selector), or both documents must contain a
selector that uses the same source object (such as Region).
To create a link for a mobile document
1 In MicroStrategy Web, open the document in Design Mode or Editable
Mode.
2 You can link from a text field, an image, or a button. Do one of the
following:
•
To link from a text field, complete the following steps:
a From the Insert menu, select Text.
b Click in the section of the document where you want to place the
text field. If you click and drag in the section, you can size the text
field.
that the area of a link is large enough to recognize a
 Touserensure
selecting it, make sure it has a height and width of at least
40 pixels.
c
Type the text to be displayed to users into the text field. You can
add static text, dynamic text (in the form of data fields and auto
text codes), or a combination to the text field:
– To add static text, type the static text into the text field.
– To add a data field, drag and drop a dataset object from the
Dataset Objects panel into the text field.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Linking to reports and documents from a mobile document
165
4
Using links in documents
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
– To add an auto text code, from the Insert menu, select
Auto-text, then select the code to insert.
background information about adding data fields and auto
 For
text codes to documents, see the Report Services Document
Creation Guide.
d Right-click the text field, and select Edit Links. The Links dialog
box opens.
•
To link from an image, complete the following steps:
a From the Insert menu, select Image.
b Click in the section of the document where you want to place the
image. If you click and drag in the section, you can size the image.
The Properties and Formatting dialog box opens.
that the area of a link is large enough to recognize a
 Touserensure
selecting it, make sure it has a height and width of at least
40 pixels.
c
Type the address of the image file to insert in the Source field.
d Click OK. The image appears in the document.
background information about adding images to
 For
documents, see the Report Services Document Creation Guide.
e
•
Right-click the image, and select Edit Links. The Links dialog box
opens.
To link from a button, complete the following steps:
a Create the button, as described in Linking from documents with
buttons and tab bars, page 180.
b Right-click the button, and select Properties and Formatting.
The Properties and Formatting dialog box opens.
c
Click
opens.
to configure actions on the button. The Links dialog box
3 In the Links dialog box, if other links already exist on this document, click
the New icon
to create a new link.
4 Type a name for the link in the URL display text field. Since the name
appears in the link, it should be descriptive and informative to help users
identify the target of the link.
166 Linking to reports and documents from a mobile document
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
4
Using links in documents
To define the link
5 Perform the appropriate steps below, depending on whether you are
linking to a web page or to a report/document:
•
To link to a web page:
a Select Navigate to this URL. This option is available only if you
selected to create a link from a text field or image.
b Type the target URL in the field below Navigate to this URL.
c
•
Continue this procedure at To define additional links and
determine link behavior, page 169.
To link to a screen on the mobile device:
a Select Perform this.
b From the Perform this drop-down list, select the screen to link to.
c
•
Continue this procedure at To define additional links and
determine link behavior, page 169.
To link to a report or document:
a Select Run this report or document.
b Click the browse button (...) below Run this report or document
to find and select the target report or document.
To apply prompt answers to targets that contain prompts
6 The box below Run this report or document contains a list of any
prompts included in the target report/document. Select a target prompt
from the box.
7 Select a prompt answer method from the drop-down list. For examples of
each prompt answer method, see Specifying how prompts are answered
in the target, page 169.
•
Answer with the same prompt from the source: Select this option
if you want to use the same prompt answers for both the source report
and the target report/document. This option requires that both the
source and target documents use the same prompt.
•
Prompt user: Select this option if you want the user to type prompt
answers after he taps the link to run the target report/document.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Linking to reports and documents from a mobile document
167
4
Using links in documents
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
•
Answer with an empty answer: Select this option if you want to
ignore the prompt in the target report/document. The prompt is not
answered. This option requires that the prompt in the target is not
required. If the prompt in the target is required, the user is prompted
to provide an answer.
•
Use default answer: Select this option if you want the prompt in the
target to use the default answer defined by the prompt’s designer. This
option requires that a default answer is defined for the prompt in the
target.
The following methods are not intended to be used with buttons. For a
button, use one of the previous methods.
•
Answer dynamically: Select this option if you want to answer the
prompt using the object selected in the source. This option is only
available for attribute element prompts and value prompts.
•
Answer using current unit: Select this option if you want to answer
the prompt using the object selected in the source. This option is only
available for hierarchy prompts.
•
Answer using all valid units: Select this option if you want to answer
the prompt in the target with any object to the left of or above the
object that the user selects in the source document. This method
passes all pertinent selections in the source, rather than just the
selection made for the link. This option is available only for hierarchy
prompts.
8 For each prompt in the target report/document, repeat the step above.
To specify the prompt answer method for prompts not in the list
9 Any other prompts are those prompts that are not in the target report/
document when you are creating the link. For example, these prompts
can include prompts added to the target later. By default, the Prompt
user answer method is selected for these prompts, but you can change
the method. To do this, follow the steps below:
a Select Any other prompts in the list.
b Select a prompt answer method from the list; these are the only
methods available for the Any other prompts option. For examples of
each answer method, see Specifying how prompts are answered in
the target, page 169.

Answer with the same prompt from the source

Prompt user (default)
168 Linking to reports and documents from a mobile document
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
4
Using links in documents

Answer with an empty answer

Use default answer
To apply selector values to a target document that contains selectors
10 Choose a selector value method from the Pass all selector values
drop-down list. For an example of passing selector values, see Passing
selector values from the source to the target, page 171.
•
To match selector values by the selector’s source attribute (that is, the
object displayed in the selector), select Match Selectors by Source
Attribute.
•
To match selector values by the name of the selector, select Match
Selectors by Control Name.
To define additional links and determine link behavior
11 Repeat the steps above if you want to create additional links. You can
create multiple links on the same object.
12 Select the Open in new window check box to have the target report/
document open in a new window. This allows the target and the source
documents to be visible simultaneously. If this check box is cleared, the
target report/document or web page opens and replaces the source
document.
13 If the object has more than one link, select the link that you want to make
the default link, and click the Set as Default icon
. When a user taps
the object, the default link is automatically used. To access other links,
the user tabs and holds the object, which displays a list of links that he
can choose from.
14 Click OK to return to the source document and to save your link.
Specifying how prompts are answered in the target
section contains only a brief overview of prompt answer
 This
methods. For more detailed descriptions of the different prompt
answer methods, including examples, see the Linking Documents
chapter of the Report Services Document Creation Guide. For
background information on prompts, see the description of prompt
types in Building Query Objects and Queries chapter in the Basic
Reporting Guide.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Linking to reports and documents from a mobile document
169
4
Using links in documents
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
To pass parameters to the target, the target must contain a prompt. When
you create a link, you define how the target’s prompt is answered, by
selecting one of the following prompt answer methods:
•
Answer with the same prompt from the source. The same prompt
answers that were used to execute the source are used in the target. This
option requires that the source and target use the same prompt. If the
same prompt does not exist in the source and in the target, the user is
prompted to provide an answer when the target is executed.
•
Prompt user. When the target is executed, the user is prompted to
provide answers manually.
•
Answer with an empty answer. The prompt in the target is ignored,
which means that the prompt is not answered. No prompt answer is
provided from the source and the user is not prompted to provide
answers.
prompt must not be required, because if the prompt is
 The
required, the user is prompted to provide an answer when the
target report is executed by clicking the link.
The Answer with an empty answer method, when used in conjunction
with the dynamic prompt answer method, allows a source document to
answer one prompt in a target with the user selection, while ignoring any
other prompts.
•
Use default answer. The prompt is answered by the default prompt
answer for the prompt in the target. If the target prompt does not have a
default answer, the Answer with an empty answer method is used. In
this case, the prompt is not answered, unless it is required, in which case
the user is prompted to provide an answer.
The following prompt answer methods are not intended to be used with
buttons, since a button does not select an object in the source. If you use one
of them with a button, the user is prompted for an answer. For a button, use
one of the methods described above.
•
Answer dynamically. The object selected in the source is passed to the
prompt in the target. If this object does not answer the target prompt, the
Answer with an empty answer method is used. In this case, the prompt
is not answered, unless it is required, in which case the user is prompted
to provide an answer.
Available only for attribute element prompts and value prompts.
•
A hierarchy prompt allows users to select prompt answers from one or
more attribute elements from one or more attributes. This prompt gives
users the largest number of attribute elements to choose from when they
170 Linking to reports and documents from a mobile document
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Using links in documents
4
answer the prompt to define their filtering criteria. The Answer using all
valid units prompt answer method passes selections made on the source
document, rather than just the selection made for the link, to the target.
To restrict the prompt answer to just the selected attribute element, use
the Answer using current unit prompt answer method. Like the Answer
dynamically method, only the attribute element that is selected is passed
to the target.
These two prompt answer methods are available only for hierarchy
prompts.


Answer using current unit. The prompt is answered using the object
selected in the source. If the user selects an attribute header rather
than a specific attribute element, the Answer with an empty answer
method is used. In this case, the prompt is not answered, unless it is
required, in which case the user is prompted to provide an answer.
Answer using all valid units. Any object to the left of or above the
user selection in the source is used as the prompt answer for the
target. In other words, this method passes all the selections made on
the source, rather than just the selection made for the link. If the user
does not select any valid objects (for example, the user selects an
attribute header rather than a specific attribute element), the Empty
answer method is used. That is, the prompt is not answered, unless it
is required, in which case the user is prompted.
You can select a prompt answer method for prompts that are not in the target
when you are creating the link. These can be either:
•
Prompts added to the target after the link is created
•
Prompts that are created as the result of an answer to one of the original
prompts in the target, such as a prompt-in-prompt answer
These prompts are listed as the Any other prompt option in the list of
prompts in the Link Editor.
Passing selector values from the source to the target
A selector allows each user to interact with a document to display only the
subset of data that he is interested in or only specific attribute elements or
metrics. For background information on selectors, see the description of
selector types, including examples and steps to create them, in the Selectors
chapter in the Dashboards and Widgets Creation Guide.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Linking to reports and documents from a mobile document
171
4
Using links in documents
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
The selector values that the user chooses in the source document can be
passed to the selectors in the target document.
For example, the Regional Revenue document contains a selector for Region,
so that the user can view revenue for a specific region. The document
contains a link to the Category Revenue by Region document, which also
contains a Region selector. If you select Central in the selector, only the
Central region, with its revenue, is displayed in the document. If you tap the
link for the Category Revenue by Region document, that document is
displayed. The selector is set to Central, the same as the selector in the
Regional Revenue document. Only Central’s data is displayed, by category.
To pass selector values from the source document to the target document,
both the source and the target must contain the same selector. This means
that either both documents must contain a selector with the same name
(such as Region Selector), or both documents must contain a selector that
uses the same source object (the object displayed in the selector, such as
Region). When you create a link that passes selector values, you can choose
to match the selector values either by the selector name or the source object.
Creating a link URL to specify page-by, report view, layout, or
grouping for the target
The Link Editor provides a quick and easy way to link to documents and
reports. For steps to create a link using the Link Editor, see Creating a link
for a mobile document, page 165.
For a document on an iPhone or iPad, you can specify a report’s page-by or
report view, or a document’s layout or grouping. For a document on an
Android device, you can specify a report’s report view. (The report view is
whether a report is displayed as a grid, a graph, or both a grid and graph.) To
specify these parameters, use the hyperlink properties and create the link
URLs manually, by using the object ID and link syntax, as described below.
Prerequisites
Before creating links, create any target documents and reports, and use the
following procedure to obtain their IDs:
1 Navigate to the folder location of the report or document.
172 Linking to reports and documents from a mobile document
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
4
Using links in documents
2 Right-click the report or document, and select Properties. The Properties
dialog box is displayed, with the object's ID displayed in the ID field. You
can highlight and copy this ID to use in a link URL.
To create a link using a manual URL
1 In MicroStrategy Web, open the document in Design Mode or Editable
Mode.
2 To use a text field for the hyperlink, complete the following steps (if you
are adding an image, skip this step):
a From the Insert menu, select Text.
b Click in the section of the document where you want to place the text
field. If you click and drag in the section, you can size the text field.
that the area of a link is large enough to recognize a
 Touserensure
selecting it, make sure it has a height and width of at least
40 pixels.
c
Type the text to be displayed to users into the text field. You can add
static text, dynamic text (in the form of data fields and auto text
codes), or a combination to the text field:



To add static text, type the static text into the text field.
To add a data field, drag and drop a dataset object from the
Dataset Objects panel into the text field.
To add an auto text code, from the Insert menu, select Auto-text,
then select the code to insert.
background information about adding data fields and
 For
auto-text codes to documents, see the Report Services
Document Creation Guide.
3 To use an image for the hyperlink, complete the following steps:
a From the Insert menu, select Image.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Linking to reports and documents from a mobile document
173
4
Using links in documents
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
b Click in the section of the document where you want to place the
image. If you click and drag in the section, you can size the image. The
Properties and Formatting dialog box opens.
that the area of a link is large enough to recognize a
 Touserensure
selecting it, make sure it has a height and width of at least
40 pixels.
c
Type the address of the image file to insert in the Source field.
d Click OK. The image appears in the document.
background information about adding images to
 For
documents, see the Report Services Document Creation Guide.
4 Right-click the image or text field, and select Properties and
Formatting. The Properties and Formatting dialog box opens.
5 From the left, click General, then select the Is Hyperlink check box.
6 Type the link URL in the Hyperlink field:
•
To have the link execute a document, use the syntax:
http://MSTRMobileURL?&src=source&evt=
2048001&currentViewMedia=2&documentID=objectID
•
To have the link execute a report, use the syntax:
http://MSTRMobileURL?&src=source&evt=
4001&reportViewMode=view&reportID=objectID
•
To add additional parameters to the URL, such as providing answers
for the target document’s prompts, see Using links to display
document layouts and group data, and run reports and documents
on other servers and projects, page 175.
Replace the italicized variables, as summarized below:
Variable
Replace With
MSTRMobileURL
To use an absolute path to your Mobile Server, use one of the following:
• For .NET
MobileServer/MicroStrategy/asp/Main.aspx
• For J2EE
MobileServer/MicroStrategy/servlet/mstrWeb
Replace Mobileserver with the name of your MicroStrategy Mobile Server.
To use a relative path to your Mobile Server, use mstrWeb.
174 Linking to reports and documents from a mobile document
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Using links in documents
Variable
Replace With
source
The page component that should handle the action and the event:
• For a document using J2EE format, mstrWeb.2048001
• For a document using .NET format, Main.aspx.2048001
• For a report using J2EE format, mstrWeb.4001
• For a report using .NET format, Main.aspx.4001
view
Report view mode:
• For grid view: 1
• For graph view: 2
• For grid and graph view: 3
objectID
The object ID of the target document or report
4
7 Click OK to return to the document.
Using links to display document layouts and group data, and
run reports and documents on other servers and projects
Once you have created a link to run a report or a document on an iPhone or
iPad, you can add parameters to the URL to perform additional tasks, such as
providing answers for prompts in the linked document, or specifying the
layout to display when a document is run.
For Android and iOS devices, you can run reports or documents from a
different project or server. The project or server that you link to must be
defined in the mobile configuration for the device.
The table below lists the tasks you can perform, and the syntax for the link
parameters to perform them. You can add these parameters to a link URL by
separating each parameter with an ampersand (&). The link parameters are
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Linking to reports and documents from a mobile document
175
4
Using links in documents
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
case sensitive. For example, the following URL contains parameters to
display the first layout in a document:
Main.aspx?evt=2048001&currentViewMedia=2&documentID=
E8663E7A4D8CDF05C060129D0061692&layoutIndex=0
Task
Syntax
Run a report or
document from a
different project or
server
Server=servername&Project=projectname&uid=
username&pwd=password
Replace servername, projectname, username, and password
with the name of the server, project, and the login name and password to use to
log in respectively.
By default, if the URL does not specify a server and project, the current server and
project are used. You can specify these parameters, called session parameters, to
execute a report or document in a different server or project, and provide the
appropriate login name and password.
For more information on session parameters, see the Customizing MicroStrategy
Web section, in Part I: Fundamentals of Customization in the Web Software
Development Kit, available in the MicroStrategy Developer Library (MSDL), which
is part of the MicroStrategy SDK.
Display a specific
layout in a
document
Specify the
group-by element in
a document
layoutIndex=layout
Replace layout with the number of the layout you want to display. The first
layout in the document is 0, the second is 1, and so on.
groupByElements=
groupByUnitID;groupByUnitType;groupByElementID
Replace the italicized variables with the following:
• groupByUnitID: The ID of the group-by attribute or consolidation. You
can use {&[email protected]}, to provide the ID automatically.
Replace AttributeName with the name of the attribute or consolidation.
• groupByUnitType: Use 12 for an attribute, or 47 for a consolidation.
• groupByElementID: The ID of the group-by element. You can use
{&[email protected]}, to provide the ID
automatically. Replace AttributeName with the name of the attribute or
consolidation.
You can specify multiple group-by elements by separating each set of group-by
parameters with a caret (^), as follows:
groupByElements=
groupByUnitID1;groupByUnitType1;groupByElementID1
^groupByUnitID2;groupByUnitType2;groupByElementID
2
176 Linking to reports and documents from a mobile document
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
4
Using links in documents
Task
Syntax
Specify the page-by
element in a report
pageByElements=
pageByUnitID;pageByUnitType;pageByElementID
Replace the italicized variables with the following:
• pageByUnitID: The ID of the page-by attribute or consolidation. You can
use {&[email protected]}, to provide the ID automatically.
Replace AttributeName with the name of the attribute or consolidation.
• pageByUnitType: Use 12 for an attribute, or 47 for a consolidation.
• pageByElementID: The ID of the page-by attribute or consolidation. You
can use {&[email protected]}, to provide the ID
automatically. Replace AttributeName with the name of the attribute or
consolidation.
You can specify multiple page-by elements by separating each set of page-by
parameters with a caret (^), as follows:
pageByElements=
pageByUnitID1;pageByUnitType1;pageByElementID1^pa
geByUnitID2;pageByUnitType2;pageByElementID2
For information on finding the ID of an individual attribute element, see To obtain
the ID of a specific attribute element in a document below.
To obtain the ID of a specific attribute element in a document
1 To obtain the ID of a specific element in an attribute, you must first
obtain the ID of the attribute. Navigate to the folder location of the
attribute.
2 Right-click the attribute, then select Properties. The Properties dialog
box is displayed, with the attribute's ID displayed in the ID field.
3 Highlight the ID, then copy it to the clipboard.
4 Open the document that contains the attribute in Editable Mode.
5 Right-click the header of the attribute in the Grid/Graph, then point to
Attribute Forms, and select ID. The ID of each element in the attribute is
displayed.
6 The full attribute element ID is the ID of the element’s attribute, followed
by a colon (:) and the ID of the element displayed in the grid. For
example:
8D679D4B11D3E4981000E787EC6DE8A4:2
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Linking to reports and documents from a mobile document
177
4
Using links in documents
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Using links to access features within the
MicroStrategy Mobile application
You can use links in a document to access specific features within the
MicroStrategy Mobile application for iPhone or iPad. For example, you can
add a link to display the My Reports folder or email a screenshot of the
document.
can use the Link Editor to quickly create the following links,
 You
instead of typing the URL into a hyperlink, to display the:
•
Help
•
Home screen
•
Report List
•
Shared Library
•
Status screen
•
Settings screen
For steps, see Creating a link for a mobile document, page 165.
The procedure to create the following hyperlinks is identical to that for
creating hyperlinks to the device’s installed applications. For steps, see To
create a hyperlink to an application on the device, page 161.
The table below lists the types of links you can create, and the URL to use to
create them.
Task
URL
View a folder
mstr://?evt=2001&folderID=foldernumber
Replace foldernumber with the ID of the folder you want to display.
Display the Shared
Reports folder
mstr://?evt=2001&systemFolder=7
Display the My Reports
folder
mstr://?evt=2001&systemFolder=20
Email a screenshot of the
document
mstr://?evt=3037
The screenshot is added to the email as an attachment. To add a subject to
the email, add &emailSubject=subject to the end of the URL, then
replace subject with the subject. For example, to send an email with the
subject “Your requested report”, type mstr://?evt=
3037&emailSubject=Your+requested+report.
178 Using links to access features within the MicroStrategy Mobile application
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
4
Using links in documents
Task
URL
Annotate and Share the
report or document
mstr://?evt=3175
Print the current document
mstr://?evt=3103
Print a target document
mstr://evt=2048001&src=source.2048001&visMode=
0&currentViewMedia=20&documentID=objectID
Where:
• source is the page component that should handle the action and the
event.
• objectID is the object ID of the target document.
Display the Help
mstr://?evt=3994
Display the Home screen
mstr://?evt=3995
Display the Shared Library
mstr://?evt=3996
Display the Reports or
Subscriptions screen, as
applicable
mstr://?evt=3997
Display the Status screen
mstr://?evt=3998
Display the Settings
screen
mstr://?evt=3999
Log out the user
mstr://?evt=4000
Connect to the user’s
MicroStrategy Analytics
Express folder
mstr://?evt=3992
Display the Analytics
Express menu
mstr://?evt=3990
Display a menu containing
Analytics Express
dashboards that were
recently shared with the
user
mstr://?evt=3991
Return to the previously
viewed document
mstr://?evt=3124
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Note: If the user has not configured an Analytics Express account, the
Analytics Express login page is displayed
Using links to access features within the MicroStrategy Mobile application
179
4
Using links in documents
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Task
URL
Select a specific panel in a
panel stack
mstr://?evt=2048076&psName=PANEL_STACK_NAME&pName=
PANEL_NAME
Replace the italicized variables as follows:
• PANEL_STACK_NAME: The name of the panel stack to target
• PANEL_NAME: The name of the panel to select
To select panels from multiple panel stacks, use the following format:
mstr://?evt=2048076&psKey=
PanelStack1|PanelStack2|…&pKey=PanelK1|PanelK2|…
Replace the italicized variables as follows:
• PanelStack1, PanelStack2, etc.: The names of the panel stacks to
target.
• PanelK1, PanelK2, etc.: The names of the panels to select, in the
order of the panel stack. For example, PanelK1 is a panel in
PanelStack1.
Display a specific
Information Window
mstr://?evt=2048500&panelName=Name
Display a selection screen
that allows you to specify
the element to use to
group data
mstr://gb/?e={&[email protected]}&a=
{&[email protected]}&s=style
Re-prompt the document
Replace Name with the name of the panel stack you have created to use as
the Information Window.
Replace AttributeName with the name of the attribute you want to use
to group data. Replace style with one of the following:
• To display the attribute elements in a directory-like list: 0
• To display the attribute elements on a wheel: 1
mstr://pr
Linking from documents with buttons and tab
bars
A button can send a user to the various screens, such as the Home screen or
the Report List, on an iPad, iPhone, or Android device. A button can run a
report or document, or open a web page or Information Window. An
Information Window lets users view additional information in a pop-up
window. In MicroStrategy Web, a button can open a web page, or run a
report or document.
180 Linking from documents with buttons and tab bars
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
4
Using links in documents
For example, the document shown below contains several buttons. Notice
that all the buttons are displayed in white.
A button can change its appearance after a user taps it. When a user taps the
Customer button, for example, the button changes to blue, as shown below.
This is referred to as its highlight state. The button’s initial state (when it is
not selected) is referred to as its normal state.
A customer analysis document is displayed. If a user tapped the Sales
Analysis button instead, a regional sales document is displayed. If a user taps
the button with the envelope, the email program is launched.
The different button styles determine whether a caption, icon, or both are
displayed. A caption is the text that describes the button’s action. The icon is
a small image that represents the button’s action. If both a caption and an
icon are displayed, the button style also determines where the caption and
icon are located in relation to each other. The icon can be to the left or the
right of the caption, or it can be above the caption.
You can also select the custom style, which allows you to select an image to
display as the button. The image can be any shape, size, and color. The image
is displayed on your mobile device without any additional formatting. You
can use two different images, one for the normal state and the other for the
highlighted state. The example above uses custom style buttons.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Linking from documents with buttons and tab bars
181
4
Using links in documents
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Each button can have more than one link. The same button can be linked to
multiple web pages, reports, and documents. If a default link has been
defined, that link is executed when the button is tapped. To open a list of
links, tap and hold the button. If a default link has not been defined, tapping
the button opens the list of links.
You can add a single button to a document, or add multiple buttons with
different formatting in different locations on the document; see Creating a
button to link from a Mobile document, page 186 for steps. For documents
displayed on an iOS device, you can create a bar of buttons that are all
formatted the same, called a tab bar. A tab bar displays at the bottom of the
screen, similar to tab bars in other iOS applications.
You create the tab bar as a navigation document, which contains only the tab
bar. This allows the tab bar to display all the time, even when a user changes
panel stacks or layouts on a document, or switches to a different document.
In effect, you are creating a navigation system for the set of Mobile
documents that are linked with the tab bar. The tab bar is shown only when
navigating the documents linked in the tab bar. The tab bar is not displayed if
either of the following cases:
•
A user opens a linked document from a folder, not from the navigation
document or tab bar.
•
A user opens a document that is not linked in the tab bar.
The navigation document becomes the home page or launch site for this set
of documents. When a user opens the navigation document, the tab bar and
the document linked in the first button are displayed.
182 Linking from documents with buttons and tab bars
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
4
Using links in documents
For example, a navigation document, called Store Dashboards, has been
created for a project. The user opens Store Dashboards, and the Overview
dashboard is displayed, along with the tab bar, as shown below:
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Linking from documents with buttons and tab bars
183
4
Using links in documents
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Notice that the button for Overview is selected in the tab bar. The user taps
the button for Customer, which causes that document to display, as shown
below:
Notice that the button for Customer is selected in the tab bar, and there is no
Back button at the upper left.
Creating a tab bar to hold buttons
A tab bar is a bar of navigation buttons, displayed at the bottom of an iOS
document. The tab bar is displayed all the time, even when a user changes
panel stacks or layouts on a document, or switches to a different document.
In effect, you are creating a navigation system for a set of Mobile documents.
You create the tab bar as a navigation document, which contains only the tab
bar. You can customize the background tint of the tab bar, and the color of
the selected button’s icon (the highlight state). When the tab bar is displayed
on a mobile device, the caption and icon colors use a generic iOS format to
enhance readability. In the examples above, the background of the tab bar
has a tint of black, with the selected button’s icon highlighted in blue. The
184 Linking from documents with buttons and tab bars
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Using links in documents
4
selected button’s caption is automatically displayed in white, while the
captions of the other buttons automatically remain gray.
You can add buttons to the tab bar, remove buttons from the tab bar, and
move the buttons around on the tab bar. For each button on the tab bar, you
define the link and the icon. If you define more than five buttons for an
iPhone document or eight for an iPad document, a button labeled More is
automatically added to the tab bar.
Take into account the height of the tab bar, which is 49 points, when you
design a document that will be linked from a tab bar.
Best practices for creating the button image
The button’s image is used by iOS to create the icon that is displayed in
Mobile, so you do not need to create a full-color image for the button. Some
best practices to create the image for the button include:
•
Use pure white with the appropriate alpha transparency.
•
Do not use a drop shadow.
•
Use anti-aliasing.
•
Bevels should be 90°. The bevel should look like a light source is
positioned at the top of the image.
To ensure that the tab bar icon renders sharply on devices with different
resolutions, follow these suggestions:
•
If you are designing the tab bar to be displayed on a high-resolution
(retina display) device, design your button icon to be about 60 x 60
pixels. Add the text @2x as the suffix of the image name, for example,
[email protected] For devices with very high-resolution screens, such as the
iPhone 6 Plus, use the suffix @3x. The image is shown as designed on a
high resolution device, without any stretching or shrinking at the pixel
level. On low resolution devices, the image is scaled to support the lower
resolution.
•
If you are designing the tab bar for low-resolution devices, design your
button icon to be about 30 x 30 pixels. Do not include the @2x suffix in
the image name. The image is shown as designed on low resolution
devices, without any stretching or shrinking at the pixel level. On high
resolution devices, the image is scaled to four times its original size at the
pixel level, causing the image to look blurry.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Linking from documents with buttons and tab bars
185
4
Using links in documents
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
To add a tab bar for an iPad or iPhone document
1 In MicroStrategy Web, click the MicroStrategy icon
at the top of any
page and select New Document. The Create Document page opens.
2 Select either Navigation for iPad or Navigation for iPhone, and click
OK. The Document Editor opens in Design Mode. A tab bar is already
displayed in the document template, with two buttons, in the Document
Footer. No other document sections are available.
To select the tab bar’s colors
3 Right-click the tab bar (not a button) and select Properties and
Formatting. The Properties and Formatting dialog box opens.
4 From the left, select Color and Lines.
5 From the Color drop-down list, select the tint of the tab bar’s
background.
6 From the Highlight state color drop-down list, select the color of a
button’s icon after it is tapped. All buttons on the tab bar use the same
color in their highlight state (after being tapped).
7 Click OK to save your changes and return to the document.
tab bar and buttons do not change color in Design Mode; the
 The
colors apply when the document is displayed in MicroStrategy
Mobile.
Now you can add buttons to the tab bar, as described in Creating a button to
link from a Mobile document below. You can add as many buttons as
necessary. If you define more than five buttons for an iPhone document or
eight for an iPad document, a button labeled More is automatically added to
the tab bar.
Creating a button to link from a Mobile document
Prerequisites
•
If you are adding a button to a tab bar, you must have already created the
tab bar. For steps, see Creating a tab bar to hold buttons, page 184.
186 Linking from documents with buttons and tab bars
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
•
4
Using links in documents
If you are using an icon on the button, you need to know the location of
the images to be used. You can specify a single image, or you can specify
an image to display before the button is tapped and a different image
after it is tapped. If the button is part of a tab bar, the images should be
monochromatic for the best display.
To add a button
1 In MicroStrategy Web, open the document in Design Mode or Editable
Mode.
2 You can add a stand-alone button or add a button to a tab bar:
•
To add a stand-alone button, from the Insert menu, point to Button,
and then select a style. When you move the cursor to the Layout area,
the pointer becomes crosshairs. Click in the desired location in the
Layout area to add a button of the default size. If you click and drag in
the Layout area, you can size the button.
•
To add a button to a tab bar, click the Add Button icon
on the tab
bar. A new button is added to the tab bar, with the correct size.
3 If the selected button style displays a caption, double-click the caption
text box. Type the caption to display, and press ENTER.
4 Right-click the button, and select Properties and Formatting. The
Properties and Formatting dialog box opens.
5 From the left, select Button.
 You can change the button style, if the button is stand alone.
6 If the selected button style displays an icon or a custom image, specify the
source of the images.
•
The normal state is displayed before the user taps it. Type the location
and file name of the image to display in the normal state, in the
Normal state source field.
•
The highlighted (or selected) state is displayed after the user taps it.
Type the location and file name of the image to display in the
highlighted state, in the Highlight state source field.
the button is displayed in a tab bar, the images should be
 Ifmonochromatic.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Linking from documents with buttons and tab bars
187
4
Using links in documents
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
7 If the button style is set to Caption only, you can determine whether the
button is displayed as highlighted only:
•
To display the button as highlighted only after a user taps it, clear the
Show button in highlight state by default check box.
•
To display the button as highlighted only, select the Show button in
highlight state by default check box. When a user taps the button,
the action is triggered, but the button does not change.
8 Click OK to save your changes and return to the document.
Next, you define the link or the Information Window for the button. For
steps to define the link, see Creating a link for a mobile document, page 165.
For steps to define an Information Window, see Providing additional
information to users: Information Windows, page 40.
Formatting a stand-alone button
To format a stand-alone button, you can:
•
Size the button
•
Select the button’s background color before and after it is tapped
•
Select whether or not to display a border around the button when the
document is viewed in MicroStrategy Web
•
Format the font of the button’s caption
•
Select the button’s caption font color before and after the button is tapped
This formatting applies to a stand-alone button, because a tab bar specifies
the same formatting for all of its buttons. Steps to format the tab bar’s colors
and the caption’s font are included in the procedure to create a tab bar; see
To add a tab bar for an iPad or iPhone document, page 186. For a button
with a custom style, you can size the button, but all other formatting comes
from the image that you select.
Prerequisite
Before you can format a stand-alone button, you must have created the
button. For steps, see Creating a button to link from a Mobile document,
page 186.
188 Linking from documents with buttons and tab bars
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
4
Using links in documents
To format a stand-alone button
1 In MicroStrategy Web, open the document in Design Mode or Editable
Mode.
2 Right-click the button and select Properties and Formatting. The
Properties and Formatting dialog box opens.
To size the button
3 From the left, select Layout.
4 In the Size area, type the Width and Height in the fields. The icon and
caption, if both are used, are automatically resized to maintain their
proportions in the button.
To select the button’s colors
These options are unavailable for a button with a custom style, since the
image is displayed as is.
5 From the left, select Color and Lines.
6 From the Style drop-down, select one of the following:
•
Flat
•
Glossy
7 From the Normal state color drop-down, select the button’s color before
it is tapped.
8 From the Highlight state color drop-down, select the button’s color after
it is tapped.
9 Determine whether the button has a border, by doing one of the
following:
•
To hide borders, select None.
•
To display borders, select All. From the drop-down list, select the
color of the borders around the button.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Linking from documents with buttons and tab bars
189
4
Using links in documents
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
To format the caption’s font
These options are unavailable for a button with a custom style, since the
image is displayed as is.
10 From the left, select Font.
11 Select the Font, Style, and Size of the caption text.
12 From the Normal state color drop-down, select the caption’s color
before the button is tapped.
13 From the Highlight state color drop-down, select the caption’s color
after the button is tapped.
14 Click OK to save your changes.
Storing links on NFC tags on Android devices
You can store a link on Near Field Communications (NFC) tags to open the
Home screen, Settings screen, Help screen, or the contents of the Shared
Library folder on an Android device through MicroStrategy Mobile. An NFC
tag is a small piece of hardware that broadcasts short-range wireless signals
to compatible devices. When a Mobile user places her NFC capable Android
device within the required range of the NFC tag, a link is broadcast to her
device. This link opens MicroStrategy Mobile on the Android device and
displays the specified screen.
Mobile user can only view the projects that her device has been
 Aconfigured
to access. When creating a link for NFC tags, ensure that
your target audience is using a mobile configuration that provides
access to the specified report, document, or folder.
To store a link on your NFC tags, use a third-party NFC programming app on
an NFC capable Android device. The table below lists the types of links you
can create on NFC tags, and the URL to use to create them. The URLs in the
table open the default MicroStrategy Mobile application. If your organization
190 Storing links on NFC tags on Android devices
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
4
Using links in documents
has a customized version of MicroStrategy Mobile, replace mstr:// with
your customized URL prefix.
Task
URL
Display the Home screen
mstr://?evt=3995
Display the Settings screen
mstr://?evt=3999
Display the Help screen
mstr://?evt=3994
Display the contents of the Shared Library folder
mstr://?evt=3996
Display the previously viewed screen (Back)
mstr://?evt=3124
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Storing links on NFC tags on Android devices
191
4
Using links in documents
192 Storing links on NFC tags on Android devices
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
5
5.
ADMINISTERING
MICROSTRATEGY MOBILE
Introduction
This section explains how to install and configure MicroStrategy Mobile on
an Intelligence Server, and how to install and configure the MicroStrategy
Mobile application on mobile devices. It also explains how to subscribe to
reports, and the ways in which administrators can manage multiple
subscriptions simultaneously.
Prerequisites
•
This section is primarily intended for system administrators. As such,
readers are assumed to have various MicroStrategy system administrator
privileges.
The topics covered in this section include:
•
Overview: MicroStrategy Mobile architecture, page 194
•
Installing and configuring Mobile Server, page 195
•
Working with projects and managing Intelligence Server, page 203
•
Configuring and viewing logs and statistics, page 214
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
193
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
•
Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application,
page 222
•
The Mobile subscription workflow, page 283
•
Managing Mobile report subscriptions, page 286
•
Enabling real time updates for BlackBerry, page 298
•
Troubleshooting MicroStrategy Mobile, page 302
Overview: MicroStrategy Mobile architecture
The following diagram shows MicroStrategy Mobile as a part of the
MicroStrategy architecture:
There are two main components in a MicroStrategy Mobile deployment:
•
The MicroStrategy Mobile client applications, installed on an iPhone,
iPad, Android device, or BlackBerry. The client applications send
requests for reports and documents to Mobile Server, and display the
reports when they are received. For steps to deploy and configure client
applications, see Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile
application, page 222.
194 Overview: MicroStrategy Mobile architecture
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
•
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
MicroStrategy Mobile Server, which performs the following functions:


Maintains the configurations for devices, and connects the devices to
projects on Intelligence Server.
Receives reports and documents from Intelligence Server, and
delivers them to the iPhone, iPad, Android device, or BlackBerry
Enterprise Server (BES).
The BES handles all interaction between MicroStrategy Mobile Server
and the BlackBerry devices, and may encrypt the data transmitted to
the devices.
For steps to install Mobile Server, see Installing and configuring Mobile
Server, page 195.
Installing and configuring Mobile Server
To install MicroStrategy Mobile Server, select the MicroStrategy Mobile
Server component of MicroStrategy Mobile during your MicroStrategy
installation. For system requirements and specific instructions on how to
install or upgrade MicroStrategy, see either the MicroStrategy Installation
and Configuration Guide or the MicroStrategy Upgrade Guide.
MicroStrategy Mobile affects several specific areas that may require an
administrator’s attention. These include:
•
Authentication settings for the Mobile Server application, page 195
•
Privileges and permissions, page 196
•
SSL encryption, page 197
•
Client authentication with a certificate server, page 197
•
Destination folder for the Photo Uploader widget and Signature
Capture input control, page 202
Authentication settings for the Mobile Server application
following instructions apply only to authenticating the Mobile
 The
Server application on the machine that it runs on. For instructions on
setting up user authentication for your MicroStrategy environment,
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Installing and configuring Mobile Server
195
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
such as LDAP or single sign-on authentication, refer to the System
Administration Guide.
If you are using the ASP.NET version of Mobile Server, make sure that you
configure the IIS authentication settings for the Mobile Server application.
Otherwise certain reports and documents may display incorrectly or fail to
execute.
You must make sure that IIS uses anonymous authentication to access all
directories at the Mobile Server application level. In addition, you must
enable integrated Windows authentication for all directories except the
following image directories:
•
MicroStrategyMobile/asp/images
•
MicroStrategyMobile/images
Integrated Windows authentication must be disabled for these directories.
For instructions on how to configure the authentication settings in your
version of IIS, see the IIS documentation.
Privileges and permissions
Reports viewed in Mobile are subject to the same security restrictions as
reports viewed in any other MicroStrategy client. In particular, access
control lists (ACLs) and security filters are applied to reports viewed in
Mobile in the same way as in MicroStrategy Web or Developer.
To view reports in Mobile, users must have the Use MicroStrategy Mobile
privilege for all projects containing reports they want to view. In addition, to
view Report Services documents in Mobile, users must have the Mobile View
Documents privilege for all projects containing documents they want to view.
Both these privileges can be found in the MicroStrategy Mobile privilege
group.
It is the responsibility of the system administrator to ensure that
MicroStrategy Mobile users have the privileges and permissions necessary to
view reports and documents. In general, this means that users should have
the Execute permission for any reports they are subscribed to, and for any
objects contained in those reports.
For information on setting user privileges and object permissions, see the
Setting Up User Security chapter in the System Administration Guide, or
196 Installing and configuring Mobile Server
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
see the MicroStrategy Developer Help (formerly the MicroStrategy Desktop
Help). For a complete list of user privileges, see the List of Privileges chapter
in the Supplemental Reference for System Administration.
SSL encryption
MicroStrategy Mobile is equipped to take advantage of Secure Socket Layer
(SSL) encryption, to ensure that your data remain secure at all stages of
transmission. SSL transmissions can be identified by the https:// prefix,
instead of the standard http:// prefix.
For detailed instructions on configuring Mobile Server to use SSL, see the
Enabling Secure Communication chapter in the System Administration
Guide.
If you are using MicroStrategy Mobile for Android devices, you can specify a
location for trusted certificates in the Connectivity Settings tab in the Mobile
Configuration.
If you are using MicroStrategy Mobile for the BlackBerry, all communication
between the BlackBerry and the BlackBerry Enterprise Server (BES) is
encrypted. Communication between the BES and Mobile Server is only
encrypted if you are using an SSL connection. The use of SSL is necessary for
security if the BES and Mobile Server are not behind the same firewall, or if
your configuration does not include a BES.
Client authentication with a certificate server
MicroStrategy Mobile Server can use a certificate server to authenticate the
identity of Android and iOS mobile clients. This certificate server can run on
the same application server as the Mobile Server, or on a different one.
When client authentication is enabled and a certificate server is configured, a
valid certificate must be issued to mobile clients that allows them to gain
access to the Mobile Server. This process ensures that each mobile device is
authorized to access the system, and allows you to deny authentication
requests from devices which may have been compromised.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Installing and configuring Mobile Server
197
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
To set up the client certificate server
1 Set up SSL between mobile devices and MicroStrategy Mobile using the
procedure in the Administering MicroStrategy Web and Mobile chapter
in the System Administration Guide.
2 Install the certificate server using the ASP or JSP installation file from
your MicroStrategy installation folder. The ASP files are located in
MicroStrategy\Mobile Server ASPx\CertificateServer. The
JSP file is located in MicroStrategy\Mobile Server JSP\
CertificateServer.war.
 Note the following:
•
To set up a certificate server with Microsoft Internet Information
Services (IIS) 6.0, you must have the Read Scripts and Run Scripts
permissions, and you must deploy the certificate server as a virtual
directory.
•
To set up a certificate server with Microsoft Internet Information
Services (IIS) 7.0 or newer, you must deploy the certificate server
as an application.
3 You must choose a signed certificate from a third party certificate
authority to configure the certificate server. Either use the same
certificate generated for SSL, or obtain a different one.
4 Once you have the certificate, install it on your application server, add it
to a previously created trust list, and enable client authentication. Refer
to your application server documentation for information on installing
the certificate, creating a trust list, and configuring the application server
to use client authentication.
Configuring the certificateServerConfig.xml file
5 Specify the desired Intelligence Server and project name in the
certificateServerConfig.xml file, located by default in
MicroStrategy\Mobile Server ASPx\CertificateServer\
WEB-INF\xml\certificateServerConfig.xml for the ASP
version, or MicroStrategy\Mobile Server JSP\
CertificateServer\WEB-INF\xml\
certificateServerConfig.xml for the JSP version. This
information is used to authenticate clients before they have obtained a
certificate.
198 Installing and configuring Mobile Server
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
6 In the certificateServerConfig.xml file, ensure that the correct
provider is selected. This information is dependent on the MicroStrategy
Mobile Server platform, as displayed in the following example for Tomcat
application servers:
<provider class=
"com.microstrategy.web.certificate.TomcatCertificateP
rovider"/>
7 In the certificateServerConfig.xml file, ensure that the X.509
parameters are correctly configured for your environment.
8 In the certificateServerConfig.xml file, specify your signing
certificate format as either Java Keystore (JKS) or Distinguished
Encoding Rules (DER).
9 To enable the certificate server to revoke specified client certificates, set
up the Certificate Revocation List (CRL) on the application server. Also
configure the CRL Distribution Point (CDP) to designate a URL where the
application server can check for CRLs. Configure the CDPLocation
parameter in the certificateServerConfig.xml file by specifying
the URL for the CRL. Refer to your application server documentation for
information on configuring the CRL and CDP.
Enabling the certificate server in the Mobile configuration
10 When creating your MicroStrategy Mobile configuration, in the iPhone
Settings, iPad Settings, Phone Settings, or Tablet Settings tab, select
the Use Certificate Server check box, and in the text field, specify a URL
for the certificate server. Because the certificate server must be
configured with SSL, ensure that the URL employs the fully qualified
name of the certificate server, and begins with https://, as in the
following examples.
ASP:
https://fully_qualified_domain_name:port/
CertificateServer/asp/certificate.aspx
JSP:
https://fully_qualified_domain_name:port/
CertificateServer
or
https://fully_qualified_domain_name:port/
CertificateServer/servlet/certificate
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Installing and configuring Mobile Server
199
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
where:
•
fully_qualified_domain_name:port is the location and port of
your certificate server. For example,
machine_name.domain.com:8443.
For more information on creating a mobile configuration, see
Configuring MicroStrategy Mobile for iPhone or iPad, page 226 or
Configuring MicroStrategy Mobile for Android, page 237.
Downloading a certificate to a mobile client
11 When a client requires a certificate, the Mobile user is prompted to begin
the download. When a user clicks OK to begin the download, she is
prompted to log in to the project specified in the
certificateServerConfig.xml file.
can also manually download a client certificate from the
 Users
Advanced Settings screen of the MicroStrategy Mobile application.
For more information, see Downloading a client certificate from
the certificate server, page 282.
Managing certificates with the certificate server API
12 To obtain a certificate for each mobile device through the API, use one of
the following URLs.
ASP:
https://fully_qualified_domain_name:port/
CertificateServer/asp/certificate.aspx?action=
GetCertificate&loginParams=
<auth><device_id>mobile_device</
device_id><pkcs12_password>keystore_password</
pkcs12_password><field n="pwd" v="MSTR_password"/
><field n="login" v="MSTR_login"/></auth>
JSP:
https://fully_qualified_domain_name:port/
CertificateServer/servlet/certificate?action=
GetCertificate&loginParams=
<auth><device_id>mobile_device</
device_id><pkcs12_password>keystore_password</
pkcs12_password><field n="pwd" v="MSTR_password"/
><field n="login" v="MSTR_login"/></auth>
200 Installing and configuring Mobile Server
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
5
where:
•
fully_qualified_domain_name:port is the location and port of
your certificate server. For example,
machine_name.domain.com:8443.
•
mobile_device is the UUID of the desired mobile device.
•
keystore_password is the pkcs12 password that is used for the
generated keystore.
•
MSTR_password is the desired user’s MicroStrategy password for the
project specified in certificateServerConfig.xml.
•
MSTR_login is the desired user’s MicroStrategy login for the project
specified in certificateServerConfig.xml.
13 To view a list of certificates on the certificate server through the API, the
application server administrator uses one of two URLs, as displayed in
the examples below.
ASP:
https://fully_qualified_domain_name:port/
CertificateServer/asp/CertificateAdmin.aspx?action=
GetCertificateList
JSP:
https://fully_qualified_domain_name:port/
CertificateServer/servlet/certificateAdmin?action=
GetCertificateList
where fully_qualified_domain_name:port is the location and
port of your certificate server. For example,
machine_name.domain.com:8443.
14 To revoke a specific certificate through the API, the application server
administrator uses one of two URLs, as displayed in the examples below.
ASP:
https://fully_qualified_domain_name:port/
CertificateServer/asp/CertificateAdmin.aspx?action=
RevokeCertificate&serialNumber=serial_number
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Installing and configuring Mobile Server
201
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
JSP:
https://fully_qualified_domain_name:port/servlet/
certificateAdmin?action=
RevokeCertificate&serialNumber=serial_number
where:
•
fully_qualified_domain_name:port is the location and port of
your certificate server. For example,
machine_name.domain.com:8443.
•
serial_number is the serial number of the certificate to be revoked.
This number can be retrieved from the list of certificates.
15 To revoke all certificates for a specific mobile device through the API, the
application server administrator uses one of two URLs, as displayed in
the examples below.
ASP:
https://fully_qualified_domain_name:port/
CertificateServer/asp/CertificateAdmin.aspx?action=
RevokeCertificate&uuid=device_uuid
JSP:
https://fully_qualified_domain_name:port/servlet/
certificateAdmin?action=RevokeCertificate&uuid=
device_uuid
where:
•
fully_qualified_domain_name:port is the location and port of
your certificate server. For example,
machine_name.domain.com:8443.
•
device_uuid is the universally unique identifier of the desired
mobile device.
Destination folder for the Photo Uploader widget and Signature
Capture input control
The Photo Uploader widget allows Mobile users to upload images from their
mobile devices to a central location that is specified in the
microstrategy.xml file on the Mobile Server. Images of signatures
202 Installing and configuring Mobile Server
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
5
provided using the Signature Capture input control in a Transaction
Services-enabled document are also uploaded to this location. By default, the
microstrategy.xml file is located in your MicroStrategy installation
location in MicroStrategy\Mobile Server ASPx\WEB-INF or in
MicroStrategy\Mobile Server JSP\WEB-INF, depending on the
application server that runs your Mobile Server.
Configure the desired location for saved images by specifying a
relative or absolute path in the value field of the
resourcesFolderSavedImage parameter in the
microstrategy.xml file. If you have clustered Mobile Servers in
your environment and you would like to store all saved images in a
central location, specify an absolute path to the desired location in the
microstrategy.xml file of each individual Mobile Server, and
ensure that all Mobile Servers are able to access that location.
Working with projects and managing
Intelligence Server
To allow Mobile users to access projects, you must create a connection
between a MicroStrategy Intelligence Server and Mobile Server. You can
create connections between Intelligence Server and Mobile Server,
disconnect from Intelligence server, and specify additional options, such as
whether traffic between mobile devices, Mobile Server, and Intelligence
Server is encrypted or whether to enable Single Sign-on (SSO) authentication
for MicroStrategy Mobile with third-party trusted authentication providers
such as Tivoli or SiteMinder.
For steps, see the appropriate links below:
•
Creating a new connection to Intelligence Server, page 204
•
Connecting to an available Intelligence Server, page 206
•
Disconnecting from an Intelligence Server, page 207
•
Specifying default connection, load balance, and timeout settings,
page 208
•
Encrypting session information, page 210
•
Maintaining TCP/IP connections through a firewall, page 211
•
Enabling Single Sign-on authentication for Mobile, page 212
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Working with projects and managing Intelligence Server
203
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Creating a new connection to Intelligence Server
To allow Mobile users to access projects, you must create a connection
between a MicroStrategy Intelligence Server and Mobile Server.
automatically recognizes new Intelligence Servers added to a
 Mobile
cluster of Intelligence Servers in the MicroStrategy system. Once an
Intelligence Server is added to the system from MicroStrategy
Developer, it is automatically listed in Mobile as a part of the
Intelligence Server cluster.
must connect to an Intelligence Server of the same product
 You
version as the Mobile client you have installed. If the Intelligence
Server is an older version, an error message prompts you to upgrade
your Intelligence Server to a compatible version.
To create a new Mobile-to-Intelligence Server connection
1 Access the Mobile Server Administrator page:
•
In Windows: From the Start menu, point to Programs, then
MicroStrategy Tools, and select Mobile Administrator. The Mobile
Server Administrator web page opens.
•
In UNIX/Linux: After you deploy MicroStrategy Mobile Server
Universal and log on to the mstrMobileAdmin servlet using proper
credentials, the Mobile Server Administrator web page opens. The
default location of the Administrator servlet varies depending on the
platform that you are using.
2 In the Add a server manually field, specify the DNS name of the
Intelligence Server machine.
3 Click Add. The Server Properties page opens and displays the following
information about the Intelligence Server.
•
Name and connection status
•
Port number of the server
4 Select one of the following to determine when and how Mobile connects
to the Intelligence Server.
•
To ensure that Mobile server reconnects to the Intelligence Server
when the Mobile server is started or restarted, select Automatically
204 Working with projects and managing Intelligence Server
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
connect to Intelligence Server when Mobile Server or Intelligence
Server is restarted.
•
To ensure that the administrator must actively create a connection to
the Intelligence Server by clicking Connect, select User manually
connects Mobile to Intelligence Server. This is the default option.
5 In the Port field, specify the port number used to connect to the
Intelligence Server.
6 If the Intelligence Servers are in a cluster, you can determine the number
of connections within the "pool" of connections. The "pool" is the number
of connections between Mobile server and the Intelligence Servers. This
is defined at the Intelligence Server level, not at the cluster level. This
allows you to grant more or fewer initial connections depending on the
size of the Intelligence Server machines.
•
Define the pool size for each Intelligence Server in the cluster in the
Initial pool size field. The default initial pool size is 5.
•
Define the maximum pool size for the Intelligence Servers in the
Maximum pool size field. The default maximum pool size is 50.
7 Specify how jobs are balanced between Intelligence Servers in a cluster by
entering a value in the Load balance factor field. For more powerful
servers in a cluster, this value can be increased to provide an appropriate
balance. A larger load balance factor means the server supports a greater
load in the server cluster in which it resides. For example, if two servers
make up a cluster, one server with a balance factor of 3 and the other with
a balance factor of 2, and 20 users log in, 12 are supported by the first
server and 8 by the second. The default Load balance factor value is 1. For
more information about load balancing, see the Clustering chapter in the
MicroStrategy System Administration Guide.
8 If there is a firewall between Mobile Server and Intelligence Server, you
can ensure that the firewall does not remove connections between Mobile
Server and Intelligence Servers. To do this, select the Keep the
connection alive between the Mobile server and Intelligence Server
check box. When this setting is enabled, Mobile Server sends a signal to
Intelligence Server on each open TCP connection periodically, so that the
firewall does not see the connection as idle. For detailed information, see
Maintaining TCP/IP connections through a firewall, page 211.
9 If no authentication providers are configured for single sign-on
authentication, a Setup button appears next to Trust relationship
between Mobile Server and MicroStrategy Intelligence Server.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Working with projects and managing Intelligence Server
205
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Click the Setup button to create a trust relationship. The Setup Trust
Relationship with MicroStrategy Intelligence Server page opens. Do the
following:
•
Select an authentication mode, and then enter the user name and
password for that authentication mode. For additional details about
the authentication modes, refer to the Authentication chapter of the
MicroStrategy System Administration Guide.
•
Enter the path to the Mobile Server application in the Mobile Server
Application field.
•
Click Create Trust Relationship.
10 Click Save. The Intelligence Server is added to the Connected Servers list.
You can connect to this server by clicking Connect.
Related topics
•
Connecting to an available Intelligence Server, page 206
Connecting to an available Intelligence Server
To allow Mobile users to access reports and documents, you must connect
Mobile Server to one or more Intelligence Servers. If you or another
administrator has already created a connection from Mobile Server to an
Intelligence Server in the system, you can connect to the Intelligence Server.
Available Intelligence Servers are listed in the Unconnected servers list in the
Servers page of the Mobile Server Administrator page.
Prerequisite
•
It is assumed that a connection between Mobile and Intelligence Server
has already been created by an administrator. For steps to create a new
connection between Mobile and an Intelligence Server, see Creating a
new connection to Intelligence Server.
206 Working with projects and managing Intelligence Server
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
To connect Mobile to an available Intelligence Server
1 Access the Mobile Server Administrator page:
•
In Windows: From the Start menu, point to Programs, then
MicroStrategy Tools, and select Mobile Administrator. The Mobile
Server Administrator web page opens.
•
In UNIX/Linux: After you deploy MicroStrategy Mobile Server
Universal and log on to the mstrMobileAdmin servlet using proper
credentials, the Mobile Server Administrator web page opens. The
default location of the Administrator servlet varies depending on the
platform that you are using.
2 From the pane on the left, select Servers.
3 In the Action column in the Unconnected servers list, click Connect for
the Intelligence Server to connect to. The Intelligence Server moves from
the list to the Connected servers list and Mobile Server is connected to the
Intelligence Server.
Related topics
•
Creating a new connection to Intelligence Server, page 204
Disconnecting from an Intelligence Server
You may need to disconnect Mobile from an Intelligence Server if, for
example, you are performing maintenance on the Mobile Server machine.
Disconnecting Mobile from an Intelligence Server disables Mobile users
from accessing projects on the Intelligence Server.
To disconnect Mobile from an Intelligence Server
1 Access the Mobile Server Administrator page:
•
In Windows: From the Start menu, point to Programs, then
MicroStrategy Tools, and select Mobile Administrator. The Mobile
Server Administrator web page opens.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Working with projects and managing Intelligence Server
207
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
•
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
In UNIX/Linux: After you deploy MicroStrategy Mobile Server
Universal and log on to the mstrMobileAdmin servlet using proper
credentials, the Mobile Server Administrator web page opens. The
default location of the Administrator servlet varies depending on the
platform that you are using.
2 From the pane on the left, select Servers.
3 In the Action column in the Connected servers list, click Disconnect for
the Intelligence Server to disconnect from. The Intelligence Server moves
from the Connected servers list to the Disconnected servers list and
Mobile is disconnected from the Intelligence Server.
Related topics
•
Creating a new connection to Intelligence Server, page 204
•
Connecting to an available Intelligence Server, page 206
Specifying default connection, load balance, and timeout
settings
You can specify default connection, load balance, pool size, and timeout
settings for all connections to Intelligence Servers. These default settings can
be changed for an individual server in the Server Properties page.
Certain settings can be specified only at this default Intelligence Server level
that applies to all server connections. For example, timeout settings cannot
be applied to specific Intelligence Server connections, but can be specified to
all Intelligence Server connections.
To specify default connection, load balance, and timeout settings
1 Access the Mobile Server Administrator page:
•
In Windows: From the Start menu, point to Programs, then
MicroStrategy Tools, and select Mobile Administrator. The Mobile
Server Administrator web page opens.
•
In UNIX/Linux: After you deploy MicroStrategy Mobile Server
Universal and log on to the mstrMobileAdmin servlet using proper
credentials, the Mobile Server Administrator web page opens. The
208 Working with projects and managing Intelligence Server
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
default location of the Administrator servlet varies depending on the
platform that you are using.
2 From the pane on the left, select Default properties. The Default Server
Properties page opens.
3 Select one of the following to determine when and how Mobile Server
connects to Intelligence Servers.
•
To ensure that the Mobile Server reconnects to Intelligence Servers
when the Mobile Server is started or restarted, select Automatically
connect to Intelligence Server when Mobile Server or Intelligence
Server is restarted.
•
To ensure that the administrator must actively create a connection to
Intelligence Servers by clicking the Connect button, select the User
manually connects Mobile Server to Intelligence Server. This is
the default option.
4 In the Port field, specify the default port number for all Intelligence
Server connections.
5 If the Intelligence Servers are in a cluster, you can determine the number
of connections within the "pool" of connections. The "pool" is the number
of connections between Mobile and the Intelligence Servers. This is
defined at the Intelligence Server level, not at the cluster level. This allows
you to grant more or fewer initial connections depending on the size of
the Intelligence Server machines.
•
Define the pool size for each Intelligence Server in the cluster in the
Initial pool size field. The default initial pool size is 5.
•
Define the maximum pool size for the Intelligence Servers in the
Maximum pool size field. The default maximum pool size is 50.
6 Specify how jobs are balanced between Intelligence Servers in a cluster by
entering a value in the Load balance factor field. For more powerful
servers in a cluster, this value can be increased to provide an appropriate
balance. A larger load balance factor means the server supports a greater
load in the server cluster in which it resides. For example, if two servers
make up a cluster, one server with a balance factor of 3 and the other with
a balance factor of 2, and 20 users log in, 12 are supported by the first
server and 8 by the second. The default Load balance factor value is 1.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Working with projects and managing Intelligence Server
209
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
7 Establish default server and request timeout settings, as follows:
•
Specify the length of time (in seconds) that a Mobile request should
wait for a connection from the connection pool, if the maximum
number of connections are all busy. Enter this value in the Server
busy timeout field. The default value is 10.
•
Specify the length of time (in seconds) that Mobile waits to receive a
response from Intelligence Server. Enter this value in the Request
timeout field. The default value is 40.
8 If there is a firewall between Mobile Server and Intelligence Server, you
can ensure that the firewall does not remove connections between Mobile
Server and Intelligence Servers. To do this, select the Keep the
connection alive between the Mobile server and Intelligence Server
check box. When this setting is enabled, Mobile Server sends a signal to
Intelligence Server on each open TCP connection periodically, so that the
firewall does not see the connection as idle. For detailed information, see
Maintaining TCP/IP connections through firewalls.
9 Click Save.
Encrypting session information
You can control whether traffic between mobile devices, Mobile Server, and
Intelligence Server is encrypted. By default, this data is not encrypted
because encrypting the data increases the load on the Intelligence Server,
possibly resulting in reduced performance in Mobile.
To determine how session information is encrypted, cached, and stored
1 Access the Mobile Server Administrator page:
•
In Windows: From the Start menu, point to Programs, then
MicroStrategy Tools, and select Mobile Administrator. The Mobile
Server Administrator web page opens.
•
In UNIX/Linux: After you deploy MicroStrategy Mobile Server
Universal and log on to the mstrMobileAdmin servlet using proper
credentials, the Mobile Server Administrator web page opens. The
default location of the Administrator servlet varies depending on the
platform that you are using.
210 Working with projects and managing Intelligence Server
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
2 From the pane on the left, select Security. The Security page opens.
3 In the Encryption area, select one of the following options:
•
AES Tunneling: Uses the AES encryption algorithm to secure data
between Web and Intelligence Server.
option increases the load on the Intelligence Server and
 This
this may result in reduced performance in MicroStrategy Web.
•
SSL: Uses Secure Socket Layer (SSL) encryption to secure data
between Mobile Server and Intelligence Server. This is the
recommended option for secure communications. If you want Mobile
Server to verify Intelligence Server's SSL certificate before setting up a
connection, select Validate Intelligence Server certificate. For
background information and instructions to set up SSL encryption for
Web, see the System Administration Guide.
4 Click Save.
Maintaining TCP/IP connections through a firewall
If there is a firewall between Mobile Server and Intelligence Server, the
firewall may cause the TCP connection to Mobile Server to time out after it
has been idle for a length of time. In this case, the firewall closes the
connection to Mobile Server (outside the firewall), but not to Intelligence
Server (inside the firewall). This results in Intelligence Server never closing
the TCP connection. Eventually, Intelligence Server's connection limit is
reached, and no more connections are allowed until Intelligence Server is
restarted.
You can avoid this problem in a number of ways:
•
Putting Intelligence Server and Mobile Server on the same side of the
firewall
•
Configuring Mobile Server to constantly refresh all TCP/IP connections
with Intelligence Server
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Working with projects and managing Intelligence Server
211
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
To configure Mobile Server to keep connections alive
1 Access the Mobile Server Administrator page:
•
In Windows: From the Start menu, point to Programs, then
MicroStrategy Tools, and select Mobile Administrator. The Mobile
Server Administrator web page opens.
•
In UNIX/Linux: After you deploy MicroStrategy Mobile Server
Universal and log on to the mstrMobileAdmin servlet using proper
credentials, the Mobile Server Administrator web page opens. The
default location of the Administrator servlet varies depending on the
platform that you are using.
2 From the pane on the left, select Servers.
3 In the Properties column, select Modify for the Intelligence Server
connection to edit. The Default Server Properties page opens.
4 Select the Keep the connection alive between the Mobile Server and
Intelligence server check box.
5 Click Save. Mobile Server will now periodically send a signal to
Intelligence Server on each open TCP connection, so that the firewall will
not see the connection as idle.
Enabling Single Sign-on authentication for Mobile
You can enable Single Sign-on (SSO) authentication for MicroStrategy
Mobile with third-party trusted authentication providers such as Tivoli or
SiteMinder. Once a user is authenticated in the third-party system, the user's
permissions are retrieved from a user directory, and access is granted to
MicroStrategy Mobile.
Prior to enabling trusted authentication for MicroStrategy Mobile, you must
complete the initial third-party authentication setup. For instructions on
creating users and links in a third party system, see the Authentication
chapter in the MicroStrategy System Administration Guide.
To enable users to log in to MicroStrategy Mobile using SSO authentication,
you must enable trusted authentication as an available authentication mode
in MicroStrategy Mobile.
212 Working with projects and managing Intelligence Server
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
To enable trusted authentication in MicroStrategy Mobile
1 Access the Mobile Server Administrator page:
•
In Windows: From the Start menu, point to Programs, then
MicroStrategy Tools, and select Mobile Administrator. The Mobile
Server Administrator web page opens.
•
In UNIX/Linux: After you deploy MicroStrategy Mobile Server
Universal and log on to the mstrMobileAdmin servlet using proper
credentials, the Mobile Server Administrator web page opens. The
default location of the Administrator servlet varies depending on the
platform that you are using.
2 From the pane on the left, select Default properties. The Default Server
Properties page opens.
3 From the Trusted Authentication Providers drop-down list, select
Tivoli or SiteMinder.
information about adding custom authentication, see the
 For
MicroStrategy SDK documentation.
4 At the bottom of the page, click Save.
To enable the authentication token to pass from the third-party
authentication provider to MicroStrategy Mobile, and then to Intelligence
Server, a trust relationship must be established between MicroStrategy
Mobile and Intelligence Server.
To establish trust between MicroStrategy Mobile and Intelligence Server
1 Access the Mobile Server Administrator page:
•
In Windows: From the Start menu, point to Programs, then
MicroStrategy Tools, and select Mobile Administrator. The Mobile
Server Administrator web page opens.
•
In UNIX/Linux: After you deploy MicroStrategy Mobile Server
Universal and log on to the mstrMobileAdmin servlet using proper
credentials, the Mobile Server Administrator web page opens. The
default location of the Administrator servlet varies depending on the
platform that you are using.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Working with projects and managing Intelligence Server
213
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
2 From the pane on the left, select Servers.
3 Confirm that MicroStrategy Mobile Server is currently connected to an
Intelligence Server. If an Intelligence Server is not connected, in the
Unconnected Servers table, under Action, click Connect for the
appropriate Intelligence Server.
4 In the Connected Servers table, under Properties, click Modify. The
Server Properties page opens.
5 Next to Trust relationship between Mobile Server and Intelligence Server,
click Setup.
6 Type a User name and Password in the appropriate fields. The user
must have administrative privileges for MicroStrategy Mobile.
7 From the options provided, select the authentication mode used to
authenticate the administrative user.
8 In the Mobile Server Application field, type the URL for MicroStrategy
Mobile. For example, you can provide the URLs for the application using
Tivoli as follows:
https://MachineName/JunctionName/MicroStrategyMobile/
asp
9 Click Create Trust Relationship.
10 Click Save to create the trust relationship.
For instructions on verifying or deleting the trust relationship, see the
Authentication chapter in the MicroStrategy System Administration Guide.
Configuring and viewing logs and statistics
You can determine whether to log information such as errors, warnings, or
messages generated by MicroStrategy Mobile users, as well as statistical
information such as the time taken by the Web Server and Intelligence
Server to complete an operation, how much data is received and sent, the
waiting time to receive some data from the Intelligence Server, and so on.
For steps, see the appropriate links below:
•
Determining what and where information is logged, page 215
214 Configuring and viewing logs and statistics
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
•
Creating logs to debug API issues, page 217
•
Viewing server logs, page 219
•
Enabling and viewing statistics, page 221
Determining what and where information is logged
Tasks performed by MicroStrategy Mobile users may generate errors,
warnings, or messages in MicroStrategy Mobile Server. This information can
be stored in log files. Logs are records of all low-level activity, which can be
aggregated and used for troubleshooting a specific problem or for server and
system analysis. You can define what information is logged by MicroStrategy
Mobile and where it is logged.
To determine what and where information is logged
1 Access the Mobile Server Administrator page:
•
In Windows: From the Start menu, point to Programs, then
MicroStrategy Tools, and select Mobile Administrator. The Mobile
Server Administrator web page opens.
•
In UNIX/Linux: After you deploy MicroStrategy Mobile Server
Universal and log on to the mstrMobileAdmin servlet using proper
credentials, the Mobile Server Administrator web page opens. The
default location of the Administrator servlet varies depending on the
platform that you are using.
2 From the pane on the left, select Configuration. The Diagnostics
Configuration page opens.
3 Select either Internal diagnostic setup or Custom diagnostic setup to
determine the type of log to create.
•
Internal diagnostic setup: This is the default option and is used to
set the type of information to be logged in the log file. The settings
defined here are written in the logger.properties file.

Level: Select the level at which the information is written in the
log file. You can choose from the following levels:
– OFF: Nothing is written in the log file.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Configuring and viewing logs and statistics
215
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
– Errors: This is the default option. Errors generated by Mobile
are included in the log file.
– Warnings: Errors and warnings generated by Mobile are
included in the log file.
– Messages: Errors, warnings, and messages generated by
Mobile are included in the log file.

Log files directory: This field displays a default path where the
log files are saved. You can also specify a different path. The log file
is generated in the specified path in the
MSTRmmddyyyy.log_num format. The default directory is
Program Files/MicroStrategy/Mobile Server ASPx/
WEB-INF/log/.
The naming of the log file is handled by the logger.properties file.
For example, the first log file created on 01/02/2008 appears as
MSTR01022008.log_1.


Maximum output file size: The maximum size, in bytes, of the log
file. When the maximum file size is reached, a new log file is
started. The default size is 10,000,000 bytes.
Number of file outputs: The maximum number of log files that
Web creates. The default number of files is 100.
Logs can also be created to better identify and debug API issues. These
logs are configured in the Advanced Logger Settings area. For details
and steps, see Creating logs to debug API issues, page 217.
•
Custom diagnostic setup: This option is typically used to load a
logger.properties file provided to you by MicroStrategy Technical
Support. The logger.properties file contains the internal diagnostics
setup settings above. You can load diagnostics settings contained in
the file, get the output, and send it back to Technical Support. When
the Technical Support engineer is done, he or she can reset your log to
its original settings. This allows for a very detailed level of logging
without you having to write the logger.properties file yourself.

Specify the path to the logger.properties file in the Path to
custom diagnostics setup file field.
4 Click Save to apply the changes.
216 Configuring and viewing logs and statistics
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
5
Creating logs to debug API issues
You can use logs to better identify and debug API issues. The logs can
provide the following information:
•
Name of the class and method being accessed
•
Custom messages used in the code to specify the reason why the message
was logged
•
All argument values sent to the method that logged the message
Using the Advanced Logger options explained below, you can determine the
specific user and packages for which errors are logged. This makes it easier to
debug API issues since each log contains unique information about a specific
user, date, and package.
The logs generated by the XML-API Logger are saved in different files from
those generated by the Internal diagnostics logger. The XML-API logs are
saved in the form of AdvMSTRLog[package][date].log. In the log file
name, [date] is replaced by the current date and [package] is replaced by
the name of the specific package name for which the log exists. For details
about the Internal diagnostics logger, see Determining what and where
information is logged, page 215.
To create a log to debug API issues
1 Access the Mobile Server Administrator page:
•
In Windows: From the Start menu, point to Programs, then
MicroStrategy Tools, and select Mobile Administrator. The Mobile
Server Administrator web page opens.
•
In UNIX/Linux: After you deploy MicroStrategy Mobile Server
Universal and log on to the mstrMobileAdmin servlet using proper
credentials, the Mobile Server Administrator web page opens. The
default location of the Administrator servlet varies depending on the
platform that you are using.
2 From the pane on the left, under Diagnostics select Configuration. The
Diagnostics Configuration page opens.
3 Select Internal diagnostic setup.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Configuring and viewing logs and statistics
217
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
4 In the Advanced Logger Options area, select from the following options to
disable or enable the creation of XML-API logs, as well as configure how
and what information is logged.
•
Disabled: This is the default option. When this option is selected, logs
are created using only the default settings you specify in the Internal
diagnostics setup options, as described in Determining what and
where information is logged, page 215. All errors, warnings, or
messages are logged to the log file you specified in the Log files
directory, but logs are not created for each specific user, date, and
package combination.
•
Enable XML-API Logger: When this option is selected, all messages
for a particular user for all calls to the API are logged. These messages
consist of any classes that are located under the
com.microstrategy.webapi package.

User name: To specify that the XML-API logger only saves
messages for a specified user, enter the user's name in the text
field. If you do not specify a user, messages are logged for all users.
– When the Enable XML-API Logger option is selected, you can
log only API messages, not messages coming from a specific
package or multiple packages. To log information about
specific or multiple packages, you must select the Enable
logging for multiple/other package(s) option.
•
Enable logging for multiple/other package(s): When this option is
selected, you can determine the specific packages for which logs are
created. This further refines the logging process because you can more
distinctly define which error messages are logged and for which users
and packages.



Package(s): To specify certain packages for which to create logs,
type the name of the package(s) in the text field. Use a comma to
separate the names of multiple packages. For example, you want to
log API messages as well as messages for an addons package. In
this case, you must list both of these packages by entering the
following in the text field: com.microstrategy.webapi,
com.microstrategy.web.app.addons
User name: To specify that the XML-API logger only saves
messages for a specified user, enter the user's name in the text
field. If you do not specify a user, messages are logged for all users.
Pattern: You can limit the number of logged messages by
specifying a pattern. Only messages that match the pattern are
logged. For example, you want to log messages that are related
218 Configuring and viewing logs and statistics
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
only to methods that start with the ”getCustomLogin ” string. In
this case, enter ”getCustomLogin* ”.
can create patterns using a limited set of regular
 You
expressions. For more information about regular expressions,
see http://jakarta.apache.org/oro/api/org/
apache/oro/text/GlobCompiler.html.

Level: You can specify the types of messages that are logged by
selecting one of the following options:
– Warnings: Errors and warnings are included in the log file.
– Errors: Errors are included in the log file.
– All: Errors, warnings, and messages are logged.
– OFF: Nothing is written in the log file. This is the default
option.
5 Click Save to apply the changes.
Viewing server logs
The information collected in server logs can be difficult to understand if you
read it directly from the log file itself. As an alternative to scanning a log that
contains all information collected for your system activity, you can view and
filter logged information using the View Logs page. This allows you to more
easily locate and troubleshoot application errors and the system.
The log display depends on what information is available in the log file. If the
log is empty, information from it is not displayed on the screen. For
instructions on how to set the level of information that is recorded in the log
file, see Determining what and where information is logged, page 215.
To view the Mobile Server log file
1 Access the Mobile Server Administrator page:
•
In Windows: From the Start menu, point to Programs, then
MicroStrategy Tools, and select Mobile Administrator. The Mobile
Server Administrator web page opens.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Configuring and viewing logs and statistics
219
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
•
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
In UNIX/Linux: After you deploy MicroStrategy Mobile Server
Universal and log on to the mstrMobileAdmin servlet using proper
credentials, the Mobile Server Administrator web page opens. The
default location of the Administrator servlet varies depending on the
platform that you are using.
2 From the pane on the left, select View logs. The View logs page opens.
3 In the Display area, select the check boxes for the log information you
want to display on the View logs page:
•
Errors: Logged errors are displayed on the screen. This is selected by
default.
•
Warnings: Logged warnings are displayed on the screen.
•
Messages: Logged messages are displayed on the screen.
4 In the From area, specify the start date of logged information to display
on the screen.
5 In the To area, specify the end date of logged information to display on
the screen.
the From and To date fields contain the same date, logs are
 Ifviewed
for that day only.
6 Click Refresh to display the selected log information on the View Logs
page. The logged information appears in the following columns.
•
Time: the time and date when the event log was created
•
User name: the name of the user who logged in
•
User IP Address: the IP address of the user who logged in
•
Level: Error, Warning, or Message, as above
•
Class and Method: code references for the issue
•
Message: the text of the logged message.
7 To sort a column, click the Sort icon in the column's header.
220 Configuring and viewing logs and statistics
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Enabling and viewing statistics
You can enable statistics to interpret and analyze system and server
performance and disable them when you no longer need to monitor
performance. For example, you can obtain information about the time taken
by the Web Server and Intelligence Server to complete an operation, how
much data is received and sent, the waiting time to receive some data from
the Intelligence Server, and so on.
From the Statistics page, you can determine what statistical information is
logged, either to the Mobile device or to a text file on the Mobile Server
machine.
users work on the same server, displaying statistics for
 Ifeachmultiple
of them is not recommended as it may impact system
performance.
the statistics are being saved in the file, the file size grows quickly,
 Ifwhich
is unnecessary. For this reason, this feature should not be used
under normal circumstances. This feature is useful only when the
system is not working properly and you want to analyze the data for
system tuning or troubleshooting.
To enable statistics collection in MicroStrategy Mobile
1 Access the Mobile Server Administrator page:
•
In Windows: From the Start menu, point to Programs, then
MicroStrategy Tools, and select Mobile Administrator. The Mobile
Server Administrator web page opens.
•
In UNIX/Linux: After you deploy MicroStrategy Mobile Server
Universal and log on to the mstrMobileAdmin servlet using proper
credentials, the Mobile Server Administrator web page opens. The
default location of the Administrator servlet varies depending on the
platform that you are using.
2 From the pane on the left, select Statistics. The Statistics page opens.
3 From the Mode drop-down list, select where statistics are logged:
•
OFF: Statistics are not displayed on the screen or saved in a file. This
option is selected by default.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Configuring and viewing logs and statistics
221
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
•
Screen: Statistics are saved to the log file on the Mobile device, at the
lowest log level.
•
File: Statistics are saved in the specified log file. Type the path to the
log file in the Statistics file field, as explained below.
•
Screen and file: Statistics are saved in both the log file on the Mobile
device and in the specified log file. Type the path to the log file in the
Statistics file field, as explained below.
4 In the Statistics file field, if you selected File or Screen and file from the
Mode drop-down list, type the absolute path of where the Mobile Server
is installed.
Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy
Mobile application
Once you have installed and configured MicroStrategy Mobile Server, you
need to install and configure the MicroStrategy Mobile application on your
company’s mobile devices. These steps vary depending on whether you are
using MicroStrategy Mobile for iPhone or iPad, MicroStrategy Mobile for
Android, or MicroStrategy Mobile for BlackBerry.
•
Deploying MicroStrategy Mobile for iPhone or iPad, page 223
•
Configuring MicroStrategy Mobile for iPhone or iPad, page 226
•
Deploying MicroStrategy Mobile for Android, page 236
•
Configuring MicroStrategy Mobile for Android, page 237
•
Installing MicroStrategy Mobile for BlackBerry, page 243
•
Configuring MicroStrategy Mobile for BlackBerry, page 246
•
Configuring connectivity settings for iPhone, iPad, Android, and
BlackBerry devices, page 260
•
Configuring the home screen for iPhone, iPad, and Android devices,
page 265
•
Pre-caching online content on the mobile device for offline use, page 276
•
Configuring MicroStrategy Mobile for iPhone or iPad to receive push
notifications, page 278
222 Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
•
Applying configurations to mobile devices, page 279
•
Managing multiple configurations for MicroStrategy Mobile, page 282
Deploying MicroStrategy Mobile for iPhone or iPad
For a list of supported iPhone and iPad devices and operating systems, see
the MicroStrategy Readmes.
To maintain control of your MicroStrategy Mobile implementation cycle, it is
recommended that you use the iOS Enterprise Deployment process to install
the MicroStrategy Mobile applications on your users’ devices.
The requirements and workflow for this process are described below.
Overview
The following is a high-level overview of the tasks you must perform to begin
deploying the MicroStrategy Mobile applications on your users’ devices:
•
Download the MicroStrategy Mobile Xcode project.
•
Use the iOS Developer Portal to create the files you need to build the
applications in Xcode.
•
Create a distributable archive of the application.
•
Create a basic web page for your network, from which users can
download the application.
Prerequisites
•
You must use an Apple Mac, running Xcode 4.2 or better.
•
Your organization must be enrolled in the iOS Developer Enterprise
Program. For information about this program, visit http://
developer.apple.com/programs/ios/enterprise/.
•
You must create an Application ID for the deployed application, using the
iOS Provisioning Portal. An Application ID is of the form
[Code].com.yourcompany.yourappname, where Code is an
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
223
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
alphanumeric code, called the Bundle Seed, and is generated when you
create the Application ID.
you are deploying MicroStrategy Mobile for both iPhone and
 IfiPad,
you must create an Application ID for each.
•
You need a location on your network that users can access through their
web browsers, using either the HTTP or HTTPS protocol. The
distributable archive must be saved to this location.
Deploying the MicroStrategy Mobile applications
You must use Xcode to create modified versions of the MicroStrategy Mobile
applications to deploy them on your users’ devices.
third-party products discussed below are manufactured by
 The
vendors independent of MicroStrategy, and the information provided
is subject to change. For detailed instructions to perform the following
tasks, refer to the iOS Developer Library at http://
developer.apple.com/library/ios/.
To build and deploy the MicroStrategy Mobile applications
To create a distribution certificate for MicroStrategy Mobile
1 In the Keychain Access utility on your Mac, use the Certification Assistant
feature to create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) file.
2 In the iOS Provisioning Portal, in the Certificates section, request a
Distribution Certificate. When prompted, upload the CSR file you created
in the previous step.
3 Once your certificate is ready, download it to your computer.
4 Use the Keychain Access utility to install the downloaded certificate to
your computer.
certificate authorizes your Mac as a trusted computer on the
 This
network, and is used to sign the MicroStrategy Mobile applications
for distribution.
224 Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
5
To create a distribution Provisioning Profile for MicroStrategy Mobile
5 In the iOS Provisioning Portal, in the Provisioning section, create a
Distribution Provisioning Profile for the application.
6 Download the Provisioning Profile to your computer.
To download and install the MicroStrategy Mobile Xcode projects
7 On your Mac, download the disk image with the MicroStrategy Mobile
Xcode projects from https://software.microstrategy.com/Download/
index.aspx. To do this, select the desired version from the Version
drop-down list, and then select iOS from the OS drop-down list. The file
name is MicroStrategy Mobile SDK.dmg.
must have a username and password to access the download
 You
site.
8 Double-click the downloaded file. A license agreement is displayed.
9 To accept the terms of the license agreement, click Agree. The disk image
opens.
10 Copy the contents of the disk image to your computer, and eject the disk
image.
To set up the Xcode projects
11 In the MicroStrategyMobile folder copied from the disk image,
double-click MicroStrategyMobile.xcodeproj. The MicroStrategy
Mobile project opens in Xcode.
12 Choose the MicroStrategyMobileIPhone or MicroStrategyMobileIPad
scheme, as applicable.
13 Open the property list file for the scheme you are building the application
for. The file names are Info_IPhone.plist or Info_IPad.plist
for iPhone and iPad respectively.
14 Change the Bundle Identifier property to your organization’s Bundle
Identifier.
The Bundle Identifier is of the form
com.YourCompanyName.YourApplicationName, and is part of the
application ID you created in the iOS Provisioning Portal.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
225
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
15 For the scheme you selected, in the Build Settings section, under Code
Signing, ensure that your distribution provisioning profile is selected.
To build the application for distribution
16 From the Build menu, select Build and Archive. An archived version of
the application is built, with a .ipa extension.
17 Open Xcode’s Organizer window, select the archived application, and
click Share Application. The Share Archived Application dialog opens.
18 Click Distribute for Enterprise. The archive is built, and you are
prompted to enter the information for the application’s manifest file,
which contains the information that users’ devices need to download the
application.
19 Enter the information for the manifest file. In the URL field, enter the
web address for the network location from which users can download the
application. For example, http://YourNetworkLocation/
MicroStrategyMobile.ipa.
Uploading and distributing the application
20 Upload the following files to your network location above:
•
The application archive. For example,
MicroStrategyMobile.ipa.
•
The manifest file. For example, manifest.plist.
21 To distribute the application, provide users with a URL to the manifest
file, using the following syntax:
itms-services://?action=download-manifest&url=http://
YourServerLocation/?manifest.plist
You can provide this URL in an email, or by using a basic HTML page that
users can connect to.
Configuring MicroStrategy Mobile for iPhone or iPad
Before a user can view reports and documents in MicroStrategy Mobile for
iPhone/iPad, the application must be configured to communicate with
Mobile Server and Intelligence Server. Manually configuring each device can
be time-consuming and difficult. Instead, you can create a configuration.
226 Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
A mobile device configuration is a list of settings for a MicroStrategy Mobile
application that are stored in a file on Mobile Server. A configuration for
MicroStrategy Mobile for iPhone/iPad contains information about the
memory limit, network timeout, caching, and error logging, as well as what
projects can be accessed from the application and what buttons are available
on the home screen.
single configuration can configure devices to connect to multiple
 AMobile
Servers. Users can manually connect to any available Mobile
Server, if the configuration allows them to configure the application
from the mobile device. For instructions on how to configure the
application from the mobile device, see Configuring the application
from the device, page 281.
You can create and save multiple configurations. Each configuration can
have its own login credentials, list of projects, and Home screen design. For
example, you can create one configuration for regional sales managers,
providing access to only those projects that report on sales data. You can
then create another configuration for executives, which gives them access to
all projects currently in production and also provides a Home screen with
buttons for several high-level dashboards.
logins and passwords included with a configuration should be
 User
used only for demonstration purposes, as the configuration is not
transmitted or stored securely.
Once you have created a configuration, you can generate a URL for that
configuration. You can then email that URL to a mobile device user. When
the user opens the URL, the MicroStrategy application on the mobile device
is automatically configured with the saved settings. For steps, see
Configuring mobile devices using a generated URL, page 280.
To create an iPhone or iPad configuration
1 Access the Mobile Server Administrator page:
•
In Windows: From the Start menu, point to Programs, then
MicroStrategy Tools, and select Mobile Administrator. The Mobile
Server Administrator web page opens.
•
In UNIX/Linux: After you deploy MicroStrategy Mobile Server
Universal and log on to the mstrMobileAdmin servlet using proper
credentials, the Mobile Server Administrator web page opens. The
default location of the Administrator servlet varies depending on the
platform that you are using.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
227
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
2 From the pane on the left, select Mobile Configuration.
3 Click Define New Configuration.
4 From the Device drop-down list, select either iPhone or iPad to create a
configuration for the desired device. Click OK.
5 In the Configuration Name field, type the name of the configuration.
This is the name that is displayed in the configuration list.
Configure the iPhone or iPad settings
6 Select either the iPhone Settings or iPad Settings tab.
7 By default, the MicroStrategy Mobile application has a dark color theme.
To change the theme color, select Light from the Application Theme
Color drop-down list.
8 To choose an accent color to highlight icons, buttons, and clickable text in
MicroStrategy Mobile, click the desired color in the Accent Color area.
For example, you can select an accent color that is used in your
organization’s logo.
9 From the Memory Limit drop down list, select the amount of memory
that is available to the application. Values include 25 MB, 50 MB, 100
MB, 250 MB, 500 MB, 1 GB, 2 GB, 3 GB, or 4 GB. The application uses
either this value or the available memory on the device, whichever is
lower. Reports and documents render faster when more memory is
available to the application. The default value is 250 MB.
10 In the Network Timeout field, specify how long, in seconds, the
application should wait for the network to respond before reporting a
timeout. The default value is 60 seconds.
11 In the Acceptable Network Response Time field, specify an amount of
time, in seconds, that is acceptable for a network response. The default
value is 2 seconds.
Along with the network timeout setting, this value determines the mobile
server connection quality displayed in the Network tab of the Settings
screen in the iPhone or iPad client. The Mobile Server quality is displayed
as:
•
A green image when network latency is less than the Acceptable
Network Response value.
228 Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
•
A red image when network latency is greater than the Network
Timeout value.
•
An orange image when the network latency is between the Network
Timeout value and the Acceptable Network Response Time value.
12 In the Maximum Columns in Grid field, specify the maximum number
of columns displayed at one time in a grid report. If the number of
columns in the grid exceeds this value, a user can scroll to see additional
columns. The default value is 10 columns for iPhone and 50 columns for
iPad.
13 From the Logging Level drop-down list, select the level of information
to be stored in the application's log file. You can choose from the
following levels:
•
Warnings: Errors and warnings generated by Mobile are included in
the log file. This is the default option.
•
Errors: Errors generated by Mobile are included in the log file.
•
Messages: Messages generated by Mobile are included in the log file.
•
All: Warnings, errors, and messages generated by Mobile are included
in the log file.
•
Off: Nothing is written in the log file.
view the log file, in the MicroStrategy Mobile for iPhone
 Toapplication,
from the Settings screen, tap Advanced Settings,
then, in the Logging group, tap View Log.
14 In the Maximum log size field, specify the maximum number of entries
to be stored in the log file. The default value is 50 entries.
15 In the Check for new subscriptions every field, type how often, in
seconds, the application checks for new versions of subscribed reports
and documents on Intelligence Server. The default value is 600 seconds.
16 In the Validate device caches every field, type how often, in seconds,
the application validates the report and document caches on the device
with Intelligence Server. This check only invalidates a cache on the device
if the corresponding cache on Intelligence Server is invalid or expired; it
does not check whether any changes have been made to the original
report or document. The default value is 600 seconds.
17 Some reports and documents have the pre-caching feature enabled, but
do not use server side caching. To increase the execution performance for
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
229
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
these objects, you can force the application to use the local caches for a
specified amount of time. To do this, select the Cache real-time data for
check box, and in the field, specify the number of seconds that a local
cache remains valid.
 Note the following:
•
For instructions on configuring reports, documents, or the
contents of a folder to be pre-cached, see Configuring the home
screen for iPhone, iPad, and Android devices, page 265.
•
If caching for a specific report or document has been disabled,
you can still force it to use the pre-cache feature on a mobile
device. To do this, open the report or document in Developer,
open the corresponding Report Caching Options or Document
Properties dialog box, and select the Allow mobile devices to
cache data temporarily to optimize performance check box.
18 By default, the Mobile Server network response quality is measured and
displayed as a green, yellow, or red image on the mobile client. To disable
this feature, clear the Monitor Network Status check box.
19 By default, users can view and change the configuration settings in the
Settings screen in the application. To prevent users from changing the
configuration settings for the application, clear the Allow users to
access settings check box.
20 By default, if a cache exists for a subscribed report or document, that
cache is loaded when the user opens that report or document, and only
for the page-by selection or layout that is opened. This speeds up initial
access to the application. To allow access to reports and documents even
when the connection to the network is intermittent, select the
Automatically pre-load subscriptions check box. If this check box is
selected, caches are loaded for all subscribed reports and documents
when the application is launched.
21 By default, MicroStrategy Mobile caches the contents of folders, and does
not refresh the folder unless the user shakes the device while in the folder
screen. To disable folder caching and to refresh folders every time that
the user opens them, clear the Cache Folders check box. This may cause
Mobile to open folders more slowly, as it must retrieve information about
the folders from Intelligence Server every time they are opened.
22 By default, reports and documents are cached on the device until either
the memory limit is reached or a newer version of the report or document
is available. This allows access to reports and documents even when the
connection to the network is intermittent. To clear the caches when the
230 Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
application is closed, select the Clear caches when the application
closes check box.
23 By default, users can modify caching settings for the Mobile application.
For example, users can choose to clear or save caches when the
application is closed. To prevent users from modifying caching settings,
clear the Allow users to modify caching settings check box.
24 By default, users can modify logging settings for the Mobile application.
For example, users can select the level of detail for logged statistics. To
prevent users from modifying logging settings, clear the Allow users to
modify logging settings check box.
25 By default, users can enable Diagnostic Mode in the Mobile application.
Diagnostic Mode gives users access to the binary file that is generated by
dashboards viewed on the mobile device. To prevent users from enabling
Diagnostic Mode, clear the Allow users to enable Diagnostic Mode
check box.
26 To enable push notification alerts, select the Enable Push Notification
check box. For details on configuring push notification alerts, see
Configuring MicroStrategy Mobile for iPhone or iPad to receive push
notifications, page 278.
enable push notifications, Mobile Server must be configured to use
 ToSecure
Socket Layer (SSL) encryption. For detailed instructions on
configuring Mobile Server to use SSL, see the Enabling Secure
Communication chapter in the System Administration Guide.
27 To allow MicroStrategy Mobile to download data in the background when
the application is running in the background, select the Enable
Background Download Mode check box.
Enable Push Notification option must be selected before you
 The
enable background downloading.
28 By default, mobile users can email, annotate, and print an image of the
report or document that they are viewing. To disable this feature, clear
the Enable emailing, annotating, and printing check box.
29 By default, PDF documents open in MicroStrategy Mobile's built-in PDF
viewer. To disable this viewer, select the Disable the built-in PDF
viewer check box. If this option is selected and the Allow users to open
PDF documents in external applications check box is selected, users
are prompted to choose a third party PDF viewer when they open a PDF
document.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
231
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
30 By default, Mobile users can use other applications to view PDF
documents that are generated by MicroStrategy Mobile. To disable this
privilege, clear the Allow users to open PDF documents in external
applications check box.
31 By default, Keynote documents open in MicroStrategy Mobile’s built-in
Keynote viewer. To allow Mobile users to open keynote files in an
external application, select the Use external applications to open
Keynote files check box. If this option is selected, Mobile users are
prompted to choose a third party Keynote viewer when they open a
Keynote document.
32 To ignore user privilege errors when the mobile device is reconciling,
select the Ignore user privilege errors during reconcile check box.
Enable this setting if you are creating a single Mobile configuration that
includes multiple projects that may not be accessible by all users who are
using that configuration. This option eliminates the error messages that
users would normally receive for each inaccessible project during
reconciliation, and removes any associated subscriptions and caches
from the mobile device.
33 By default, reports and documents viewed on the iPhone 5 are displayed
on the entire screen area if you have designed your reports and
documents to fill the iPhone 5 screen. For reports and documents that are
not designed for the iPhone 5 screen, you can display black bars on the
edges to fill the screen. To do this, clear the Reports and documents
use full screen on iPhone 5 check box.
34 If you configure a confidential project, users are required to enter their
credentials at a specified interval to continue accessing the project. By
default, users are required to type their user names and passwords to log
in. To cache the last typed user name and only require users to enter their
passwords, select the Pre-populate Authentication Dialog With
Cached Login check box.
35 To display a log out option in the Action menu in MicroStrategy Mobile,
select the Display Log Out Option in Action Menu check box. When a
Mobile user logs out, her user name, password, and session information
are removed from the device and she is logged out of the project on the
connected Intelligence Server. The Mobile user must type her credentials
to log back in to the application.
36 To clear all caches on the mobile device when a Mobile user logs out,
select the Clear Caches on Log Out check box. When the Display Log
Out Option in Action Menu option is selected, users can log out of
232 Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
5
MicroStrategy Mobile to delete caches that have been created on the
device.
37 By default, the MicroStrategy Mobile application displays a Learn More
link. When this link is tapped by a Mobile user, the mobile version of the
MicroStrategy website opens in the default web browser. You can modify
the Learn More link in the following ways.
•
To change the website that opens when the Learn More link is tapped,
type the desired URL in the Custom URL field.
•
To remove the Learn More link, clear the Show “Learn More” Link
check box.
38 By default, the passwords used to log in to projects and Intelligence
Servers can be saved in the MicroStrategy Mobile application. To
configure the application to remove saved passwords after a certain
period of time:
a In the Clear Saved Password settings, select After.
b From the drop-down list, select whether to specify the password
removal time in Days, Hours, or Minutes.
c
In the field, type the number of days, hours, or minutes before the
saved passwords are removed from the application. The timer counts
from when the user types a password, or, if the password is included
as part of a configuration, from when the configuration is applied.
Once a password is removed, the user must type the password the
next time the login dialog appears.
39 By default, the configuration used on the device is not updated
automatically. To enable the mobile device to check the Mobile Server for
updates to the configuration at a specified time interval:
a In the Check and update configuration settings, select Every.
b From the drop-down list, select whether to specify the time interval in
Days or Hours.
c
In the field, type the number of days or hours that must pass between
each check for updates. The MicroStrategy Mobile application checks
for an update to the Mobile configuration at this specified interval. If
an update is found, the user is prompted to apply the new
configuration to the mobile device. The user can then choose to apply
the new configuration or wait to apply the configuration at a later
time. If the user selects the latter option, the prompt reappears five
minutes later.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
233
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
40 To set up client authentication for Mobile Server, select the Use
Certificate Server check box. With this option selected, you can set up a
client certificate server responsible for creating certificates for mobile
clients. These certificates are required from mobile clients attempting to
access the Mobile Server.
To specify the certificate server, type the certificate server’s URL in the
Use Certificate Server text field. This field must begin with https://
and requires the use of the fully qualified name of the certificate server in
the URL, as in the following examples.
ASP:
https://fully_qualified_domain_name:port/
CertificateServer/asp/certificate.aspx
JSP:
https://fully_qualified_domain_name:port/
CertificateServer
or
https://fully_qualified_domain_name:port/
CertificateServer/servlet/certificate
where:
•
fully_qualified_domain_name:port is the location and port of
your certificate server. For example,
machine_name.domain.com:8443.
For detailed steps on configuring a certificate server, see Client
authentication with a certificate server, page 197.
41 If a mobile device has an invalid certificate, it can still run reports and
documents that are cached on the device. To clear the device cache when
a certificate becomes invalid, select the Clear caches when certificate
becomes invalid check box.
Configure the confidential project setting
42 To specify the amount of time required to elapse before a
re-authentication request appears on the mobile device:
a Type the desired number of days, hours, or minutes in the Require
re-authentication to confidential projects on resuming
application after field.
234 Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
b From the drop-down list, select whether to specify the elapsed time in
Days, Hours, or Minutes.
c
Specify at least one project as confidential in the Project Configuration
area of the Connectivity Settings tab. For steps on designating a
project as confidential, see Configure a project, page 264.
If your Mobile configuration contains at least one confidential project,
the user is required to re-enter valid credentials when the MicroStrategy
Mobile application is started, and after the specified period of inactivity.
The inactivity period is set to 5 minutes by default.
MicroStrategy Mobile application is considered inactive if it is
 The
running in the background, if other applications are running in the
foreground, or if the mobile device is locked.
When the user brings the MicroStrategy Mobile application back to the
foreground after the specified amount of time has elapsed, the user is
prompted to enter valid credentials to regain access to the application.
43 To specify requirements for the passwords that Mobile users enter to gain
access to the Mobile application, use the following settings under App
Password Options:
a To require Mobile users to type a password to open the application,
select the Require password to open the application check box.
b To require Mobile users to type a password to open the application
after the mobile device is unlocked, select the Require password
after locking the device check box.
c
To require at least one numeric character in the password, select the
Requires at least one numeric character check box.
d To require at least one special character in the password, select the
Requires at least one special character ($, @, %...) check box.
e
To require at least one capital letter in the password, select the
Requires at least one capital letter check box.
f
To specify a minimum number of characters for the password, type
the desired number, in characters, in the Minimum passcode length
text box. The default value is 4 characters.
g To specify a maximum number of failed login attempts before a user is
locked out of the Mobile application, type the desired maximum
number in the Maximum number of failed logon attempts text box.
The default value is 10 attempts.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
235
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
h To specify the number of seconds that a user is locked out of the
Mobile application after meeting the maximum number of failed
logins, type the desired amount of time, in seconds, in the Lockout
duration text box. The default value is 0 seconds.
i
To specify the amount of inactive time that must elapse before a
password request appears on the mobile device, type the desired
number of seconds in the Require password on resuming
application after text box. The user is required to re-enter valid
credentials when the MicroStrategy Mobile application is resumed
after being inactive for the specified period of time.
MicroStrategy Mobile application is considered inactive if it is
 The
running in the background, if other applications are running in the
foreground, or if the mobile device is locked.
Configure the connectivity settings
44 Click the Connectivity Settings tab to configure the connectivity settings
for your iPhone or iPad. For instructions on configuring the connectivity
settings, see Configuring connectivity settings for iPhone, iPad, Android,
and BlackBerry devices, page 260.
Configure the home screen settings
45 Click the Home Screen tab to configure the appearance of the home
screen in the Mobile application. For detailed instructions on configuring
the home screen, see Configuring the home screen for iPhone, iPad, and
Android devices, page 265.
Save and distribute the Mobile configuration
46 When you are finished creating the configuration, click Save.
47 Generate a URL for the configuration, and distribute it to your Mobile
users. For detailed instructions on generating and distributing a URL, see
Configuring mobile devices using a generated URL, page 280.
Deploying MicroStrategy Mobile for Android
For a list of supported Android devices and operating systems, see the
MicroStrategy Readmes.
236 Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
To deploy MicroStrategy Mobile to users’ Android devices, you can send the
application as an email attachment to your users. The application is installed
when the users download the attachment.
Configuring MicroStrategy Mobile for Android
Before a user can view reports and documents in MicroStrategy Mobile for
iPhone/iPad, the application must be configured to communicate with
Mobile Server and Intelligence Server. Manually configuring each device can
be time-consuming and difficult. Instead, you can create a configuration.
A mobile device configuration is a list of settings for a MicroStrategy Mobile
application that are stored in a file on Mobile Server. A configuration for
MicroStrategy Mobile for Android contains information about the memory
limit, network timeout, caching, and error logging, as well as what projects
can be accessed from the application and what buttons are available on the
home screen.
single configuration can configure devices to connect to multiple
 AMobile
Servers. Users can manually connect to any available Mobile
Server, if the configuration allows them to configure the application
from the mobile device. For instructions on how to configure the
application from the mobile device, see Configuring the application
from the device, page 281.
You can create and save multiple configurations. Each configuration can
have its own login credentials, list of projects, and Home screen design. For
example, you can create one configuration for regional sales managers,
providing access to only those projects that report on sales data. You can
then create another configuration for executives, which gives them access to
all projects currently in production and also provides a Home screen with
buttons for several high-level dashboards.
logins and passwords included with a configuration should be
 User
used only for demonstration purposes, as the configuration is not
transmitted or stored securely.
For information on the requirements to support the Map widget on Android
devices, refer to the MicroStrategy Readme.
Once you have created a configuration, you can generate a URL for that
configuration, and then post that URL to an HTML page. Mobile users can
use their mobile devices to browse to the HTML site and click on the desired
URL. When a user opens the URL on her mobile device, the application is
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
237
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
automatically configured using the settings in the configuration. For steps,
see Configuring mobile devices using a generated URL, page 280.
To create an Android Phone or Android Tablet configuration
1 Access the Mobile Server Administrator page:
•
In Windows: From the Start menu, point to Programs, then
MicroStrategy Tools, and select Mobile Administrator. The Mobile
Server Administrator web page opens.
•
In UNIX/Linux: After you deploy MicroStrategy Mobile Server
Universal and log on to the mstrMobileAdmin servlet using proper
credentials, the Mobile Server Administrator web page opens. The
default location of the Administrator servlet varies depending on the
platform that you are using.
2 From the pane on the left, select Mobile Configuration.
3 Click Define New Configuration.
4 From the Device drop-down list, select either Android Phone or
Android Tablet to create a configuration for the desired device. Click OK.
5 In the Configuration Name field, type the name of the configuration.
This is the name that is displayed in the configuration list.
Configure the Android Phone or Android Tablet settings
6 Select either the Phone Settings or Tablet Settings tab.
7 From the Memory Limit drop down list, select the amount of memory
that is available to the application. Values include 25 MB, 50 MB, 100
MB, 250 MB, 500 MB, 1 GB, 2 GB, 3 GB, or 4 GB. The application uses
either this value or the available memory on the device, whichever is
lower. Reports and documents render faster when more memory is
available to the application. The default value is 250 MB.
8 In the Network Timeout field, specify how long, in seconds, the
application should wait for the network to respond before reporting a
timeout. The default value is 60 seconds.
9 In the Maximum Columns in Grid field, specify the maximum number
of columns displayed at one time in a grid report. If the number of
columns in the grid exceeds this value, the user can scroll to see
238 Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
additional columns. The default value is 10 columns for Android phones
and 50 columns for Android tablets.
10 In the Refresh data and submit pending transactions every field, type
how often, in seconds, the application should validate the report and
document caches on the device with Intelligence Server and upload any
pending transactions. This check only invalidates a cache on the device if
the corresponding cache on Intelligence Server is invalid or expired; it
does not check whether any changes have been made to the original
report or document. The default value is every 600 seconds.
11 Some reports and documents have the pre-caching feature enabled, but
do not use server side caching. To increase the execution performance for
these objects, you can force the application to use the local caches for a
specified amount of time. To do this, select the Cache real-time data for
check box, and in the field, specify the number of seconds that a local
cache remains valid. For instructions on configuring reports, documents,
or the contents of a folder to be pre-cached, see Configuring the home
screen for iPhone and Android Phone or Configuring the home screen
for iPad or Android Tablet.
for a specific report or document has been disabled, you
 Ifcancaching
still force it to use the pre-cache feature on a mobile device. To
do this, open the report or document in Developer, open the
corresponding Report Caching Options or Document Properties
dialog box, and click the Allow mobile devices to cache data
temporarily to optimize performance check box.
12 To check for and download subscription updates in the background,
select the Enable background syncing check box. When this option is
selected, the mobile device checks for updates and downloads
subscriptions at the specified interval, even if the MicroStrategy Mobile
application is not running on the device. To specify the subscription
update interval, do one of the following.
•
To update subscriptions on the device every 1, 2, 4, 10, or 24 hours,
select the desired interval from the Update subscriptions every
drop-down list.
•
To update subscriptions on the device at the same time each day,
select 24 hours from the Update subscriptions every drop-down
list, and then select the desired time from the Time of the day for
update drop-down list.
13 By default, the Mobile Server network response quality is measured and
displayed as a green, yellow, or red image on the mobile client. To disable
this feature, clear the Monitor Network Status check box.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
239
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
14 By default, users can view and change the configuration settings in the
Settings screen in the application. To prevent users from changing the
configuration settings for the application, clear the Allow users to
access settings check box.
15 By default, if a cache exists for a subscribed report or document, that
cache is loaded when the user opens that report or document, and only
for the page-by selection or layout that is opened. This speeds up initial
access to the application. To allow access to reports and documents even
when the connection to the network is intermittent, select the
Automatically pre-load subscriptions check box. If this check box is
selected, caches are loaded for all subscribed reports and documents
when the application is launched.
16 By default, MicroStrategy Mobile caches the contents of folders, and does
not refresh the folder unless the user shakes the device while in the folder
screen. To disable folder caching and to refresh folders every time that
the user opens them, clear the Cache folders check box. Clearing this
option may cause Mobile to open folders more slowly, as it must retrieve
information about the folders from Intelligence Server every time they
are opened.
17 By default, reports and documents are cached on the device until either
the memory limit is reached or a newer version of the report or document
is available. This allows access to reports and documents even when the
connection to the network is intermittent. To clear the caches when the
application is closed, select the Clear caches when the application
closes check box.
18 By default, users can modify caching settings for the Mobile application.
For example, users can choose to clear or save caches when the
application is closed. To prevent users from modifying caching settings,
clear the Allow users to modify caching settings check box.
19 By default, users can enable Diagnostic Mode in the Mobile application.
Diagnostic Mode gives users access to the binary file that is generated by
dashboards viewed on the mobile device. To prevent users from enabling
Diagnostic Mode, clear the Allow users to enable Diagnostic Mode
check box.
20 To prevent users from sharing images of documents from the
MicroStrategy Mobile application, clear the Allow users to share
document screenshots check box. When this option is disabled, Mobile
users cannot access the Share and Annotate features.
240 Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
21 By default, the MicroStrategy Mobile application displays a Learn More
link. When this link is tapped by a Mobile user, the mobile version of the
MicroStrategy website opens in the default web browser. You can modify
the Learn More link in the following ways.
•
To change the website that opens when the Learn More link is tapped,
type the desired URL in the Custom URL field.
•
To remove the Learn More link, clear the Show “Learn More” link
check box.
22 By default, the configuration used on the device is not updated
automatically. To enable the mobile device to check the Mobile Server for
updates to the configuration at a specified time interval:
a In the Check and update configuration settings, select Every.
b From the drop-down list, select whether to specify the time interval in
Days or Hours.
c
In the field, type the number of days or hours that must pass between
each check for updates. The MicroStrategy Mobile application checks
for an update to the Mobile configuration at this specified interval. If
an update is found, the user is prompted to apply the new
configuration to the mobile device. The user can then choose to apply
the new configuration or wait for a later time. If the user selects the
latter option, the prompt reappears five minutes later.
23 To set up client authentication for Mobile Server, select the Use
Certificate Server check box. With this option selected, you can set up a
client certificate server responsible for creating certificates for mobile
clients. These certificates are required from mobile clients attempting to
access the Mobile Server. To specify the certificate server, type the
certificate server’s URL in the Use Certificate Server text field. This field
must begin with https:// and requires the use of the fully qualified
name of the certificate server in the URL, as in the following examples.
ASP:
https://fully_qualified_domain_name:port/
CertificateServer/asp/certificate.aspx
JSP:
https://fully_qualified_domain_name:port/
CertificateServer
or
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
241
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
https://fully_qualified_domain_name:port/
CertificateServer/servlet/certificate
where:
•
fully_qualified_domain_name:port is the location and port of
your certificate server. For example,
machine_name.domain.com:8443.
For detailed instructions on configuring a certificate server, see Client
authentication with a certificate server, page 197.
24 If you have Android devices that do not contain Google Maps external
libraries, you must specify a Google Maps API key to enable Google Maps.
To do this, select the Enable maps check box and type your
organization's Google Maps API key in the Key field. If you have a
Premiere key, select the Premiere key check box, and type the authorized
domain name that you registered with Google in the Authorized domain
field. The Premiere key can be used by devices running Android version
3.x or better.
Configuring passcode and encryption options
25 To require users to enter a password to access the application, and to
enable the encryption of caches on their mobile devices, select the
Requires passcode (required for Data Encryption) check box. When
this option is selected, a Mobile user must create a password the first time
that she opens the Mobile application. The user is then prompted for the
password each time that she attempts to open the application.
device caches are encrypted only if the Requires Passcode
 Mobile
check box is selected.
26 To require Mobile users to type a password to open the application after
the mobile device is unlocked, select the Require password after
locking the device check box.
27 To specify requirements for the passwords that Mobile users enter to gain
access to the Mobile application, use the following settings under
Encryption options:
a To require at least one numeric character in the password, select the
Requires at least one numeric character check box.
b To require at least one special character in the password, select the
Requires at least one special character ($, @, %...) check box.
242 Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
c
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
To require at least one capital letter in the password, select the
Requires at least one capital letter check box.
d To specify a minimum number of characters for the password, type
the desired number, in characters, in the Minimum passcode length
text box. The default value is 4 characters.
e
To specify a maximum number of failed login attempts before a user is
locked out of the Mobile application, type the desired maximum
number in the Maximum number of failed logon attempts text box.
The default value is 10 attempts.
f
To specify the number of seconds that a user is locked out of the
Mobile application after meeting the maximum number of failed
logins, type the desired amount of time, in seconds, in the Lockout
duration text box. The default value is 0 seconds.
g To specify the amount of inactive time that must elapse before a
password request appears on the mobile device, type the desired
number of seconds in the Require password on resuming
application after text box. The user is required to re-enter valid
credentials when the MicroStrategy Mobile application is resumed
after being inactive for the specified period of time.
MicroStrategy Mobile application is considered inactive if it is
 The
running in the background, if other applications are running in the
foreground, or if the mobile device is locked.
28 To continue the mobile configuration, click the Connectivity Settings
tab. For detailed instructions on configuring connectivity settings, see
Configuring connectivity settings for iPhone, iPad, Android, and
BlackBerry devices, page 260.
Installing MicroStrategy Mobile for BlackBerry
For a list of supported BlackBerry devices and operating systems, see the
MicroStrategy Readmes.
The MicroStrategy Mobile application is written in Java Micro Edition
(J2ME). Multiple versions of the Java .cod files are available to support the
application on various BlackBerry operating systems. The library file
MSTRMobile.alx automatically detects which version of the files should be
installed on a given BlackBerry. By default, the application is stored on your
server in the folder C:\Program Files\MicroStrategy\
Mobile Clients\BlackBerry Client. The folder C:\
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
243
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Program Files\MicroStrategy\Mobile Clients\BlackBerry
Client for Browser Deployment contains additional files necessary
for deploying the application over the web.
There are several ways to install the MicroStrategy Mobile application:
•
The recommended method is to deploy the application to multiple
devices at once, through the BlackBerry Enterprise Server (BES). For
more information on using the BES to deploy the application, see
Installing the application on multiple devices simultaneously, page 244.
•
You can also make the application available on your company network for
individual users to download onto their devices. For more information on
setting up this browser-based deployment, see Installing the application
from a website, page 245.
•
Individual users can use BlackBerry Desktop Manager to install the
application onto a BlackBerry. For more information about this method
of installation, see Installing the application on individual devices,
page 246.
you have previously installed a demonstration version of
 IfMicroStrategy
Mobile on a mobile device, you must uninstall the
demonstration version before installing the full version of
MicroStrategy Mobile.
Installing the application on multiple devices simultaneously
If you have administrator access to your company's BlackBerry Enterprise
Server (BES), you can use the BES to push the MicroStrategy Mobile
application to the devices that require it. This is the recommended method of
installing the application for several reasons:
•
The application can be quickly installed on multiple devices
simultaneously, instead of having to be installed on each device
individually.
•
Updates to the application can be easily distributed to all users.
•
Control over which users have installed the application is fully in the
hands of the administrator.
•
IT policies that control Mobile Server, authentication information, and BI
applications can be configured and enforced without requiring end-user
interaction. For information on configuring IT Policies over the BES, see
Configuring multiple devices automatically, page 247.
244 Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Distributing the application to users by means of the BES takes between
three and four hours. For detailed instructions on how to deploy an
application using the BES, see the documentation provided with the BES.
Installing the application from a website
If you are unable to install the application by means of the BES, you can set
up an internal website containing the MicroStrategy Mobile application
installation package. Mobile device users can then individually download
and install the MicroStrategy Mobile application by pointing the BlackBerry
Browser to the website.
The files for browser-based deployment are stored in a subdirectory of the
default installation directory: \BlackBerry Client for Browser
Deployment. Multiple versions of these files are available for various
BlackBerry operating systems. Each version consists of several Java .cod
files and a .jad file. In addition, the directory contains two web pages,
installMSTRMobile.aspx and installMSTRMobile.jsp. The user
opens one of these files in the BlackBerry Browser to install the application.
To configure the MicroStrategy Mobile application for browser-based
deployment, the web server administrator places the application files on the
web server and installs either installMSTRMobile.aspx (for a
.NET-based web server) or installMSTRMobile.jsp (for a J2EE-based
web server). The installMSTRMobile file must be installed in the same
directory as the application files. The administrator also creates the following
MIME type associations on the web server:
•
.jad: text/vnd.sun.j2me.app-descriptor
•
.cod: application/vnd.rim.cod
instructions on deploying files to your web server and creating
 For
MIME type associations, see the web server’s documentation.
The Blackberry user points the BlackBerry Browser to the installed
installMSTRMobile file. The words “Click here to install MicroStrategy
Mobile on your BlackBerry device.” appear on the screen. Clicking the link
opens a dialog box with information about the MicroStrategy Mobile
application. The user clicks the Download button, and the application is
downloaded and installed onto the user’s BlackBerry.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
245
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Installing the application on individual devices
Individual users can also tether their BlackBerry to a computer and use
BlackBerry Desktop Manager to install the MicroStrategy Mobile
application. The library file MSTRMobile.alx must be loaded onto the
BlackBerry. This file automatically loads the appropriate Java files to run the
application. For instructions on how to install an application on a BlackBerry
with BlackBerry Desktop Manager, see the documentation provided with
BlackBerry Desktop Manager.
Desktop Manager must be using the same or later version
 BlackBerry
of the BlackBerry software as the device. For example, if Desktop
Manager is version 4.1 and the BlackBerry is version 4.2, you will be
unable to load the MicroStrategy Mobile application onto the device.
Configuring MicroStrategy Mobile for BlackBerry
After installing the MicroStrategy Mobile application, you must configure it
so that it can communicate with your MicroStrategy system.
The BlackBerry Enterprise Server (BES) enables you to set an IT Policy for its
client applications. With this IT Policy, you can configure all the devices at
once. For details on the settings for the MicroStrategy Mobile application IT
Policy, see Configuring multiple devices automatically, page 247. For
detailed instructions on how to deploy an IT Policy over the BES, see the
documentation provided with the BES.
If you are not using an IT Policy, you can create a Mobile configuration from
the Mobile Server Administrator page, or you can configure individual
devices through the Mobile application’s Preferences screen. For instructions
on creating a Mobile configuration, see Configuring the application from
Mobile Server Administrator. For instructions on configuring an application
manually, see Configuring the application from the BlackBerry device,
page 258.
Information needed to configure the application
To retrieve report data from a Mobile Server, you must specify the following
information about that server:
•
The server name
•
The port the server is running on
246 Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
•
The path to the MicroStrategy Mobile application
•
The application type (ASP.NET for Mobile, or J2EE for Mobile Universal)
•
The authentication mode (anonymous, basic, or Windows) and login
information used to access the server’s virtual directory
•
Whether the requests are sent as HTTP (unsecured) or HTTPS (secured)
more information about the difference between HTTP and
 For
HTTPS, see SSL encryption, page 197.
In addition, you must provide the following information for each project
containing reports or documents to be viewed in Mobile:
•
The project’s name
•
The name of the Intelligence Server that hosts the project
•
The port number for that Intelligence Server
•
The authentication mode and login information used to access the
reports or documents in the project
By default, MicroStrategy Mobile uses standard MicroStrategy
authentication to identify the user logging in to projects on the MicroStrategy
Mobile Server. However, you can use any of the supported forms of
authentication to log in to the server: standard authentication, Windows
credentials, warehouse authentication, or LDAP authentication. For details
about the different authentication modes, see the Setting up User Security
chapter in the System Administration Guide.
Configuring multiple devices automatically
The BlackBerry Enterprise Server (BES) enables administrators to set IT
Policies for the different applications configured via the BES. For
instructions on how to set IT Policies over the BES, see the documentation
provided with the BES.
The settings you can configure for the MicroStrategy Mobile Client IT Policy
are listed in the following table. When reviewing the table, be aware of the
following markings:
•
Settings marked with † are required in the IT Policy. Other settings are
optional and can be omitted.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
247
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
•
Settings marked with * cannot be changed on the Mobile device once they
have been set with the IT Policy.
•
Settings marked with ** cannot be changed on the Mobile device if the
MSTRWebServersLocked property in the IT Policy is set to True.
Policy Item Name
Value and definition
Application preferences
MSTRUpdateWindowStartTime
Time of day at which the Mobile application begins retrieving
reports from the Mobile Server, in the format hh:mm.
MSTRUpdateWindowStartTimeType
Determines whether the update window’s start time is based on
a fixed time zone or the time zone of the device.
• 1 for fixed time zone
• 2 for device time zone
MSTRUpdateWindowStartTimeZone
The name of the time zone used to determine the update
window’s start time, if the update window is not based on the
device’s time zone.
• Example: America/New York
• Example: Asia/Tokyo
MSTRUpdateWindowLength
The length of the update window, in hours, from 1 to 24.
MSTRUpdateWindowMode
Determines whether the Mobile application updates reports and
documents automatically.
• 1 to enable automatic reconciliation
• 0 to disable automatic reconciliation
* MSTRMinimumDeviceFreeMem
Percentage of device memory that is guaranteed to not be used
by the Mobile application. Possible values are 1, 5, 10, 15, 25,
30. For more information, see the MicroStrategy Mobile Analysis
Guide.
MSTRDisplaySizeInReportList
Determines whether the size (in KB) of each report or document
is displayed in the list of reports.
• 1 to display size
• 0 to not display size
*
MSTRDefaultWebServerAuthenticati
onMode
Use the value corresponding to the type of authentication
necessary to access the MicroStrategy Mobile Server’s virtual
directory. For an explanation of the different authentication
modes, see your web server’s documentation.
• 1 for Anonymous
• 2 for Basic
• 3 for Windows
MSTRDefaultWebServerLogin
The default login name used for the web server.
MSTRDefaultWebServerPassword
The password used for the default login above.
248 Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Policy Item Name
Value and definition
* MSTRTCPConnectionMode
Use the value corresponding to your web server’s TCP
connection mode. For an explanation of the different connection
modes, see your web server’s documentation.
• 1 for Default
• 2 for MDS Proxy
• 3 for Direct
* MSTRTLSConnectionMode
Use the value corresponding to your web server’s TLS
connection mode. For an explanation of the different connection
modes, see your web server’s documentation. This setting is
only relevant if at least one MicroStrategy Mobile Server uses
https.
• 1 for Default
• 2 for End-to-End TLS Desired
• 3 for End-to-End TLS Required
*
Use the value corresponding to your web server’s credential
MSTRWebServerCredentialsSubmiss submission mode. For an explanation of the different modes, see
ionMode
your web server’s documentation. This setting is only relevant if
at least one MicroStrategy Mobile Server uses Basic
authentication and the BlackBerry MDS is configured to support
HTTP authentication.
• 1 for Only When Challenged
• 2 for On Every Request
* MSTRReportSizeLimit
Reports larger than this value (in KB) are not downloaded from
the server. If this value is set to 0, all reports are downloaded
from the server.
* MSTRMaxDataSize
Set this value to a few thousand bytes less than the Mobile Data
Service Maximum Data Size. For example, if the Mobile Data
Service Maximum Data Size is 128 KB, this value should be
around 125000.
MicroStrategy Mobile Servers and Projects
† * MSTRWebServerCount
The number of Mobile Servers that MicroStrategy Mobile can
connect to.
If this setting is defined, the application looks for i groups of IT
Policy items named MSTRWebServeri<SETTING>, with values
of i from 0 to (MSTRWebServerCount - 1).
* MSTRWebServersLocked
If this setting is False, the user can add, remove, or modify the
MicroStrategy Mobile Servers and projects that are configured
on the device. If this setting is True or is not defined, all
MicroStrategy Mobile Server and project settings are read-only
on the device.
Note: If this setting is False, the IT Policy will only be applied to
the Mobile Server list if the user has not previously modified any
of the server settings on the application.
† ** MSTRWebServeriName
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
The name or IP address of a MicroStrategy Mobile Server that
the device connects to.
Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
249
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Policy Item Name
Value and definition
† ** MSTRWebServeriPort
The port used by this MicroStrategy Mobile Server. The default
value is 80.
† ** MSTRWebServeriPath
The path this MicroStrategy Mobile Server is installed to.
• For MicroStrategy Web, this is the IIS virtual directory name.
• For MicroStrategy Web Universal, this is the location where
the J2EE application is installed.
† ** MSTRWebServeriType
Indicates whether this server is running MicroStrategy Web or
MicroStrategy Web Universal.
• 0 for MicroStrategy Web Universal
• 1 for MicroStrategy Web
† ** MSTRWebServeriProtocol
Set this to http for no encryption or https for SSL encryption.
For an explanation of SSL encryption, see SSL encryption,
page 197.
† **
MSTRWebServeriAuthenticationMod
e
Use the value corresponding to the type of authentication
necessary to access this MicroStrategy Mobile Server’s virtual
directory. For an explanation of the different authentication
modes, see your web server’s documentation.
• 1 for Anonymous
• 2 for Basic
• 3 for Windows
† MSTRWebServeriLogin
The login for this Mobile Server, if different from the default.
† MSTRWebServeriPassword
The password for the login, if the login is different from the
default.
**
MSTRWebServeriDefaultAuthenticati
onMode
Use the value corresponding to the default type of authentication
used to log in to projects on this MicroStrategy Mobile Server.
For an explanation of the different authentication modes, see the
Setting up User Security chapter in the System Administration
Guide.
• 1 for Standard
• 2 for Windows
• 16 for LDAP
• 32 for Warehouse Passthrough
MSTRWebServeriDefaultLogin
The MicroStrategy login used by default to access Mobile reports
and documents on this MicroStrategy Mobile Server.
MSTRWebServeriDefaultPassword
The password for the default login above.
† ** MSTRWebServeriProjectCount
The number of projects configured on this Mobile Server that
MicroStrategy Mobile retrieves reports and documents from.
If this setting is defined, the application looks for j groups of IT
Policy items named MSTRWebServeriProjectj<SETTING>, with
values of j from 0 to (MSTRWebServeriProjectCount - 1)
† ** MSTRWebServeriProjectjName
The name of a project from which reports and documents are
retrieved.
Note: This field is case-sensitive.
250 Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Policy Item Name
Value and definition
† **
MSTRWebServeriProjectjServerNam
e
The name or IP address of the Intelligence Server that hosts the
project.
† **
MSTRWebServeriProjectjServerPort
The port use by the Intelligence Server hosting the project.
† **
Use the value corresponding to the type of authentication
MSTRWebServeriProjectjAuthenticati necessary for the user to log in to this project on the
onMode
MicroStrategy Mobile Server. For an explanation of the different
authentication modes, see the Setting up User Security chapter
in the System Administration Guide.
• 1 for Standard
• 2 for Windows
• 16 for LDAP
• 32 for Warehouse Passthrough
† MSTRWebServeriProjectjLogin
The MicroStrategy login used to access Mobile reports and
documents in this project, if different from the default.
† MSTRWebServeriProjectjPassword The password for the login above.
Sample BES IT Policy
The table below contains a sample BES IT Policy for a BlackBerry that can
access two Mobile Servers and three projects.
Policy Item Name
Value
MSTRUpdateWindowStartTime
05:00
MSTRUpdateWindowStartTimeType
1
MSTRUpdateWindowStartTimeZone
America/New York
MSTRUpdateWindowLength
3
MSTRUpdateWindowMode
1
MSTRMinimumDeviceFreeMem
25
MSTRDisplaySizeInReportList
1
MSTRTCPConnectionMode
1
MSTRTLSConnectionMode
1
MSTRWebServerCredentialsSubmissionMode
2
MSTRReportSizeLimit
128
MSTRMaxDataSize
125000
MSTRWebServerCount
2
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
251
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Policy Item Name
Value
MSTRWebServersLocked
True
MSTRWebServer0Name
mobilereportserver
MSTRWebServer0Port
80
MSTRWebServer0Path
MicroStrategyMobile
MSTRWebServer0Type
1
MSTRWebServer0Protocol
http
MSTRWebServer0AuthenticationMode
3
MSTRWebServer0Login
NETWORK\jdoe
MSTRWebServer0Password
networkpassword123
MSTRWebServer0ProjectCount
2
MSTRWebServer0Project0Name
Human Resources Analysis
MSTRWebServer0Project0ServerName
archimedes
MSTRWebServer0Project0ServerPort
80
MSTRWebServer0Project0AuthenticationMode
1
MSTRWebServer0Project0Login
hzhou
MSTRWebServer0Project0Password
zhoupassword123
MSTRWebServer0Project1Name
Sales Analysis
MSTRWebServer0Project1ServerName
archimedes
MSTRWebServer0Project1ServerPort
80
MSTRWebServer0Project1AuthenticationMode
2
MSTRWebServer0Project1Login
NETWORK\hzhou
MSTRWebServer0Project1Password
networkpassword123
MSTRWebServer1Name
mobiletestserver
MSTRWebServer1Port
80
MSTRWebServer1Path
MicroStrategyMobile
MSTRWebServer1Type
1
MSTRWebServer1Protocol
http
MSTRWebServer1AuthenticationMode
1
(Note: Since this Web Server uses
anonymous authentication, the login and
password are not required.)
MSTRWebServer1ProjectCount
1
252 Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Policy Item Name
Value
MSTRWebServer1Project0Name
DevelopmentProject
MSTRWebServer1Project0
ServerName
sophocles
MSTRWebServer1Project0ServerPort
80
MSTRWebServer1Project0AuthenticationMode
1
MSTRWebServer1Project0Login
dev_jdoe
MSTRWebServer1Project0Password
dev123
Configuring the application from Mobile Server
Administrator
If you do not have access to the BlackBerry Enterprise Server, you can
configure the Mobile application through MicroStrategy Mobile Server. This
creates a configuration, that is, an XML file containing mobile device
configuration instructions, in Mobile Server. You can create a URL for a
configuration and then post that URL to an HTML page, or email it to users.
Mobile users can click the URL to configure their devices. When users open
the URL on their mobile devices, the application is automatically configured
using the settings in the configuration.
You can create and save multiple configurations. Each configuration can
have its own login credentials and list of projects. For example, you can
create one configuration for regional sales managers, providing access to
only those projects that report on sales data. You can then create another
configuration for executives, which gives them access to all projects currently
in production.
logins and passwords included with a configuration should be
 User
used only for demonstration purposes, as the configuration is not
transmitted or stored securely.
To create a BlackBerry configuration
1 Access the Mobile Server Administrator page:
•
In Windows: From the Start menu, point to Programs, then
MicroStrategy Tools, and select Mobile Administrator. The Mobile
Server Administrator web page opens.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
253
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
•
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
In UNIX/Linux: After you deploy MicroStrategy Mobile Server
Universal and log on to the mstrMobileAdmin servlet using proper
credentials, the Mobile Server Administrator web page opens. The
default location of the Administrator servlet varies depending on the
platform that you are using.
2 From the pane on the left, select Mobile Configuration.
3 Click Define New Configuration. The Create Configuration page opens.
4 From the Device drop-down list, select BlackBerry.
5 In the Configuration Name field, type the name of the configuration.
This name is displayed in the list of all saved configurations.
Configure the BlackBerry settings
6 Select the BlackBerry Settings tab.
7 By default, users can modify configuration settings from their mobile
devices. To restrict user access to configuration settings on mobile
devices, clear the Allow users to modify settings from the device
check box.
8 To allow users to configure real-time updates, select the Allow users to
configure Real-Time Updates check box.
9 From the Device Minimum Free Memory drop-down list, select the
percentage of device memory that is not accessible by the Mobile
application for report storage. Possible values are 1, 5, 10, 15, 25, or 30.
The default minimum is 5%.
10 To view advanced settings, click Show Advanced Settings.
Configure network parameters
11 Select your web server's TCP connection mode from the TCP Connection
Mode drop-down list. Possible values are Default, MDS Proxy, or Direct.
The default TCP connection mode is MDS Proxy. For an explanation of
the different connection modes, see your web server's documentation.
12 If at least one Mobile Server uses HTTPS, select your web server's TLS
connection mode from the TLS Connection Mode drop-down list.
Possible values are Default, End-to-End TLS Desired, or End-to-End TLS
Required. The default TLS connection mode is Default. For an
254 Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
5
explanation of the TLS connection modes, see your web server’s
documentation.
13 In the Request Timeout field, specify the number of seconds that clients
must wait before giving up on establishing a connection with the Mobile
Server. The default timeout is 120 seconds.
14 In the Push Listen Port field, specify a port between 0 and 65535 for the
Mobile application to use to listen for push notifications. The default port
is 31851.
that the port that you enter is free and not in use by
 Ensure
another application.
Configure web server authentication settings
15 To specify when the device submits web server credentials, select either
Submit Web Server Credentials Only When Challenged or Submit
Web Server Credentials On Every Request.
setting is only relevant if at least one Mobile Server uses Basic
 This
authentication and the BlackBerry MDS is configured to support
HTTP authentication.
Configure client memory management settings
16 In the Maximum Report Size field, specify a limit, in kilobytes, for a
compressed report XML file that can be downloaded on the client device.
To allow reports of any size to be downloaded, select the No Limit check
box. The default maximum is 125 KB.
17 By default, when the Mobile application receives a low memory
notification, reports that are currently loading are aborted. To allow
reports to load when a low memory notification is received, clear the Stop
on Low Memory Notification check box.
18 In the Rows Per Page field, specify the maximum number of rows that
are displayed on each page for a report. The default value is 50 rows. To
remove the limit for the number of rows on a page, select the No Limit
check box.
Rows Per Page value must be less than or equal to the
 The
Maximum Rows in Memory value.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
255
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
19 In the Maximum Rows in Memory field, specify the number of rows that
can be loaded into memory for a report. The default value is 500 rows.
Maximum Rows in Memory value must be greater than or
 The
equal to the Rows Per page value.
20 In the Status History field, specify the maximum number of completed
tasks that are shown in the status list. The default limit is 10 tasks. To
remove the limit for completed tasks in the status list, select the No Limit
check box.
21 When a mobile device is busy executing, up to 500 pending tasks can be
queued in its memory by default. To specify a new limit for pending tasks,
type the desired maximum in the Task Queue Size field. To remove the
limit for pending tasks, select the No Limit check box.
Configuring data retrieval settings
22 In the Segment Size field, specify the maximum size, in kilobytes, of a
single unit of data that can be transferred from the Mobile Server to a
mobile client. The default value is 4 KB.
Segment Size value must be less than or equal to the
 The
Maximum Request Size value.
23 By default, when a mobile client sends a request to the Mobile Server, the
size of the response body is limited to 250 kilobytes. To alter this value,
type the desired limit, in kilobytes, in the Maximum Request Size field.
Maximum Request Size value must be greater than or equal to
 The
the Segment Size value.
24 By default, the target time for a single HTTP request is 15 seconds. This
value, along with the running average data rate, is used to calculate the
amount of data that can be downloaded in a given request. To alter this
value, type the desired target time, in seconds, in the Request Target
Time field.
25 The Data Rate Smoothing Coefficient indicates the weight that is assigned
to the average data rate when calculating the amount of data that can be
downloaded in a given request. The default smoothing coefficient is 0.65.
To alter this value, type the desired smoothing coefficient, between 0 and
1, in the Data Rate Smoothing Coefficient field.
26 By default, a mobile client must wait 5 seconds between sending requests
to poll the Intelligence Server for results. To change this value, type the
desired number of seconds in the Server Polling Frequency field.
256 Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
27 By default, a mobile client can execute a report or document up to 3 times
if execution fails. This limit is used to cap the number of executions in
case successive execution requests time out. To alter this setting, type the
desired limit in the Result Set Execution Limit field.
28 When a mobile client makes a connection with a Mobile Server, it checks
the Mobile Server version to ensure that it is compatible. To skip this
check, select the Disable Server Version Check check box.
Configuring conservative mode settings
mode settings affect the Mobile application’s behavior
 Conservative
when it is operating in the background.
29 In the Request Target Time field, specify the target time, in seconds, for
a single HTTP request in conservative mode. The default value is 5
seconds.
30 In the Wait Between Requests field, specify the number of seconds that
the client waits between HTTP requests in conservative mode. The
default value is 5 seconds.
31 In the Device Idle Time Limit field, specify the maximum number of
seconds that the device can be idle before it switches out of conservative
mode. The default value is 30 seconds.
Configuring connectivity settings
32 Click the Connectivity Settings tab, and specify the connectivity settings
for your BlackBerry devices. For detailed instructions on configuring
these settings, see Configuring connectivity settings for iPhone, iPad,
Android, and BlackBerry devices, page 260.
33 Click Save to save your Mobile configuration.
Generate a URL for your Mobile configuration
34 Generate a URL for your Mobile configuration, and email it to your
BlackBerry users. For detailed instructions on generating a URL for your
Mobile configuration, see Configuring mobile devices using a generated
URL, page 280.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
257
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Configuring the application from the BlackBerry device
If you do not have access to the BlackBerry Enterprise Server, you can
configure the Mobile application through the Preferences screen. You need
to add the connection information for the MicroStrategy Mobile Server, and
then configure the projects that you want to receive reports from, as
described in the procedures below.
To manually configure MicroStrategy Mobile with MicroStrategy Mobile Server
information
1 In MicroStrategy Mobile, click the trackball/trackwheel and select
Preferences. The Preferences screen opens.
2 Scroll to the area labeled Mobile Servers Configured.
3 Click the trackball/trackwheel and select Add Mobile Server. The Mobile
Server Setup screen opens.
4 Enter the information for each option:
•
Name: the MicroStrategy Mobile Server, by DNS name or IP address.
•
Port: the port that the MicroStrategy Mobile Server uses.
•
Path: the path that the MicroStrategy Mobile Server is installed to.
•
Type: select either ASP.NET for MicroStrategy Mobile or J2EE for
MicroStrategy Mobile Universal.
•
Request Type: select HTTP for no encryption or HTTPS for SSL
encryption. For an explanation of SSL encryption, see SSL encryption,
page 197.
5 To use the default authentication settings, select the Use Default check
box. Otherwise, specify the Mobile Server authentication settings:
a Under Authentication, clear the Use Default check box.
b Scroll to the area entitled Authentication Mode.
c
Click the trackball/trackwheel and select the authentication mode to
use to log in to the Mobile Server machine.
d For basic or Windows authentication, in the Login field, type the user
name.
258 Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
e
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
For basic or Windows authentication, in the Password field, type the
password for the login.
default authentication mode is set from the Preferences
 The
screen, in the Default Mobile Server Authentication section.
6 Scroll to the area labeled Default Project Authentication. The options in
this area determine the default authentication mode for all projects
configured for this server.
7 Enter the information for each option:
•
Mode: select either Standard, Windows, LDAP, or Database
•
Login: the user name that you use to access the Intelligence Server
•
Password: the password for the Login above
8 Click the trackball/trackwheel and select Close. The Mobile Server Setup
screen closes.
9 Click the trackball/trackwheel and select Save. The new Mobile Server
information is saved.
Once you have configured a Mobile Server, you need to add information
about the projects that contain the reports and documents you are
subscribed to.
To add a project to MicroStrategy Mobile
1 In MicroStrategy Mobile, click the trackball/trackwheel and select
Preferences. The Preferences screen opens.
2 Scroll to the area entitled Mobile Servers Configured.
3 Highlight the MicroStrategy Mobile Server that you want to add a project
for.
4 Click the trackball/trackwheel and select Edit Mobile Server. The Mobile
Server Setup screen opens.
5 Scroll to the area entitled Projects Configured.
6 Click the trackball/trackwheel and select Add Project. The Project Setup
screen opens.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
259
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
7 Enter the information for each option:
•
Project Name: the name of the MicroStrategy project. This field is
case-sensitive.
•
Server Name: the Intelligence Server that contains the project, by
DNS name or IP address.
•
Server Port: the Intelligence Server port number.
8 To use the default authentication mode and credentials for the project,
under Authentication, select the Use Default check box. To use a
different authentication method, use the following procedure:
a Under Authentication, clear the Use Default check box.
b Scroll to the area entitled Mode.
c
Click the trackball/trackwheel and select the type of authentication
for the project.
d In the Login field, enter the login name for the project.
e
In the Password field, enter the password associated with your login
for the project.
9 Click the trackball/trackwheel and select Close. The Project Setup screen
closes and the project is now listed under Projects Configured.
10 Click the trackball/trackwheel and select Close. The Mobile Server Setup
screen closes.
11 Click the trackball/trackwheel and select Save. The project configuration
information is saved.
Configuring connectivity settings for iPhone, iPad, Android,
and BlackBerry devices
To configure mobile devices to communicate with Mobile Server and provide
access to projects, you must provide connection and authentication
information. Configure the connection and authentication information for
your Mobile Server(s) and project(s) in the Connectivity Settings tab of the
Mobile Configuration.
260 Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Configure the connectivity settings
1 From the Mobile Configuration, select the Connectivity Settings tab.
2 By default, user logins and passwords can be cached on the mobile device
for a specified period of time. To stop credentials from caching on mobile
devices, select the Never Persist Credentials check box. When this
option is selected, a user is required to log in when she completely closes
and reopens MicroStrategy Mobile. To completely close MicroStrategy
Mobile, the user must also close the background task for the application
on her device. This option is available for iPhone, iPad, and Android
devices.
3 Under Default Mobile Server Authentication, specify the default Mobile
Server authentication settings.
a From the Authentication Mode drop-down list, select the default
authentication mode to use to log in to the Mobile Server machine.




For iPhone, iPad, or BlackBerry, to use a trusted authentication
provider such as Tivoli or SiteMinder, you must choose Basic and
enter your credentials for the trusted authentication provider.
The default mode is Anonymous.
For Android, to use trusted authentication as the default
authentication mode, you must use basic authentication.
If you are using HTML forms for trusted authentication with the
iPhone or iPad, you can choose Anonymous, Basic, or Windows as
the default Mobile Server authentication mode.
b For basic or Windows authentication, in the Login field, type the user
name. To use basic authentication with a trusted authentication
provider, type your trusted authentication provider login.
c
For basic or Windows authentication, in the Password field, type the
password for the login. To use basic authentication with a trusted
authentication provider, type your trusted authentication provider
password.
d For basic or Windows authentication, you can override login
credentials that users may have specified on their mobile devices. To
do this, select the Overwrite user-specified credentials when
applying configuration check box.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
261
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
4 Click Configure New Mobile Server.
5 In the Mobile Server Name field, type the fully qualified host name of
this machine. This is the Mobile Server that the application will connect
to.
•
For iPhone, iPad, or BlackBerry, if you are using trusted
authentication, in this field, type the URL that is monitored by your
trusted authentication provider. For example, if you are using Tivoli
for trusted authentication, type http://tivoli_machine:port/
junctionName/. For additional information on trusted
authentication, see the System Administration Guide.
•
If you are using trusted authentication, in this field, type the name of
the trusted authentication provider machine.
6 If mobile clients must use a different name to access the Mobile Server,
select the Mobile clients access this server using the following
external name check box, and type the name in the field. For example,
type the externally accessible name of a load balancer in
machine-name.domain.com format.
7 In the Mobile Server port field, type the port number that is used by
Mobile Server on this machine. The default port is 80.
8 In the Mobile Server path field, type the path to the MicroStrategy
Mobile Server files on this machine. The default path is
MicroStrategyMobile.
9 From the Mobile Server type drop-down list, select ASP.NET for
MicroStrategy Mobile, or J2EE for MicroStrategy Mobile Universal.
ASP.NET is selected by default.
10 From the Request type drop-down list, specify whether the mobile
devices use HTTP (no encryption) or HTTPS (HTTP encryption) to access
the Mobile Server. For more information about HTTP and HTTPS and
instructions on configuring Secure Sockets Layer (SSL), see SSL
encryption, page 197. For information on encrypting traffic to Mobile
Server, see Encrypting session information, page 210.
must decide whether to configure your Mobile Server to use
 You
SSL prior to creating mobile configurations. If you attempt to
implement SSL on your Mobile Server after creating mobile
configurations, you will not be able to update any configuration
that has a Request Type of HTTP.
262 Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
11 The default Mobile Server authentication settings specified above are
used to log in to the Mobile Server. To use different login credentials,
clear the Use default authentication check box and specify the Mobile
Server authentication settings:
a From the Authentication mode drop-down list, select the default
authentication mode to use to log in to the Mobile Server machine.
For iPhone, iPad, or BlackBerry, to use a trusted authentication
provider such as Tivoli or SiteMinder, you must choose Basic and
enter your credentials for the trusted authentication provider.



If you are using HTML forms for trusted authentication with the
iPhone or iPad, you can choose Anonymous, Basic, or Windows as
the Mobile Server authentication mode.
Anonymous authentication is selected by default.
For Android, to use trusted authentication, you must use basic
authentication.
b For basic or Windows authentication, in the Login field, type the user
name. To use basic authentication with a trusted authentication
provider, type your trusted authentication provider login.
c
For basic or Windows authentication, in the Password field, type the
password for the login. To use basic authentication with a trusted
authentication provider, type your trusted authentication provider
password.
d For basic or Windows authentication, you can override login
credentials that a user may have specified on their mobile device. To
do this, select the Overwrite user-specified credentials when
applying configuration check box.
12 Under Default Project Authentication, specify the default project
authentication settings.
a From the Authentication mode drop-down list, select the type of
authentication used by the Intelligence Server. Standard
authentication is selected by default.
If you select Trusted Authentication or Windows
 Authentication,
the Login and Password fields are disabled. For
iPhone, iPad, or BlackBerry, to use trusted authentication you
must supply your trusted authentication provider credentials in
the Mobile Server Authentication section above.
b In the Login field, type the MicroStrategy user name to be used by the
application to log in to the Intelligence Server.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
263
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
c
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
In the Password field, type the password for that user name.
d For standard, LDAP, and database authentication, you can override
login credentials that a user may have specified on their mobile
device. To do this, select the Overwrite user-specified credentials
when applying configuration check box.
Configure a project
13 Configure a project that contains reports and documents intended to be
viewed on the mobile device:
a Click Configure New Project.
b Select the desired project from the Project Name drop-down list.
c
The default project authentication settings specified above are used to
log in to the project. To use different login credentials, clear the Use
Default Authentication check box and specify the project
authentication settings.
d To specify a root folder, other than the project’s default, select the Use
root folder check box. Click the down arrow to select the desired root
folder.
e
To require iPhone, iPad, or BlackBerry users to provide credentials for
a project after a period of inactivity, based on the elapsed time
specified in the Require Re-authentication to Confidential Projects on
Resuming Application After field, click Treat project content as
confidential. For more information on setting the re-authorization
timeout for confidential projects, see Configure the confidential
project setting, page 234.
 Note the following:
f
•
Mobile configurations that contain multiple confidential
projects must be configured to use the same login
credentials for each of those projects. To do this, select the
Use Default Authentication check box for every
confidential project and configure the Default Project
Authentication area of the Connectivity Settings.
•
The confidential project setting can be configured only with
the standard, LDAP, and database authentication types.
Designate whether the login is case-sensitive by selecting or clearing
the User login is case-sensitive check box.
264 Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
14 To configure another project, click Configure New Project. Enter the
information for this project.
configurations that contain multiple confidential projects
 Mobile
must be configured to use the same login credentials for each of
those projects. To do this, select the Use Default Authentication
check box for every confidential project and configure the Default
Project Authentication portion of the Connectivity Settings.
15 To configure another Mobile Server, click Configure New Mobile
Server. Enter the information for this Mobile Server.
Add a trusted certificate for SSL encryption for Android devices
16 If you are using SSL encryption for communication between Android
devices and Mobile Server, you must specify the location of your trusted
certificate. A certificate is required for secure client authentication with
the Mobile Server. To add a new certificate, click Add New Certificate
and enter the URL for the certificate in the Trusted Certificates text box.
URL for the trusted certificates must be accessible from the
 The
Android devices.
Configuring the home screen for iPhone, iPad, and Android
devices
You can specify whether the user is presented with the default MicroStrategy
Mobile home screen, a folder or report that you specify, or a custom home
screen when they open the MicroStrategy Mobile application. To do this,
configure the settings in the Home Screen tab of the Mobile Configuration.
Configure the home screen
1 From the Mobile Configuration, select the Home Screen tab.
2 To display the default MicroStrategy Mobile home screen when the
application is started, select Display the default home screen. The
default home screen contains buttons for Shared Library, Reports,
Settings, and Help.
3 To display the contents of a folder when the application is started:
a Select Display the contents of a folder.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
265
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
b Click the down arrow next to the Object field. A dialog box opens.
c
From the Project drop-down list, select the project that contains the
folder you want to display. This must be a project that the
configuration has been granted access to on the Connectivity
Settings tab.
d In the User name and Password fields, type the user name and
password to log in to the project.
e
Browse to the folder and click Current folder. The dialog box closes
and the browse folder is specified in the field. This is the root folder
where the Mobile user begins browsing for reports and documents.
f
By default, Mobile Server checks for a cached subscription when a
Mobile user selects a report or document from the browse folder. To
execute the report or document without checking for a cached
subscription, clear the Check subscription check box. Disabling this
option ensures that reports and documents are updated, but this
execution requires more time than displaying cached subscriptions.
g You can configure the application to cache and preload the contents of
a folder in the background when the application reconciles. This
feature creates a faster response time for the contents of the desired
folder, and allows you to cache objects on the mobile device without
requiring users to manually execute them. To enable cache
preloading, select the Pre-cache contents at startup check box.
increase the execution performance of pre-cached objects that
 Todo not
have server side caching enabled, specify an appropriate
amount of time for local caches to remain valid. To do this, enter
the amount of time in the Cache real-time data for field in the
iPhone Settings, iPad Settings, Phone Settings, or Tablet Settings
tab. For detailed instructions on configuring this option, see
Configuring MicroStrategy Mobile for iPhone or iPad, page 226
or Configuring MicroStrategy Mobile for Android, page 237.
4 To create a customized home screen, select Display a custom home
screen. Specify the options for each button. For detailed instructions on
how to create a custom home screen, see Creating a custom home screen,
page 267.
5 Click Save. The configuration is saved.
266 Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Creating a custom home screen
When you create a configuration for MicroStrategy Mobile, you can choose to
display a report or document on the home screen, customize the
application's home screen, or use the default home screen.
•
Displaying a single report or document as the home screen, page 267
•
Configuring the home screen for iPhone and Android Phone, page 269
•
Configuring the home screen for iPad or Android Tablet, page 273
Displaying a single report or document as the home screen
You can customize the home screen to displays a single report or document
when the application is started. To improve the start up performance of this
report or document, configure it to pre-cache.
To display a single report or document when the application starts
1 Select Display a custom home screen.
2 Select Display a report or document.
3 Click the down arrow. A project login dialog box opens.
4 From the Project drop-down list, select the project that contains the
folder you want to display. This must be a project that the configuration
has been granted access to on the Connectivity Settings tab.
5 In the User name and Password fields, type the user name and
password to log in to the project.
6 Browse to the report or document and select it. The dialog box closes and
the report or document is specified in the field.
Pre-caching reports, documents, and supporting objects
7 You can configure the application to cache and preload a report or
document and its supporting objects folder in the background when the
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
267
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
application reconciles. This feature creates a faster response time for the
report or document you choose to display at startup.
increase the execution performance of pre-cached objects that
 Todo not
have server side caching enabled, specify an appropriate
amount of time for local caches to remain valid. To do this, enter
the amount of time in the Cache real-time data for field in the
iPhone, iPad, Phone, or Tablet Settings tab. For detailed
instructions on configuring this option, see Configuring
MicroStrategy Mobile for iPhone or iPad, page 226 or
Configuring MicroStrategy Mobile for Android, page 237.
8 To enable cache preloading for a report or document, click +.
9 From the Action drop-down list, select Run report or document.
10 From the Object drop-down list, select the desired report or document.
11 From the Include a folder of supporting objects drop-down list, select
a folder that includes supporting objects for your report or document.
The contents of this folder are pre-cached at startup.
Pre-caching a folder of supporting objects
12 To enable cache preloading for a folder, click +.
13 From the Action drop-down list, select Browse folder.
14 From the Root drop-down list, select the desired folder. The contents of
this folder are pre-cached at startup.
15 To execute the report or document without checking for a cached
subscription, clear the Check subscription check box.
can also pre-cache online content. For steps, see Pre-caching
 You
online content on the mobile device for offline use, page 276.
Displaying a progress bar for subscriptions and pre-caching
16 On the iPhone or iPad, if the home screen is a report or document, you
can display a progress bar along the bottom of the screen to measure the
progress for subscription synchronization and pre-caching. To do this,
select Display a progress bar for subscriptions synchronization and
pre-caching. By default, the progress bar is displayed in gray. To change
the color of the progress bar, click the Color drop-down list and select the
desired color.
268 Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
17 Click Save to save and close the configuration.
Configuring the home screen for iPhone and Android Phone
The default home screen for MicroStrategy Mobile on iPhone and Android
Phone includes the following buttons:
•
Shared Library: Opens the Projects screen, which displays a list of all
projects that the device has been configured to access.
•
Settings: Opens the Settings screen. If the Allow users to access
Settings check box (in the iPhone Settings tab) is cleared, the Settings
screen displays version information and the status of the application. If
this check box is selected, the Settings screen also displays configuration
settings such as the memory limit.
•
Help: Opens the Help for the application.
You can configure the home screen to display the contents of a folder, or a
single report or document.
You can also customize the home screen to display a set of custom buttons.
Each button can perform one of the following actions:
•
Run a report or document
•
Browse a specific folder
•
List the projects available in the application
•
List all reports or documents the user has subscribed to
•
Open the Settings screen
•
Open the Help for the application
Depending on how many buttons you define, the buttons are arranged as
follows:
•
If the home screen has one to four buttons, the buttons are arranged in
one column of four rows.
•
If the home screen has five or six buttons, the buttons are arranged in two
columns of three rows.
•
If the home screen has seven to nine buttons, the buttons are arranged in
three columns of three rows.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
269
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
•
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
If the home screen has more than nine buttons, the buttons are arranged
in multiple pages. Each page contains three columns of three rows of
buttons.
To create a custom home screen for iPhone or Android Phone
1 On the Mobile Configuration page (accessible from the Mobile
Administrator page), define a new configuration, or modify an existing
configuration. For instructions on how to define a new configuration, see
Configuring MicroStrategy Mobile for iPhone or iPad, page 226 or
Configuring MicroStrategy Mobile for Android, page 237.
2 Select the Home Screen tab.
3 Select Display a custom home screen.
4 Select Display a custom list of folders, documents, or reports. A
preview of the custom home screen is displayed on the left, and the
customization options are displayed on the right.
Define the buttons
5 Select a button in the preview.
6 From the Buttons drop-down list, select Action.
7 From the Action drop-down list, specify the action that you want the
button to take:
•
Run report or document: Executes a specific report or document. To
specify the report or document, click the arrow next to Object, select
the project containing the report or document, log in, and browse to
the report or document. To create faster response times on iPhone by
pre-caching the document or report in the background when the
application starts, select the Pre-cache contents at startup check
box. To pre-cache the supporting objects for the report or document
on iPhone or Android Phone, select the desired folder from the
Include a folder of supporting objects drop-down list.
the execution performance of pre-cached objects
 Tothatincrease
do not have server side caching enabled, specify an
appropriate amount of time for local caches to remain valid. To
do this, enter the amount of time in the Cache real-time data
for field in the iPhone Settings or Phone Settings tab. For
detailed instructions on configuring this option, see
270 Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Configuring MicroStrategy Mobile for iPhone or iPad,
page 226 or Configuring MicroStrategy Mobile for Android,
page 237.
•
Browse folder: Opens a specific folder. To specify the folder, click the
arrow next to Root, select the project containing the folder, log in and
browse to the folder.
can allow MicroStrategy Mobile for iPhone users to browse
 You
folders made available over the web through the WebDAV
protocol. To do this, you must create an External Mobile Folder
and specify it as a Browse Folder. For detailed steps to create
an External Mobile Folder, see the Advanced Reporting Guide.
By default, Mobile Server checks for a cached subscription when a
Mobile user selects a report or document from the browse folder. To
execute the report or document without checking for a cached
subscription, clear the Check subscription check box. Disabling this
option ensures that reports and documents are updated, but this
execution requires more time than displaying cached subscriptions.
To create faster response times on iPhone or Android Phone by
pre-caching the folder in the background when the application starts,
select the Pre-cache contents at startup check box.
the execution performance of pre-cached objects
 Tothatincrease
do not have server side caching enabled, specify an
appropriate amount of time for local caches to remain valid. To
do this, enter the amount of time in the Cache real-time data
for field in the iPhone Settings or Phone Settings tab. For
detailed instructions on configuring this option, see
Configuring MicroStrategy Mobile for iPhone or iPad,
page 226 or Configuring MicroStrategy Mobile for Android,
page 237.
•
Go to Reports: Opens the Reports screen on the iPhone, which
displays the reports and documents the user has subscribed to.
•
Go to Subscriptions: Opens the Subscriptions screen on Android
phones, which displays the reports and document the user has
subscribed to.
•
Go to Settings: Opens the Settings screen. If the Allow users to
access Settings check box (in the iPhone Settings or Phone
Settings tab of the Mobile Configuration page) is cleared, the
Settings screen displays version information and the status of the
application. If this check box is selected, the Settings screen also
displays configuration settings such as the memory limit.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
271
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
•
Go to Shared Library: Opens the Shared Library screen, which
displays a list of all projects that the device has been configured to
access.
•
Go to Help: Opens the Help for the application.
8 From the Buttons drop-down list, select Caption.
9 In the Caption field, type the text to be displayed on the button.
10 In the Description field, type any notes about the button. This field is
only for reference within the configuration, and is not visible to the user.
11 To change the image used for the button's icon:
a From the Buttons drop-down list, select Icon.
b Select Use my own.
c
In the Image URL field, specify the location of the image to use as the
icon for the button.
12 To add a new button, click Add a button. The button is displayed in the
preview.
13 To delete a button, select the button and click Remove a button.
Configure the button display
14 From the Format drop-down list, select Button Style.
15 From the Border Color color picker, select the color used in the outline
of the button.
16 From the Fill Color color picker, select the color used in the background
of the button.
17 From the Font Color color picker, select the color of the font used in the
button captions.
18 From the Style drop-down list, select the style to apply to the buttons:
•
Glass: Same as Flat, but with a gloss applied on top of the
background and icon.
•
Flat: The Border Color and Fill Color properties (see below) define a
background for the button. The active area of the button includes the
icon and the background.
272 Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
•
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
None: No background is used. The only active area of the button is the
icon itself. The Border Color and Fill Color properties (see below) are
ignored when this style is selected.
Specify the background
19 From the Format drop-down list, select Background.
20 To set the background to a specific color, select Fill Color and, from the
color picker, select that color.
21 To use a custom image as the background, select Image, and specify the
location of the image in the Image URL field.
image must be no larger than 320 pixels wide and 416 pixels
 The
high.
Configure the title bar
22 From the Format drop-down list, select Title Bar.
23 To specify text to be displayed in the title bar, select Caption and, in the
field, type the text to be displayed. MicroStrategy Mobile is displayed by
default.
24 To display an image as the title bar on the iPhone, select Image URL and,
in the text field, specify the location of the image.
image must be no larger than 232 pixels wide and 44 pixels
 The
high.
25 When you are ready to save the custom Home screen with the
configuration, click Save. The configuration and the custom home screen
are saved.
Configuring the home screen for iPad or Android Tablet
The default home screen for MicroStrategy Mobile on iPad and Android
Tablet displays all projects that the device has been configured to access. In
the menu bar it displays the following options:
•
Home or Shared Library: Displays the list of projects.
•
Enable Reports Tab or Enable Subscriptions Tab: Displays the reports
and documents the user has subscribed to.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
273
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
On the iPad, the application also has an
in the upper right. Tapping
on iPad or hitting the menu button on an Android tablet brings up a menu
with the following options:
•
Settings: Displays version information and the status of the application.
If the Allow users to access Settings check box (in the iPad Settings
or Tablet Settings tab of the Mobile Configuration page) is selected, the
Settings screen also displays configuration settings such as the memory
limit.
•
Help: Displays the Help for the application.
You can configure the home screen to display the contents of a folder, or a
single report or document. You can also customize the home screen to
display a set of custom buttons. These buttons are displayed in a list. Each
button can perform one of the following actions:
•
Run a report or document
•
List the reports or documents in a folder
•
List the projects available in the application
To create a custom home screen for iPad or Android Tablet
1 In the Mobile Administrator home page, in the Mobile Configuration
page, define a new configuration, or modify an existing configuration. For
instructions on how to define a new configuration, see Configuring
MicroStrategy Mobile for iPhone or iPad, page 226 or Configuring
MicroStrategy Mobile for Android, page 237.
2 Select the Home Screen tab.
3 Select Display a custom home screen.
4 Select Display a custom list of folders, documents, or reports. A
preview of the custom home screen is displayed on the left, and the
customization options are displayed on the right.
Define the buttons
5 Select a button in the preview.
274 Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
6 From the Action drop-down list, specify the action that you want the
button to take:
•
Run report or document: Execute a specific report or document. To
specify the report or document, click the arrow next to the Object
field, select the project containing the report or document, and browse
to the report or document. To create faster response times on iPad or
Android Tablet by pre-caching the document or report in the
background when the application starts, select the Pre-cache
contents at startup check box. To pre-cache the supporting objects
for the report or document, select the desired folder from the Include
a folder of supporting objects drop-down list.
that pre-cached objects are used by the application,
 Toselectensure
the Cache real-time data for check box in the iPad
Settings or Tablet Settings tab. For detailed instructions on
configuring this option, see Configuring MicroStrategy Mobile
for iPhone or iPad, page 226 or Configuring MicroStrategy
Mobile for Android, page 237.
•
Browse folder: Open a specific folder. To specify the folder, click the
arrow next to the Root field, select the project containing the folder,
and browse to the folder.
can allow MicroStrategy Mobile for iPad users to browse
 You
folders made available over the web through the WebDAV
protocol. To do this, you must create an External Mobile Folder
and specify it as a Browse Folder. For detailed steps to create
an External Mobile Folder, see the Advanced Reporting Guide.
By default, Mobile Server checks for a cached subscription when a
Mobile user selects a report or document from the browse folder. To
execute the report or document without checking for a cached
subscription, clear the Check subscription check box. Disabling this
option ensures that reports and documents are updated, but this
execution requires more time than displaying cached subscriptions.
To create faster response times by pre-caching the folder in the
background when the application starts, select the Pre-cache
contents at startup check box.
that pre-cached objects are used by the application,
 Toselectensure
the Cache real-time data for check box in the iPad or
Tablet Settings tab. For detailed instructions on configuring
this option, see Configuring MicroStrategy Mobile for iPhone
or iPad, page 226 or Configuring MicroStrategy Mobile for
Android, page 237.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
275
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
•
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Go to Shared Library: Open the Shared Library screen, which
displays a list of all projects that the device has been configured to
access.
7 To add a new button, click Add a button. The button is displayed in the
preview.
8 To delete a button, select the button and click Remove a button.
9 To move a button up or down in the display, select the button and click
Move down or Move up.
Specify the contents of the home screen selector
10 Select the check box next to each item that you want to appear in the
Home screen:
•
Enable reports tab: On the iPad, adds a Reports tab to the home
screen, which displays the reports and documents the user has
subscribed to.
•
Enable subscriptions tab: On Android tablets, adds a Subscriptions
tab to the home screen, which displays the reports and documents the
user has subscribed to.
•
Settings: Adds Settings to the
menu on the iPad or the menu
button on an Android tablet. Tapping Settings displays version
information and the status of the application. If the Allow users to
access Settings check box (in the iPad Settings or Tablet Settings
tab of the Mobile Configuration page) is selected, the Settings screen
also displays configuration settings such as the memory limit.
•
Help: Adds Help to the
menu on the iPad or the menu button on
an Android tablet. Tapping Help displays the Help for the application.
11 When you are ready to save the custom home screen with the
configuration, click Save. The configuration and the custom home screen
are saved.
Pre-caching online content on the mobile device for offline use
You can pre-cache online content, such as videos or files, on a mobile device,
which allows a user to view the content when the device is offline.
276 Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
For example, when a user views a streaming video on a mobile device using
the Video Player widget, the streaming video is buffered and played as it
downloads. By default, the downloaded video file is discarded when the
MicroStrategy Mobile application is closed.
You can ensure that the video is downloaded and stored on the mobile device
for offline use. To do so, you must provide a WebDAV folder that contains
the video, and define the appropriate settings to have the contents of the
folder pre-cached, as described in the steps below.
If the video is downloaded instead of streamed, pre-caching downloads the
video before the user requests it. This allows a faster response time.
Prerequisites
•
Create an External Mobile Folder to browse the contents of the WebDAV
folder that contains your video or other content. For detailed steps, see
the Advanced Reporting Guide.
•
Create the document that contains the content to be pre-cached. For
example, if you are pre-caching a video, you can create a document with a
Video Player widget that displays either of the following on an iPhone or
iPad:


A streaming video which provides the location of the video file using
the Alternate Download URL setting.
A downloaded video which provides the location of the video file using
the Video URL setting.
For detailed information and steps to create a Video Player widget, see
Downloading and playing videos: Video Player widget, page 152.
To store content on the mobile device for offline use
1 In Mobile Administrator, click Mobile Configuration from the left.
Define a new configuration, or select the existing configuration that you
want to modify. For steps to define a new configuration, see Configuring
MicroStrategy Mobile for iPhone or iPad, page 226 or Configuring
MicroStrategy Mobile for Android, page 237.
2 On the Home Screen tab, select Display a custom home screen.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
277
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
3 Select the appropriate settings to define the External Mobile Folder as a
folder of supporting objects for the document and pre-cache its contents.
For detailed steps, see the appropriate link below:
•
If you have defined the mobile configuration to display a single report
or document when the application starts, see To display a single
report or document when the application starts, page 267.
•
If you have defined the mobile configuration to display a custom list of
folders, documents, or reports when the application starts on the
iPhone, see To create a custom home screen for iPhone or Android
Phone, page 270.
•
If you have defined the mobile configuration to display a custom list of
folders, documents, or reports when the application starts on the
iPad, see To create a custom home screen for iPad or Android Tablet,
page 274.
Configuring MicroStrategy Mobile for iPhone or iPad to receive
push notifications
You can use alert-based subscriptions to ensure that users automatically
receive notifications on an iPhone or iPad with MicroStrategy Mobile when a
metric on a report meets specific threshold conditions. You can create an
alert-based subscription using the Alerts Editor in Web. For information on
creating alert-based subscriptions, see the MicroStrategy Web Help.
These alerts are “pushed” to MicroStrategy Mobile for iPhone or iPad by
Intelligence Server. For information on how these push notifications are
displayed on the device, see the MicroStrategy Mobile Analysis Guide.
The following high-level procedure provides steps to enable push
notifications for MicroStrategy Mobile on an iPhone or iPad.
Prerequisites
•
MicroStrategy delivers alert notifications through the Apple Push
Notification Service (APNS). Therefore, you must have an Apple iOS
developer license to send mobile push notifications. For information
about the various iOS developer licenses available, see http://
developer.apple.com/programs/.
•
Your Intelligence Server machine must have a direct internet connection
to the Apple Push Notification Service (APNS).
278 Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
•
You must have MicroStrategy Distribution Services to use push
notifications with MicroStrategy. For information about purchasing a
Distribution Services license, contact your MicroStrategy account
executive.
•
Push notifications must be enabled on an iPhone or iPad for the device to
receive MicroStrategy push notifications. In addition, the first time
MicroStrategy Mobile for iPhone or iPad is opened on a device, the user is
prompted to allow the application to receive push notifications.
•
To enable push notifications, Mobile Server must be configured to use
Secure Socket Layer (SSL) encryption. For detailed instructions on
configuring Mobile Server to use SSL, see the Enabling Secure
Communication chapter in the System Administration Guide.
High-level steps to enable MicroStrategy push notifications for iPhone or iPad
1 Install the APNS certificate on the Intelligence Server machine that
provides the push notifications. For instructions, see the documentation
provided with your iOS developer license.
2 In Developer, create a Distribution Services device for iPhone or iPad. For
detailed instructions, see the Scheduling Jobs and Administrative Tasks
chapter in the System Administration Guide, or see the Developer Help
(formerly the MicroStrategy Desktop Help).
3 Create a configuration for the application (see Configuring
MicroStrategy Mobile for iPhone or iPad, page 226). In the iPhone
Settings or iPad Settings tab of the configuration, make sure that you
select the Enable Push Notification check box.
4 The first time the user opens MicroStrategy Mobile for iPhone or iPad on
a device, the user is prompted to allow push notifications for
MicroStrategy Mobile. The user must select Allow push notifications.
Applying configurations to mobile devices
Once you have created a configuration for a mobile device, you need to apply
that configuration to the device. You can:
•
Generate a URL for the configuration, then email the link to users or
create an HTML page containing the link. When users tap the URL on
their mobile device, the configuration is automatically applied to the
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
279
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
device. For steps, see Configuring mobile devices using a generated
URL, page 280.
•
Configure MicroStrategy Mobile for iPhone, iPad, and Android through
the Settings screen in the application. For steps, see Configuring the
application from the device, page 281.
Configuring mobile devices using a generated URL
You can quickly and easily apply a configuration to a mobile device using a
URL, as follows:
•
Email the URL to your mobile device users. When these users tap the
URL in the email client on their mobile device, the configuration is
automatically applied to the device. This option is available for iPhone,
iPad, and BlackBerry users.
•
Create an HTML page that includes the URLs as links. When users tap
the URL in the HTML page using the browser on their mobile device, the
configuration is automatically applied to the device. To email the link to
Android users, you must create a short link. This option is available for
Android and Blackberry users.
Steps to generate a mobile configuration URL are provided below.
logins and passwords included with a configuration should be
 User
used only for demonstration purposes, as the configuration is not
transmitted or stored securely.
To generate a URL for a configuration
1 In the MicroStrategy Mobile Server page, from the pane on the left, select
Mobile Configuration.
2 For the configuration you want to generate a link for, click Generate
URL. A Generate Configuration URL dialog box opens.
3 In the Server Name field, type the fully qualified host name of the
machine hosting the Mobile Server that the configuration is stored on.
are using trusted authentication, in this field, type the name
 Ifof you
the trusted authentication provider machine.
280 Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
5
4 By default, the port number used by Mobile Server is included in the
URL. If you do not want to include the port number in the URL, clear the
Include port check box.
5 If you are including the port number in the URL, select the Include port
check box, and in the text box next to it, type the port number used by
Mobile Server. The default is 80.
6 By default, the request type is set to HTTP. If you are using a secure
connection, select HTTPS from the Request Type drop-down list.
7 From the Authentication Mode drop-down list, select an authentication
mode. When the user taps the URL, she will have to provide a username
and password to log in to Mobile Server using this authentication mode.
8 For Android devices, you must shorten the configuration URL before you
insert it as a clickable link in an email. To do this, click Use Short URL.
9 To generate the URL, click Generate URL. The URL is generated and
displayed in the dialog box. You can then copy and paste the URL into an
email for iPhone and iPad users. For Android users, you can insert the
link into an HTML page and instruct users to click on the appropriate link
using the browser on their Android devices, or you can email a short
URL.
10 To save the URL settings, click Save. The Generate Configuration URL
dialog box closes, and the authentication mode and host are saved for the
next time you generate a URL for this configuration.
Configuring the application from the device
You can also configure MicroStrategy Mobile for iPhone, iPad, and Android
through the Settings screen in the application. You need to add the
connection information for the MicroStrategy Mobile server, and then
configure the projects that you want to receive reports from, as described in
the procedures below.
If you have applied a configuration to the device and that
 configuration
does not allow users to view or change the device
settings, you will not be able to configure the application from your
device. Contact your system administrator if you need to change your
configuration settings.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
281
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
To configure MicroStrategy Mobile on an iPhone, iPad, or Android device
1 Open the Settings screen:
•
On an iPhone, tap the Settings button.
•
On an iPad, tap
•
On Android, tap your device’s menu button.
and then tap Settings.
on your configuration, you may not be able to access
 Depending
the Settings screen, or you may only be able to view the About
MicroStrategy Mobile information.
2 To configure an existing server, tap the server name or IP address. To add
a new server, tap Add Mobile Server. Specify the settings for the server
as described in Configure the connectivity settings, page 261.
3 To configure the application settings, tap Advanced Settings. Specify
the settings for the application as described in Configure the iPhone or
iPad settings, page 228 or Configuring MicroStrategy Mobile for
Android, page 237.
Downloading a client certificate from the certificate server
4 Click Get Certificate.
5 In the Authentication screen, log in using your MicroStrategy login and
password. The certificate will download and display in the Advanced
Settings screen.
6 To exit the settings screen and return to the Home screen, tap Home.
Managing multiple configurations for MicroStrategy Mobile
To see all configurations that have been saved on this Mobile Server, select
the Mobile Configuration category in the Mobile Server Administrator page.
To rename a configuration, click the name of the configuration. Type the new
name for the configuration and press ENTER.
282 Deploying and configuring the MicroStrategy Mobile application
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
From the Actions column, you can manage your configurations:
•
To modify an existing configuration, click Modify. The configuration
opens, and you can make any changes. For instructions, see the
appropriate link below:

Configuring MicroStrategy Mobile for iPhone or iPad, page 226

Configuring MicroStrategy Mobile for Android, page 237

Configuring MicroStrategy Mobile for BlackBerry, page 246
•
To copy a configuration, click Duplicate. A copy of that configuration is
created with the name "Copy of <configuration>" and added to the end of
the list. You can then modify this copy by clicking Modify.
•
To generate a URL for a configuration, click Generate URL. A Generate
URL dialog box opens.
•
To delete a configuration, click Delete.
•
To create a new configuration, click Define New Configuration.
The Mobile subscription workflow
There are three steps in the MicroStrategy Mobile subscription workflow.
These steps, detailed below, explain how Mobile retrieves a report from
Intelligence Server:
•
First, a subscription to the report is created. Any prompts are answered,
and the scheduled event or time is set. Subscriptions can be created by an
administrator or Mobile user in MicroStrategy Developer or Command
Manager, or, in MicroStrategy Mobile for BlackBerry, by the user on their
mobile device.
For more information about how an administrator schedules a report to
be delivered, see Scheduling the report or document, page 284.
For more information about how a user subscribes to a report or
document from their device, see the MicroStrategy Mobile Analysis
Guide.
•
Second, the report is executed when the scheduled event or time is
triggered. Upon execution of the report, the new report cache is sent to
the MicroStrategy history list. For more information, see Executing the
report on Intelligence Server, page 284.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
The Mobile subscription workflow
283
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
•
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Finally, the user retrieves the report from Mobile Server, and it is
available on the user’s mobile device. For more information, see
Retrieving the report in MicroStrategy Mobile, page 285.
For background information on data security in MicroStrategy Mobile, see
Data security in Mobile, page 285.
Scheduling the report or document
The Mobile user or an administrator selects the reports or dashboard-style
documents to be viewed in MicroStrategy Mobile. They then schedule these
reports for delivery to Mobile, and answers any prompts in the reports. For
instructions on scheduling report subscriptions for Mobile, see Managing
Mobile report subscriptions, page 286.
In addition, the Mobile user schedules an update time window for the mobile
device to automatically retrieve the reports. For instructions, see the section
on choosing when to update the Report List in the MicroStrategy Mobile
Analysis Guide.
Executing the report on Intelligence Server
When the schedule associated with a report is triggered, that report is
executed by Intelligence Server. The report is then sent to the History List, to
reduce the load on Intelligence Server. For a detailed explanation of the
History List, see the Caching chapter in the System Administration Guide.
Reports available in Mobile are only updated when the associated schedule is
triggered, or (in MicroStrategy Mobile for BlackBerry) when the Reset
option is selected in the Mobile application. (For instructions on how to reset
a report, see the MicroStrategy Mobile Analysis Guide.) In particular,
editing the report through MicroStrategy Web or Developer does not update
the report’s History List message. If you are concerned that Mobile users
may not have the most recent version of a report, you should either update
the History List message, or inform the users that they need to reset that
report.
If the user has made changes to the report on the Mobile device and
 saved
those changes, any changes made to the report in MicroStrategy
Web or Developer are not applied to the report on the Mobile device
until the user resets the report.
284 The Mobile subscription workflow
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
5
Retrieving the report in MicroStrategy Mobile
Once a report has been sent to the History List, it is available on Mobile
Server. Mobile then retrieves the report from the server, either during its
scheduled update time or during a manual update. To schedule when reports
are retrieved from Mobile Server, and to retrieve reports immediately, see
the MicroStrategy Mobile Analysis Guide.
Mobile retrieves reports from Mobile Server by report ID (a unique
32-character identifier) and report type. Graph reports are stored on the
mobile device as JPG image files. Other types of reports are compressed to
roughly one-tenth their original size, using LZW compression. This keeps the
memory footprint of each individual report as small as possible, and also
reduces the amount of bandwidth that the reports use during reconciliation.
In MicroStrategy Mobile for iPhone, iPad, or Android, the administrator can
control how much memory is available for use by reports in the Memory
Limit setting in the device configuration. For instructions on changing this
setting, see Configuring MicroStrategy Mobile for iPhone or iPad, page 226
or Configuring MicroStrategy Mobile for Android, page 237.
In MicroStrategy Mobile for BlackBerry, if the available memory on the
device begins to run low, Mobile can store reports in extended device
memory, such as on SD memory cards. For instructions on how to enable
extended device memory, see the MicroStrategy Mobile Analysis Guide.
Data security in Mobile
The data in the reports and documents that you view on your mobile device is
secured by MicroStrategy. This means that the data you can view and work
with is controlled by the same security mechanisms that control access to the
data in other MicroStrategy products. Security settings can limit your data
access to specific projects, certain reports within a project, the ability to use
specific objects on reports, and how you can explore some data. If you have
any questions about any data you expect to be able to access but cannot, see
your MicroStrategy administrator.
MicroStrategy also secures the data in your reports and documents by
ensuring that other applications on your mobile device cannot access it.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
The Mobile subscription workflow
285
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Managing Mobile report subscriptions
To receive reports and dashboard-style documents on a mobile device, the
device’s user must be subscribed to those reports. Each Mobile subscription
is associated with a MicroStrategy schedule that controls how often the
report or document is updated. For detailed information about schedules
and subscriptions, including instructions on how to create schedules, see the
Scheduling Jobs and Administrative Tasks chapter in the System
Administration Guide.
Before you subscribe
Keep the following items in mind when you configure MicroStrategy Mobile
subscriptions, either for yourself or for other users:
•
To view reports in the MicroStrategy Mobile application, users must have
the Use MicroStrategy Mobile privilege for all projects containing reports
they want to view.
•
To view dashboard-style documents in MicroStrategy Mobile, users must
have the Mobile View Documents privilege for all projects containing
documents they want to view.
•
When subscribing a user to a report, be certain that the user has the
proper permissions to view the report and the objects it contains.
additional information about report and report object
 For
permissions in the MicroStrategy security model, see the Setting
Up User Security chapter in the System Administration Guide.
•
MicroStrategy has a number of recommended best practices for
designing reports to be viewed in MicroStrategy Mobile. Reports
designed according to these best practices load quickly and are easy to
read on mobile devices. For a list of these best practices, see Chapter 2,
Designing Reports and Documents for Mobile Devices.
See the appropriate link below:
•
Managing subscriptions, page 287
•
Managing multiple subscriptions at once with Developer, page 288
•
Managing subscriptions using Command Manager, page 293
•
Managing your subscriptions through MicroStrategy Web, page 294
•
Managing subscriptions in MicroStrategy Developer, page 296
286 Managing Mobile report subscriptions
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
•
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
5
Managing subscriptions with Newsstand for the iPhone and iPad,
page 298
Managing subscriptions
Both administrators and MicroStrategy Mobile users can manage
subscriptions in Mobile. There are several different ways to manage
MicroStrategy Mobile report and document subscriptions:
•
Subscribing multiple users
You can subscribe multiple users to reports or documents in
MicroStrategy Developer. The Subscription Manager allows you to
manage all the subscriptions for a project from one interface. For specific
information about how to manage Mobile subscriptions using Developer,
see Managing multiple subscriptions at once with Developer, page 288.
•
Using MicroStrategy Command Manager
You can use MicroStrategy Command Manager to manage any number of
subscriptions. Command Manager is a script-based tool for
administering MicroStrategy systems. For specific information about
how to manage Mobile subscriptions using Command Manager, see
Managing subscriptions using Command Manager, page 293. For
general information about Command Manager, including detailed
instructions, see the Automating Administrative Tasks with Command
Manager chapter in the System Administration Guide, or see the Help
for Command Manager.
•
Individual users managing personal subscriptions

In MicroStrategy Web
Individual users can manage their subscriptions in MicroStrategy
Web. For specific information about managing individual
MicroStrategy Mobile subscriptions, including how to subscribe to
reports, see Managing your subscriptions through MicroStrategy
Web, page 294. For general information about managing
subscriptions using MicroStrategy Web, see the MicroStrategy Web
Help.

In Developer
Individual users can also manage their subscriptions through
MicroStrategy Developer. Specifically, the Subscription Wizard in
Developer offers users a way to subscribe to multiple reports
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Managing Mobile report subscriptions
287
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
simultaneously, without having to open each individual report. Users
can also subscribe to individual reports by using the report’s
Properties page. For specific information about managing individual
MicroStrategy Mobile subscriptions in Developer, including how to
subscribe to reports, see Managing subscriptions in MicroStrategy
Developer, page 296. For general information about managing
subscriptions using MicroStrategy Developer, see the MicroStrategy
Developer Help (formerly the MicroStrategy Desktop Help). To do
this, press F1 from within Developer.

In MicroStrategy Mobile
Individual users can manage their subscriptions on their mobile
devices. They can subscribe to any report or document that they have
access to, answer prompts, and define the schedule or event that will
determine when the report or document is sent to the device. Users
can also edit their existing subscriptions on their device. For specific
information about editing and subscribing to reports and documents
on a mobile device, see the MicroStrategy Mobile Analysis Guide.
Managing multiple subscriptions at once with Developer
The Subscription Manager allows you to manage all the subscriptions for a
project from one interface. It is a convenient, central location that displays
every subscription, and allows you to filter on various criteria.
To access the Subscription Manager, log in to Developer and expand
Administration, then Configuration Managers, and then select
Subscriptions. For detailed information about the Subscription Manager,
see the MicroStrategy Developer online help.
In Developer, the administrator can subscribe multiple MicroStrategy
Mobile users to a single report at once, or subscribe a single user to multiple
reports by using the Subscription Creation Wizard.
For more information about using the Subscription Creation Wizard, refer to
the MicroStrategy Developer Help (formerly the MicroStrategy Desktop
Help).
To subscribe one or more users to one or more reports
1 From the Administration menu, point to Scheduling and then select
Subscription Creation Wizard. The Subscription Wizard opens.
288 Managing Mobile report subscriptions
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
2 Review the information on the Introduction dialog box and click Next.
The Specify Characteristics dialog box opens, as shown below:
3 From the Choose a project from which reports/documents will be
delivered to the recipients drop-down list, select the project that
contains the reports that you want to create a subscription to.
4 From the Choose a delivery type drop-down list, select Mobile to send
the report directly to the Mobile device, select Cache Update to update
server side caches for reports and documents that use the pre-caching
feature, or select History List to deliver the report to a Mobile device
using the History List.
cache update subscriptions to update server side caches for
 Use
your pre-cached reports and documents. For instructions on
configuring the pre-cache option for reports and documents, see
Configuring the home screen for iPhone and Android Phone,
page 269 or Configuring the home screen for iPad or Android
Tablet, page 273.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Managing Mobile report subscriptions
289
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
5 Click Next. The Choose Reports/Documents dialog box opens, as shown
below:
6 Browse to the reports/documents to be delivered and click the right
arrow to add them to the Selected objects. Click Next.
7 Answer any prompts for the selected reports/documents.
cannot schedule reports with prompts unless the report has
 You
default answers.
290 Managing Mobile report subscriptions
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
5
8 Click Next. The Choose Recipients dialog box opens, as shown below:
9 From the Schedule drop-down list, select the schedule to execute the
reports/documents.
10 Click To... to open the Select Recipients dialog box, as shown below:
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Managing Mobile report subscriptions
291
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
11 Browse to the recipients of the subscription and click the right arrow > to
add them to the Selected recipients. Click OK to return to the
Subscription Wizard - Choose Recipients dialog box.
12 If you are creating a history list subscription for a document, choose the
form of export to generate from the Pre-generate export drop-down list.
The options for this setting are an HTML page, a PDF document, or an
Excel spreadsheet.
13 If you are creating a Mobile delivery, choose BlackBerry, Phone, or Tablet
from the Mobile device type drop-down list.
14 If you are creating a cache update subscription for pre-cached reports and
documents, select either Phone or Tablet from the Delivery Format
drop-down list.
15 To send the report to the selected recipients immediately after creating
the subscription, select the Run subscription immediately check box.
16 Click Next. The Specify Subscription Properties dialog box opens, as
shown below:
17 Specify your subscription properties as follows:
on the reports or documents selected, one or more
 Depending
options may be grayed out and unavailable. For details on these
options and when they are available, see the System
Administration Guide.
292 Managing Mobile report subscriptions
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
•
To configure a date when the subscription will stop sending reports,
select the Expire subscription on check box and select a date.
•
If you are creating a History List delivery, you can have an automated
delivery notification email sent when the report is delivered. To do
this, select the Send notification to default email address of each
recipient check box.
•
If you are creating a History List delivery, to ensure that previous
versions of the report in the recipients’ delivery location are replaced
with the most recent version, select the The new scheduled report
will overwrite older versions of itself check box. If this check box is
not selected, the older versions remain.
•
To ignore any existing report or document caches and ensure that the
report or document always has the latest data, select the Re-run
against the warehouse check box.
•
To update History List caches and not Matching caches, select the Do
not create or update matching caches check box. For an
explanation of Matching and History caches, see the Caching chapter
of the System Administration Guide.
18 Click Next. The Summary dialog box opens.
19 Review the settings and click Finish. The subscription is created and
available for viewing in the Subscription Manager.
Managing subscriptions using Command Manager
MicroStrategy Command Manager is a script-based tool for automating
Intelligence Server administration. You can compose Command Manager
scripts to manage user subscriptions. In some situations this may be more
efficient than navigating the Developer GUI, since you can quickly change
the names of reports, users, or projects with Command Manager scripts.
To configure subscriptions with Command Manager, you must have the Use
Command Manager privilege.
To start Command Manager, from the Start menu point to Programs, then
MicroStrategy Products, and select Command Manager.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Managing Mobile report subscriptions
293
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
The Command Manager statement syntax for creating a mobile subscription
is:
CREATE MOBILESUBSCRIPTION subscription_name [FOR OWNER
login_name] SCHEDULE schedule_name USER user_name
CONTENT report_or_document_name IN FOLDER
location_name IN PROJECT project_name
[OVERWRITEOLDERVERSION (TRUE|FALSE)] [EXPIRATIONDATE
mm/dd/yyyy] [RUNFRESH (TRUE|FALSE)] [CREATEUPDATECACHE
(TRUE|FALSE)] [MODIFICATIONBYRECIPIENTS
(TRUE|FALSE)];
For more information about Command Manager, including detailed
instructions, see the Automating Administrative Tasks with Command
Manager chapter in the System Administration Guide, or see the Help for
Command Manager.
Managing your subscriptions through MicroStrategy Web
There are a variety of ways to manage your MicroStrategy Mobile
subscriptions using MicroStrategy Web.
MicroStrategy Web’s subscription interface enables you to subscribe to a new
report or document, or to unsubscribe from a report or document that you no
longer need to view. You can also change the update schedule for a
subscription. Finally, you can change the prompt answers for a report or
document that is delivered to your mobile device. See the following sections
for procedures:
•
To subscribe to a report or document in MicroStrategy Web, page 295
•
To unsubscribe from a report, page 295
•
To change the update schedule for a subscription in MicroStrategy Web,
page 296
•
To change the personalized prompt answers for a report or document,
page 296
To manage your Mobile subscriptions through MicroStrategy Web, you must
have the Web Scheduled Reports privilege as well as the Use MicroStrategy
Mobile privilege. In addition, to subscribe to a document you must have the
Mobile View Document privilege.
294 Managing Mobile report subscriptions
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
To subscribe to a report or document in MicroStrategy Web
1 Open the report or document in MicroStrategy Web.
2 Answer any prompts that the report or document contains and click Run
Report.
Your answers to the prompts are saved and used to personalize your
subscription to that report or document. To change these answers later,
open the report or document again and, from the Data menu, select
Re-prompt.
3 From the Home menu, point to Subscribe to, and then select Mobile.
The Subscribe to Mobile dialog box opens.
4 Type a name for the subscription in the Name text field.
5 Select a schedule or event from the Schedule drop-down list.
6 Click To to choose the subscription recipients.
7 Choose the subscription device from the Device type drop-down list.
8 To run the subscription immediately following its creation, select the Run
subscription immediately check box.
9 To choose an end date for the subscription, expand Advanced Options,
select the Do not deliver after check box, and click the Calendar
drop-down menu to choose a date.
10 Click OK. The Subscribe to Mobile dialog box closes.
11 To verify that you are subscribed to the report or document, at the top of
the page, click My Subscriptions. Note that the report appears in your
list of subscriptions, in the Mobile Subscriptions section.
To unsubscribe from a report
1 Open MicroStrategy Web and log into a project.
2 At the top of the page, click My Subscriptions. The Subscriptions screen
opens, with a list of all your subscriptions for that project.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Managing Mobile report subscriptions
295
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
3 In the Unsubscribe column, select the check box for any reports that you
no longer want to receive on your mobile device.
4 Click Unsubscribe. Any selected reports are removed from your
subscription list.
To change the update schedule for a subscription in MicroStrategy Web
1 Open MicroStrategy Web and log into a project.
2 At the top of the page, click My Subscriptions. The Subscriptions page
opens, with a list of all your subscriptions for that project.
3 In the Action column, click Edit for the subscription you want to edit. The
Edit Subscription page for that subscription opens.
4 From the drop-down list, select the new schedule.
5 Click OK. The Edit Subscription dialog box closes.
To change the personalized prompt answers for a report or document
1 Open the report or document in MicroStrategy Web.
2 From the Data menu, select Re-prompt.
3 Answer the prompts in the report or document.
4 When you are satisfied with your prompt answers, click Run Report. The
report executes with your prompt answers, and your answers are saved
and used to personalize your subscription to the report.
Managing subscriptions in MicroStrategy Developer
You can manage your subscriptions to individual reports. Steps for these
procedures are below.
To manage subscriptions in bulk, and for steps to use the command line tool
Command Manager, see the System Administration Guide.
296 Managing Mobile report subscriptions
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
To manage your Mobile subscriptions through MicroStrategy Developer, you
must have the Use Developer privilege as well as the Use MicroStrategy
Mobile privilege. In addition, to subscribe to a document you must have the
Mobile View Document privilege.
To unsubscribe from a report or document delivery, you must either have
created the subscription originally (you are the owner of the subscription), or
else the creator must have selected Allow Unsubscribe when she created
the subscription. If neither of these is true, then only an administrator or the
subscription’s owner can unsubscribe users from the report/document
delivery.
To subscribe to a single report or document
1 In Developer, right-click the report/document, select Schedule delivery
to, and select Mobile.
2 Type the name of the subscription in the Name text field.
3 Select the schedule that you want the report/document to be delivered
based on, by selecting it from the drop-down list.
4 Click To to choose the subscription recipients.
5 Select the desired mobile device from the Mobile device type drop-down
list.
6 To run the subscription immediately following its creation, select the Run
subscription immediately check box.
7 Click OK. The dialog box closes.
To unsubscribe from a single report or document
1 In Developer, from the Tools menu, select My Subscriptions.
2 Right-click the subscription and select Unsubscribe.
option is not available, the subscription can
 IfonlythebeUnsubscribe
deleted by the subscription’s owner or by an administrator.
3 Confirm that you want to delete the subscription by clicking Yes. The
subscription is deleted.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Managing Mobile report subscriptions
297
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Managing subscriptions with Newsstand for the iPhone and
iPad
For iPhone and iPad, using the MicroStrategy SDK, you can configure your
MicroStrategy Mobile application to use the Newsstand feature in iOS. By
delivering subscriptions through Newsstand, you can schedule deliveries at
off-peak hours. These subscriptions are downloaded to iPhones and iPads
even if the MicroStrategy Mobile application is not running on the mobile
device.
To use the Newsstand feature in iOS, you must configure MicroStrategy
Mobile to receive push notifications, as described in Configuring
MicroStrategy Mobile for iPhone or iPad to receive push notifications,
page 278.
For procedures on compiling the MicroStrategy Mobile application as a
Newsstand application, see the MicroStrategy Developer Library.
You can perform the following administrative tasks to manage Newsstand
subscriptions:
•
Mobile clients create connections with Intelligence Server to download
Newsstand subscriptions. To allow these connections to stay open during
downloads, Intelligence Server allows a specific amount of idle time
during the connections. To modify the idle time limit, adjust the Mobile
Newsstand session idle time setting in the Governing Rules dialog box
(in the Intelligence Server Configuration Editor). For detailed
instructions on modifying Intelligence Server governing rules, see the
System Administration Guide.
•
When a Newsstand subscription is ready to be downloaded, a push
notification is sent to the Newsstand application on the recipient’s mobile
device. You can schedule an administration task to send Newsstand push
notifications at a specific time of day. For detailed procedures on
scheduling administration tasks, see the System Administration Guide.
Enabling real time updates for BlackBerry
In MicroStrategy Mobile for BlackBerry, it is possible to allow the device to
automatically update reports and documents when they change on the
server. This ensures that users always have the most current data. To enable
298 Enabling real time updates for BlackBerry
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
this option, certain configurations must be made in the project, to the user’s
delivery settings, and by the user on their device.
To enable real time updates in MicroStrategy Mobile for BlackBerry, follow
these high-level steps.
High-level steps to enable automatic updates in MicroStrategy Mobile
1 Enable project-level settings in MicroStrategy Developer. For details, see
Enabling real time updates in the project, page 299.
2 In the User Manager, create a Mobile BES device address. For details, see
Enabling real time updates for the user, page 300.
Enabling real time updates in the project
To enable real time updates in MicroStrategy Mobile, the project that
MicroStrategy Mobile connects to must have real-time updates enabled. To
enable real time updates in the project, you must do the following:
•
Enable real time updates in the Project Configuration Editor. For steps,
see To enable real time updates using the Project Configuration Editor,
page 299.
•
Configure the Mobile BES device using the Delivery Manager. For steps,
see To configure the Mobile BES device using the Delivery Manager,
page 300.
To enable real time updates using the Project Configuration Editor
1 Log in to MicroStrategy Developer as a user with administrative
privileges.
2 Right-click the project that you want to enable real-time updates for, and
select Project Configuration. The Project Configuration Editor opens.
3 On the left, expand Deliveries, then Mobile Delivery, and select Real
time updates.
4 On the right, select the Enable real time updates for mobile delivery
check box.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Enabling real time updates for BlackBerry
299
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
5 Click OK. The Project Configuration Editor closes.
To configure the Mobile BES device using the Delivery Manager
1 Log in to MicroStrategy Developer as a user with administrative
privileges.
2 Under the project source, expand Administration, then Delivery
Managers, and select Device.
3 Right-click the Mobile BES device and select Edit. The Device Editor
opens.
4 To rename the device, type a name in the Name field.
5 To change the description of the device, type text in the Description field.
6 In the BlackBerry Enterprise Server section, in the IP Address area,
enter the IP address for the machine hosting the BlackBerry Enterprise
Server.
7 In the Port Number area, enter the port number to use to access the
BlackBerry Enterprise Server.
8 In the Client Port area, enter the port number of the client machine.
9 Click OK. The Device Editor closes.
Enabling real time updates for the user
After real time updates have been enabled in the project, a Mobile Client
Address must be registered for the user to receive real time updates. There
are two ways that this can be done:
•
The user registers a Mobile Client Address from their Mobile device. For
details, see the MicroStrategy Mobile Analysis Guide.
•
The administrator registers a Mobile Client Address using the User
Manager. For steps, see To enable real time updates for a user, page 301.
If you delete this address, a warning message is displayed, stating that if you
delete the address, real time updates for the user will be disabled. To restart
300 Enabling real time updates for BlackBerry
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
5
real time updates for the user, the address can be registered for the user
again.
To enable real time updates for a user
1 Log in to MicroStrategy Developer as a user with administrative
privileges.
2 Under the project source, expand Administration, then User Manager.
3 Browse to the user that you want to enable real time updates for,
right-click the user and select Edit. The User Editor opens.
4 On the left, expand Deliveries, then select Addresses.
5 On the right side of the User Editor, click New. A new address is created.
6 To rename the address, type a name in the Name field.
7 In the Physical Address field, enter the unique PIN for the user’s mobile
device. For steps to determine this number, see To determine a device’s
PIN, page 301.
8 From the Delivery Type drop-down list, select MobileClient.
9 From the Device drop-down list, select MobileBES.
10 To set this address as the user’s default address, select the Set as default
check box.
11 Click Save. The address is saved.
12 Click OK. The User Editor closes.
To determine a device’s PIN
third-party products discussed below are manufactured by
 The
vendors independent of MicroStrategy, and the information provided
is subject to change. Refer to the appropriate third-party vendor
documentation for updated BlackBerry device information.
1 On the BlackBerry Device, select Options. The Options screen is
displayed.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Enabling real time updates for BlackBerry
301
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
2 Select Status. The Status screen is displayed.
3 Scroll to PIN. The device’s unique PIN is displayed.
Troubleshooting MicroStrategy Mobile
This section provides guidance for finding and fixing trouble spots in the
system. While the material in this section does not go into great detail, it
does provide references to the relevant portions of the documentation where
the topic or remedy is discussed in more detail.
•
Troubleshooting connection issues, page 302
•
Troubleshooting reports and documents, page 302
•
Troubleshooting prompt answers, page 303
Troubleshooting connection issues
When you create a configuration for a mobile device (see Configuring
MicroStrategy Mobile for iPhone or iPad, page 226), you must specify the
Mobile Server machine by its fully qualified name so that the Mobile device
can locate the machine on the network.
Troubleshooting reports and documents
•
MicroStrategy recommends that caching be enabled for all reports and
documents intended to be viewed on a mobile device. For information on
report and document caching, including instructions on how to enable
caching for specific reports and documents, see the Caching chapter of
the System Administration Guide.
•
If subscribed reports and documents are loading slowly on an iPhone or
iPad, enable the Automatically Pre-Load Caches setting. This setting
causes cached reports/documents to be loaded onto the device when the
application is launched. This setting is found in the iPhone Settings or
iPad Settings tab of the Mobile Configuration Editor, or in the device’s
Settings screen if the device is configured for users to have access to the
settings. For information about configuring your device, see Configuring
MicroStrategy Mobile for iPhone or iPad, page 226.
302 Troubleshooting MicroStrategy Mobile
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
•
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
5
If a Video Player widget stops in the middle of streaming video playback:
When a mobile device is offline, the user can play the portion of the
streaming video that was downloaded while the mobile device was online.
By default, the downloaded video file is discarded when the
MicroStrategy Mobile application is closed. You can ensure that the video
is downloaded and stored on the mobile device for offline use. For steps,
see Pre-caching online content on the mobile device for offline use,
page 276.
Troubleshooting prompt answers
To support the scanning of barcodes using MicroStrategy Mobile for iPhone,
you must store the barcode data used in the associated prompt with a
database data type that supports text data. MicroStrategy recommends using
the VarChar data type for your database to store the barcode data. For
information about setting up your database, see the Project Design Guide
and the Installation and Configuration Guide.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Troubleshooting MicroStrategy Mobile
303
5
Administering MicroStrategy Mobile
304 Troubleshooting MicroStrategy Mobile
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
GLOSSARY
access control list A list of users, groups and the access permissions that each
has for an object.
attribute A data level defined by the system architect and associated
with one or more columns in a data warehouse lookup table.
Attributes include data classifications like Region, Order,
Customer, Age, Item, City, and Year. They provide a means
for aggregating and filtering at a given level.
See also:
•
attribute element
•
attribute form
attribute element A value of any of the attribute forms of an attribute. For
example, New York and Dallas are elements of the attribute
City; January, February, and March are elements of the
attribute Month.
attribute form One of several columns associated with an attribute that are
different aspects of the same thing. ID, Name, Last Name,
Long Description, and Abbreviation could be forms of the
attribute Customer. Every attribute supports its own
collection of forms.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Glossary: access control list
305
Glossary
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
cache A special data store holding recently accessed information for
quick future access. This is normally done for frequently
requested reports, whose execution is faster because they
need not run against the database. Results from the data
warehouse are stored separately and can be used by new job
requests that require the same data. In the MicroStrategy
environment, when a user runs a report for the first time, the
job is submitted to the database for processing. However, if
the results of that report are cached, the results can be
returned immediately without having to wait for the database
to process the job the next time that the report is run.
consolidation An object that can be placed on a report and is made up of an
ordered collection of elements called consolidation elements.
Each element is a grouping of attribute elements that
accommodates inter-row arithmetic operations.
dashboard A visually intuitive display of data that summarizes key
business indicators for a quick status check. A special type of
document, dashboards usually provide interactive features
that let users change how they view the dashboard’s data.
dataset A MicroStrategy report that retrieves data from the data
warehouse or cache. It is used to define the data available on
a document.
document 1. A container for objects representing data coming from one
or more reports, as well as positioning and formatting
information. A document is used to format data from
multiple reports in a single display of presentation quality.
2. The MicroStrategy object that supports the functionality
defined in (1).
drill A method of obtaining supplementary information after a
report has been executed. The new data is retrieved by
306 Glossary: cache
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Glossary
requerying the Intelligent Cube or database at a different
attribute or fact level.
See also:
•
page-by
•
sort
•
subtotal
filter A MicroStrategy object that specifies the conditions that the
data must meet to be included in the report results. Using a
filter on a report narrows the data to consider only the
information that is relevant to answer your business
question, since a report queries the database against all the
data stored in the data warehouse.
A filter is composed of at least one qualification, which is the
actual condition that must be met for the data to be included
on a report. Multiple qualifications in a single filter are
combined using logical operators. Examples include “Region
= Northeast” or “Revenue > $1 million”.
A filter is normally implemented in the SQL WHERE clause.
Grid/Graph A control placed in a document that displays information in
the same way a MicroStrategy report does.
hierarchy A set of attributes defining a meaningful path for element
browsing or drilling. The order of the attributes is
typically—though not always—defined such that a higher
attribute has a one-to-many relationship with its child
attributes.
level 1) In a data warehouse, facts are said to be stored at a
particular level defined by the attribute IDs present in the fact
table. For example, if a fact table has a Date column, an
Item_ID column, and a fact column, that fact is stored at the
Date/Item level.
2) In a metric calculation, the level is the granularity of where
an attribute appears in its hierarchy, where that attribute
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Glossary: filter
307
Glossary
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
defines how a related metric is calculated. For example, a
metric on a report with Year and Store attributes would be
calculated at the Year/Store level.
See also: level of aggregation.
level of aggregation The point in an attribute hierarchy where aggregation is
performed. For example, in the geographical
State--City--Store hierarchy there are three possible levels of
aggregation.
link A connection in one report or document to another report or
document. A link lets an analyst execute another document or
report (the target) from a document or report (the source),
and to pass parameters to answer any prompts that are in the
target.
metric 1) A business calculation defined by an expression built with
functions, facts, attributes, or other metrics. For example:
Sum(dollar_sales) or [Sales] - [Cost].
2) The MicroStrategy object that contains the metric
definition. It represents a business measure or key
performance indicator.
page-by Segmenting data in a grid report by placing available
attributes, consolidations, and metrics on a third axis called
the Page axis. Since a grid is two-dimensional, only a slice of
the cube can be seen at any one time. The slice is
characterized by the choice of elements on the Page axis. By
varying the selection of elements, the user can page through
the cube.
See also:
308 Glossary: level of aggregation
•
drill
•
sort
•
subtotal
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Glossary
panel A way of grouping data in a document so that users can
navigate subsets of data as if the subsets were pages in a
smaller document. Each “page”, or layer of data, is a panel; a
group of panels is called a panel stack.
panel stack The holder for a collection of panels, or layers of data, in a
document. A user can navigate or flip through the panels in a
panel stack; only one panel is displayed at a time.
permission Defines for each object the degree of control that a user has
over them.
privilege Defines what types of operations certain users and user
groups can perform in the MicroStrategy system. For
example, which objects a given user can create and which
applications and editors he can use.
prompt 1) MicroStrategy object in the report definition that is
incomplete by design. The user is asked during the resolution
phase of report execution to provide an answer that
completes the query. A typical example with a filter is
choosing a specific attribute on which to qualify.
2) In general, a window requesting user input, as in "type
login ID and password at the prompt."
qualification The actual condition that must be met for data to be included
on a report. Examples include “Region = Northeast” or
“Revenue > $1 million”. Qualifications are used in filters and
custom groups. You can create multiple qualifications for a
single filter or custom group, and then set how to combine
the qualifications using the logical operators AND, AND
NOT, OR, and OR NOT.
See also:
•
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
filter
Glossary: panel
309
Glossary
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
report The central focus of any decision support investigation, a
report allows users to query for data, analyze that data, and
then present it in a visually pleasing manner.
See also:
•
filter
•
template
report creation The process of building reports from existing, predesigned
reports in MicroStrategy Developer or in MicroStrategy Web.
report design The process of building reports from basic report
components using the Report Editor in MicroStrategy
Developer or MicroStrategy Web.
schema 1) The set of tables in a data warehouse associated with a
logical data model. The attribute and fact columns in those
tables are considered part of the schema itself.
2) The layout or structure of a database system. In relational
databases, the schema defines the tables, the fields in each
table, and the relationships between fields and tables.
selector A type of control in a document that allows a user to:
310 Glossary: report
•
Flip through the panels in a panel stack, to see different
predefined layers of data, or “pages”, in the same
document
•
Display different attribute elements or metrics in a
Grid/Graph
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Glossary
sort Arranging data according to some characteristic of the data
itself (alphabetical descending, numeric ascending, and so
forth).
See also:
•
drill
•
page-by
•
subtotal
subtotal A totaling operation performed for a portion of a result set.
See also:
•
drill
•
page-by
•
sort
threshold Used to create conditional formatting for metric values. For
example, if revenue is greater than $200, format that cell to
have a blue background with bold type.
widget A type of control that presents data in a visual and interactive
way; an interactive Flash-only graph that dynamically
updates when a new set of data is selected. Some types
include Gauge, Heat Map, and Stacked Area widgets.
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Glossary: sort
311
Glossary
312 Glossary: widget
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
INDEX
A
Android application, opening in a
document 158
Android widget 92
attribute element prompt 70
Barcode Reader prompt 77
creating 70
display styles 71
Geo Location prompt 75
types 70
audience xv
authentication settings for MicroStrategy
Mobile Server 195
B
Barcode Reader prompt 75
attribute element prompt 77
value prompt 77
best practices for designing a document for
MicroStrategy Mobile 14
BlackBerry Enterprise Server (BES) 195
button 180
caption 181
creating 186
custom style 181
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
default link 182
formatting 188
highlight state 181
icon 181
multiple links 182
normal state 181
style 181
tab bar (iPad and iPhone) 182
C
caching online content 276
certificate server for client
authentication 197
setting up 198
client authentication with a certificate
server 197
Command Manager 293
copying text (iPad and iPhone) 54
D
Data Cloud widget (iPhone and iPad) 94
data view (BlackBerry) 61
original layout 62
tabular interactive 62
313
Index
Date Selection widget (iPad) 95
creating 96
example 95
docked panel selector 38
docked panel selector (iPad)
creating 38
document (Android)
designing for MicroStrategy Mobile 14
formatting 25
linking to documents and reports 164
document (BlackBerry)
data view 61
document (iPad)
designing for MicroStrategy Mobile 14
enabling text copying 55
formatting 25, 33
linking to documents and reports 164
document (iPhone)
designing for MicroStrategy Mobile 14
enabling text copying 55
formatting 25, 33
linking to documents and reports 164
document layout
formatting 30
Mobile Views and 27
document, linking to documents and
reports 163
E
example
Date Selection widget (iPad) 95
docked panel selector 38
Graph Matrix visualization (iPad) 99
Heat Map widget (iPad) 100
how to find xii
Image Layout widget 101
314
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Information Window 109
iPad 41
Map widget (iPhone) 118
Interactive Grid widget 105
Map widget 109
Microcharts widget (iPad and
Android) 127
Photo Uploader widget 133
RSS Reader widget (iPhone) 138
Survey widget (iPhone) 141
Time Series widget 148
Timeline widget (iPad) 142
F
formatting
Android document 25
BlackBerry document 22, 61
document layout 30
iPad document 25
iPhone document 25
Mobile View 25
G
Geo Location prompt 74
attribute element prompt 75
value prompt 75
Graph Matrix visualization (iPad) 99
example 99
H
Heat Map widget (iPad) 99
example 100
home screen configuration 265
creating a custom home screen 267
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Index
I
L
Image Layout widget 101
example 101
Image Viewer widget
creating in a document 102
in a document 102
Information Window 40
creating for a button 46
creating for a Grid/Graph 43
creating for a selector 43
creating for a text field 46
creating for an image 46
display (iPad) 47
placement 47
window mode 47
transaction table in 79
Information Window (iPhone) 118
creating 118
installing MicroStrategy Mobile
Server 195
Interactive Grid widget
creating in a document 106
document 105
example 105
iPad
document display when rotated 25
transaction table 78
widget 92
iPad application, opening in a
document 158
iPhone
document display when rotated 25
transaction table 78
widget 92
iPhone 5 20
iPhone application, opening in a
document 158
linking a document to documents and
reports 163
Android 164
creating 165
iPad 164
iPhone 164
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
M
Map widget
creating in a document 112
example 109
Geo Location prompt on 120
in a document 109
Information Window 118
creating 118
Microcharts widget (iPad and Android)
creating in a document 128
display theme 130
example 127
in a document 127
KPI List mode 129
metric column width 130
Smooth Scroll mode for iPad 130
MicroStrategy Mobile
administering 193
architecture 194
client application 194
data security 285
deploying and configuring 222
Android 236, 237
BlackBerry 243, 246
configuring from the device 281
connectivity settings 260
home screen 265
iPad 223, 226
iPhone 223, 226
push notification for iPad and
315
Index
iPhone 278
displaying a report as a widget 91
document display when rotated 25
Mobile View 25
opening a mobile device
application 158
report and document subscription. See
also subscribing to reports and
documents. 286
server 195
subscription workflow 283
troubleshooting 302
MicroStrategy Mobile for Android
calling from a document 160
configuring 237
deploying 236
directions from a document 161
document design for 14
emailing from a document 160
formatting document for 25
mapping current location 160
opening a video from a document 161
texting from a document 160
MicroStrategy Mobile for BlackBerry
configuring 246
from Mobile Server
Administrator 253
from the device 258
multiple devices automatically 247
enabling real time updates 298
installing 243
from a website 245
on a single device 246
on multiple devices
simultaneously 244
MicroStrategy Mobile for iPad
configuring 226
configuring push notification 278
deploying 223
directions from a document 161
316
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
displaying a web page from a
document 161
document design for 14
emailing from a document 160
formatting document for 25, 33
mapping current location 160
opening a video from a document 161
MicroStrategy Mobile for iPhone
calling from a document 160
configuring 226
configuring push notification 278
deploying 223
directions from a document 161
document design for 14
emailing from a document 160
formatting document for 25, 33
mapping current location 160
opening a video from a document 161
texting from a document 160
MicroStrategy Mobile Server 195
authentication settings 195
client authentication 197
installing 195
privileges and permissions 196
SSL encryption 197
Mobile View 25
Multimedia widget
creating in a document 132
in a document 131
P
page-by on a report
BlackBerry 21
iPad 18
panel stack 37
docked panel selector 38
permissions for MicroStrategy Mobile
Server 196
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
Photo Uploader widget
creating in a document 134
destination folder 202
example 133
in a document 133
pre-caching online content 276
prerequisites xv
privileges for MicroStrategy Mobile
Server 196
prompt
Android 63
Geo Location on a Map widget 120
attribute element 70
Barcode Reader 75
Geo Location 74
iPad 63
Geo Location on a Map widget 120
iPhone 63
Geo Location on a Map widget 120
value 66
R
real time updates in BlackBerry 298
report
displaying as widget 91
page-by navigation (iPad) 18
report (BlackBerry)
data view 61
page-by 21
RSS Reader widget (iPhone) 138
S
sample. See example.
security of data in MicroStrategy
Mobile 285
Signature Capture input control destination folder 202
SSL encryption 197
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.
Index
subscribing to reports and documents 286
Command Manager 293
Developer 296
methods 287
MicroStrategy Web 294
multiple subscriptions simultaneously
(Developer) 288
personalized prompt answers (MicroStrategy Web) 296
prerequisites 286
subscribing
Developer 297
MicroStrategy Web 295
unsubscribing
Developer 297
MicroStrategy Web 295
update schedule (MicroStrategy
Web) 296
subscription workflow for MicroStrategy
Mobile 283
executing the report 284
reviewing the report 285
scheduling a report or document 284
support. See technical support.
T
tab bar (iPad and iPhone) 182
creating 184
example 183
technical support xxvi
Time Series widget
creating in a document 149
example 148
in a document 147
Timeline widget (iPad)
creating 143
example 142
Transaction Services 60
transaction table (iPad and iPhone) 78
317
Index
buttons 81
cell 80
adding to a table 89
placeholder text 80
reordering 89
title 80
creating 82
formatting 87
group 81
adding to a table 88
deleting 88
reordering 88
hidden group 81
Information Window 79, 83
troubleshooting MicroStrategy
Mobile 302
connection issues 302
document 302
prompt 303
report 302
Mobile Design and Administration Guide
iPad 92
iPhone 92
Map 109
Microcharts (iPad and Android) 127
Multimedia 131
Photo Uploader 133
Survey (iPad) 140
Time Series 147
Timeline (iPad) 142
Video Player (iPad and iPhone) 152
V
value prompt 66
Barcode Reader prompt 77
creating 67
Geo Location prompt 75
W
widget 91
Android 92
Data Cloud (iPad) 94
Data Cloud (iPhone) 94
Date Selection (iPad) 95
Graph Matrix visualization (iPad) 99
Heat Map (iPad) 99
Image Layout 101
Image Viewer 102
Interactive Grid 105
318
© 2014 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Similar documents

×

Report this document